distinct as that the Apostle makes them opposite 2 Cor. 5.7 Heb. 11. oft Therefore every eye seeing him cannot signifie a sight of faith onely There needed not any expression of EYE or of his being in the Clouds to signifie a sight by faith Wee can now see him in Heaven by faith It is a question whether every eye that is said here to see him shall at first sight see him by faith For EVERY EYE must see him and ALL KINDREDS of the EARTH shall mourne Sure his Antichristian enemies generally shall not see him by faith whom he destroyes at his coming Rev. 19. last 2 Thess 2. to make way for the reigning of the Saints Rev. 20. EVEN SO AMEN John did believe saw Christ by faith but for that sight of him in the Clouds to be visible to him and all the Kindreds of the earth he prayes and raiseth up his faith with an hearty Amen that so it shall bee So that by all these things it is most evident that of a time and state following Christs Ascention John speakes here Nor on the other side can this Revel 1.7 bee understood of the ultimate day of judgement 1. Because it is the same with Zech. 1.10 and so for the same reasons cannot bee meant of that day of judgement 2. Because this is set here as the maine and generall Proposition to the Book of the Revelation in which the Master-peece is to set forth Christ to come and set up his Church into a most glorious estate on earth before the day of judgement as wee shall see abundantly afterwards and to make her reigne with him on earth 3. It were very incongruous for John in the last clause of verse 6. to applaud Christs DOMINION as to continue FOR EVER that is while times and ages last as the Greek imports and in the next breath in the first clause of the seventh verse to say he cometh to make an end of his Dominion For the ultimate day of judgement is the last act of Christs Dominion which done Christ layes downe all his Dominion that God may bee all in all 1 Cor. 15.24.28 Wee may not imagine such incoherencies in Johns expression now most eminently filled with the Spirit Therefore I must needs conclude that there is no such likely time of such an eminent coming of Christ and appearing to his Church as this at the time of Restitution of all things Something of this place will be more plain by that in the next Section § 4 But before wee come to that let us collate and lay together the two precedent places of Zech. 12.10 and Revel 17. and out of both containing the same sense and in the same words let us draw this argument as the summe of both Zechary the Prophet and John the Apostle both prophesie in the aforesaid places of one and the same personall appearance of Christ visibly to the eyes of men on earth after his Ascention But this cannot bee understood of his appearance at the ultimate generall judgement because they speake of his pouring out of grace and giving repentance to the families of the Jewes and of his Dominion thence to continue for many ages to the ultimate end of the world Therefore the said visible appearance of Christ is yet to bee before the ultimate day of judgement Which when should it bee but at the conversion of the Jewes and the throwing downe of his apparent obstinate Antichristian enemies as the circumstances of the said places before hinted doe cleerly evince SECT III. OF THE third PLACE OF SCRIPTURE for Christs Personall Appearance at the great Restauration of the Church viz. Matth. 24. v. 30. And then shall appeare the signe of the Sonne of man in Heaven and then shall all the Tribes of the earth mourne and they shall see the Sonne of man coming in the Clouds of Heaven with power and great glory § 1 OBserve distinctly every clause and word 1. Then shall appeare the signe of the Sonne of man that is the Sonne of man shall appeare for a signe that great things are at hand as it followes in this verse they shall see the sonne of man and mourne 2. The signe of the Sonne of man in Heaven He was before in the highest third Heaven but now in the lowest first Heaven namely of the Clouds as it follows also in this verse 3. And then shall all the TRIBES of the EARTH intimating Jewes as well as Gentiles mourne Why They shall see the Sonne of man that is as man How mourne Doubtlesse Christ meanes as Zechary meant and John meant namely the Jewes with godly repentance and his obstinate open enemies with desperation for the ruine that is coming upon them 4. Coming IN the Clouds or UPON the Clouds See now what was Johns meaning Rev. 1.7 when he said Christ should come WITH the Clouds To this matter with and in is all one And which is considerable our New Translators concur with us as by quotation in the Margin to make this and Rev. 1.7 to be parallel places tending to the same thing § 2 Now Christ spake this before his Ascention and going away above the clouds Therefore it must needs be that this must bee fulfilled after he hath attended above the Clouds Then and not till then will it be rightly said and properly fulfilled that he comes in the Clouds So the Angels at Christs Ascention Act. 1. After that in v. 9.10 He was taken up and a Cloud received him out of their sight the Disciples looking stedfastly towards heaven as he went up they say unto them This same Jesus which is TAKEN up from you into heaven shall SO COME It must needs be improper to say he shall COME IN the Clouds before hee be gone above the Clouds Before hee came at incarnation in the Virgins wombe and in a Manger But now after his Ascention above the Clouds hee shall come in the Clouds § 3 Nor can this his coming and appearance in the Clouds be here understood of his coming at the ultimate day of judgement because of that but foure verses after namely v. 34. which Christ affirmeth with grand asseveration namely Verily I say unto you THIS GENERATION shall not passe till ALL THESE things bee fulfilled And then hee seales it and binds it up in the next verse viz. v. 35. Heaven and earth shall passe away but my words and particularly those words aforegoing shall not passe away A seale doth sometimes represent the Writer as well as the words of the writing This doth something also explaine the former passages of this Chapter That heaven and earth shall passe at Christs coming that is in quality not in substance saith Oecumenius on the 21 of Revel there shall bee a new heaven and a new earth the old passing away as Isa 65.2 Pet. 3. Rev. 21. but Christs word for his Personal appearance to his people before the ultimate day of judgement shall not passe For this appearance of Christ in the
TIME NO LONGER but in the dayes of the voyce of the seventh Angel the Mystery of God should bee FINISHED 2 This time or times are said to be spoken of by all the Prophets § 3 since the world began they therefore that pretend to be skilled in the Prophets shame themselves in denying that maine thing which is in all the Prophets Now all the Prophets since the world began have not spoken of the last Day of Judgement but of the Kingdome of the Messiah they all have spoken and so much and so plainly that the Apostles mindes did much run out upon it even at the first appearance of Christ in the flesh besides their Doctrines afterwards in their Epistles c. concerning it So it seemes by Matth. 20. ver 20. in the request of the Mother of Zebedees Children that is two of the twelve Disciples ver 24. intreating Christ that her two sons might sit the one on his right hand the other on his left hand in HIS KINGDOME and by the strife among the twelve Luk. 9.46 who of them after Christs Passion should be the greatest The same wee have Luk. 22.24 when Christ was ready to suffer And by the question of the Apostles Act. 1.6 touching Christs restoring the Kingdome to Israel in all which places Christ doth not in the least hint any negative to the thing it selfe And the Jewes yet much expect the coming of the Messiah to restore them now not long after one thousand six hundred and fifty Insomuch that one ancient learned Rabbin on his Death-bed exhorted the Jewes that if the Messiah did not come about that time they should imbrace the Christian Messiah as the true Messiah And you heard afore in the first Book the hope of the learned Jewish Rabbins concerning that thing with their quotations of the Prophets upon which they grounded that their hope And to this day that is a stumbling block to the whole dispersed of the Jewes that Christ is not yet come because he yet takes no care as they thinke to restore and settle them according to the many Prophesies and Promises of the Old Testament For this cause therefore Christ will appeare at lest for a time in the clouds personally to convince and convert and settle them 4. One would wonder to see how many of the Prophesies and Prophets of the Old Testament godly and learned Dr. Alsted and § 4 others doe cleerly alleadge for this Kingdome of which we speake And therefore it must needs be our ignorance if we make a wonder at this point questioning whether there be any such thing in the Prophets 5 Peter also speaking to the Jewes in his 2 Epistle doth severall § 5 times quote the Prophets and their Prophesies for this state of the Church which we speake chap. 1.19 We have a more sure word of PROPHESIE whereunto ye do well that ye take heed as to a light that shineth in a darke place untill the day star arise in your hearts Now that the Lord Christ had come in the flesh finished our redemption the effusion of the Spirit had been abundantly fulfilled the Gospel openly promulgated to the world and in part they to whom Peter writes converted v. 1. and Christ ascended the Apostle calls it a darke time in comparison of the rising of the Day-star that is the Sonne of righteousnesse Mal. 4. in their hearts which cannot be meant of eternall glory after the last judgement to which the Prophesie of Old Testament doth lead them to wait for it till it be fulfilled And chap. 3.13 Wee according to his PROMISE looke for new Heavens and a new Earth c. which promise is Isa 65.17 And by the context there of inhabiting the earth cannot be understood of supernall glory after the last judgement § 6 But what is particularly here mentioned in this third of Acts that these Prophets speake of There are foure notable things 1 That there is now so long since Christs ascension a time of refreshing to come for the Jewes to whom these words were spoken as well as for others At which time their sins should be totally blotted out For the state of the Church we speake of by all we can gather from Scripture shall bee a sinlesse time as to the Church 2 That this time of refreshing shall be as proceeding from the PRESENCE or 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 from the FACE of the Lord which evidently signifies a sight of Christ 3 That God shall send Jesus which was before preached to them He had sent him already by Incarnation But yet notwithstanding God will againe send him The Jewes had yet many sorrows therefore he shall be sent againe for their refreshing And they had their spirituall condition in part restored but God will send againe for the restitution of all things 4 It is said Christ comes for the restitution of all things Therefore this cannot signifie Christs coming for the destitution or dissolution of all things And therefore it altogether sounds of an happy time before the all-destroying last judgement Restitution signifies restoring Restoring signifies an attainment of that perfection that was lost viz. in lapsed Adam either in men or things Rom. 8.21 c. The CREATURE it selfe ALSO shall be delivered from the bondage of corruption into the glorious liberty of the sonnes of God For the whole CREATION GROANETH c. untill now and not onely they but we our selves also c. that have the FIRST FRUITS of the SPIRIT waiting for the Redemption of our BODIES Lay all together that both men and things groan after this estate And that the Creatures shall share in it as it relates distinctly with an emphasis to the bodies of the Saints and then meditate whether it be likely that a supernall state of glory in the highest Heavens is here meant No the New state of things below the New heavens and the New earth which Peter speaks of 2 Ep. Chap. 3. v. 13. quoting it out of the Prophet Isa 64.17 is the meaning of this Rom. 8. The Heavens above need no making New Nor have they earth in them The New Hierusalem to which the Kings shall bring their honour comes downe from heaven Rev. 21. So that it is a new state of glory below § 7 This also would be well weighed in this place of Act. 3. that in as much as it is said Until the restitution of all things the state of things here meant must of necessity be before the ultimate end of the world as our opponents conceive of the end of the world Because at the end of the world according to their opinion shall be the dissolution of the earth and no need of the Heavens If then shall be the restitution of some men namely the Elect to supernall glory yet that will not amount to the phrase in the Text viz. the restitution of ALL THINGS But the Apostle tells us as wee touched but now in Rom. 8. That all the Elect and all the Creation
and so slaine with the sword that the Fowles were filled with the flesh of them that were slaine chap. 19. verse 20. A strange thing to me if any should dreame these things to be done only Spiritually or in the world to come There proceeded indeed the sword out of his mouth that is Christ bid his Saints to slay them which afore and after yee have explained but they were materially or corporally slaine as the time weapon and their buriall in the bowels of Birds challenge that sence yea marke further the Armies ruine is put in Counter-destruction or opposition to the ruine of their Chieftain or Chieftaines whose destruction was to be cast ALIVE into the Lake therefore the slaying of the Army with the sword to be devoured by the Fowles must signifie a Corporall destruction § 3 Now this destruction Chap. 19.20 cannot be at the ultimate Day of â—udgement for that day is not till after the destruction of Gog and Magog which is long after the destruction of Antichrist vers 8 9 10 11 12 c. of this twentieth Chapter clearly distinguished from that destruction of Antichrist by two notable circumstances including many other particulars of order time place c. ¶ The first Circumstance is That Gog and Magog warre against the Saints whiles they are in their injoyment of their glorious peace after the said Saints had reigned a thousand yeares ver 7.8 when they had been partakers long afore viz. at the beginning of the thousand yeares of the first resurrection as a pledge that they should not dye the second death at the second Resurrection ver 6. after that they had reigned and as Kings and Priests and too with Christ a thousand years in the same sixt verse none of which particulars can consist with supernal ultimate glory when Christ himselfe layes downe all his power 1 Cor. 15.28 And after they have injoyed this condition a thousand yeares then and not till then begins the Gogicall-Magogicall warre upon which comes the destruction on Gogmagog ver 7 8 9. but the warre of Antichrist in the nineteenth Chapter is when the Saints are in great trouble their bloud had been poured out unavenged till then vers 2. the earth corrupted ibid. The Nations are till now to be smitten and to be RVLE'D with a ROD of Iron ver 15. The Wine presse of the fiercenesse and wrath of God Almighty to be trodden ibid. with many the like intimations throughout the Chapter of the different state of the Church now a thousand yeeres before Christ came to destroy Gogmagog as the sequell of the twentieth Chapter makes the compute ¶ The second Circumstance is That after the thousand yeares of Satans binding and Antichrists destruction Satan is againe let loose he seduceth Gog and Magog and then the Devill himselfe Chap. 20.10 is cast into the Lake of fire WHERE WERE the BEAST and the FALSE PROPHET which had been cast in there formerly Chap. 19. ver 20. evidently pointing at the destruction of Antichrist as finished long afore the fore-being there of the Beast and false Prophet being made the description of Hell as sometimes the portion of Hypocrites is the description thereof § 4 The next passage in this twentieth Chapter of Revelation is what he saw in ver 4. John saw Thrones and they that sate upon them and judgement was given to them and he saw the soules of them that were beheaded for the witnesse of Jesus and for the Word of God and which had not worshipped the Beast nor his Image neither had received his mark upon their fore-heads or in their hands the meaning of all which you have in the next Chapter viz. the 21. for vers 1. it is said And I saw a new heaven and a new earth little reason to mention earth if it had been to describe a state in heaven above The place is taken out of Isa 65.17 as Peter hints 2 Pet. 3.13 We according to his PROMISE looke for new heavens and a new earth I say out of Isa 65.17 where God promiseth unto the Jewes to build new Heavens and a new earth but with all mentions their injoying of houses and vine yards In the second Verse of the one and twentieth Chapter it is said John saw new Hierusalem indeed that on earth is old but nothing is old in the highest Heavens so that nothing there can be said to be new therefore this cannot be meant of that heaven It is expresse It comes downe from heaven therefore it cannot expresse a state in that supernall heaven even as it followes PREPARED as a Bride which plainly evinceth that it is not meant of ultimate glory where the Church is not prepared that is done in this world but perfected as vers 3. it is said I heard a voyce OVT of heaven to import that it was of things not in the supreame Heaven viz. That the tabernacle of God is with men where God WILL dwell with them which if meant of the supernall Heaven would have been exprest in a contrary phrase viz. The tabernacle of men is with God for there is no need of a promise to assure us that in the highest Heavens God will dwell with us Agreeable to which the fourth verse promiseth that all teares shall be wiped away of which promise as in relation to the supreame Heaven there was not the least need since God made it but knowne to the Sonnes of men that they shall inherit that place all sorts Christians Heathens c. easily know and beleeve that there in that place are no teares nor cause of teares as appeares in the Christians Creed and the Heathens Doctrines of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and their Elysian fields Every thing in that Heaven is so good that it cannot be made as in verse 5. new that is better No need there of that in the sixth verse either promise or performance to give unto him that is athirst of the fountaine of the water of life It is enough for God to promise that Heaven as Paul thought it enough to say Phil. 1. I desire to be dissolved and to be with Christ if we be once there we shall not thirst Even as there according to ver 7. shall be no striving to overcome much lesse to overcome that in ver 8. Feare and unbeliefe c. They in the supernall Heaven have overcome all things therefore all these demonstrate that this Chapter is of a state on earth not of one in supreame glory of such a state on earth it is proper to say as v. 7. He that possesseth it shal inherit all things not only Gods presence but also all things though as yet all things are not subject to Christ himselfe Heb. 2.8 and he shal be Gods Sonne For if we beleeve we now are the Sons of God afore we come to ultimate glory then this promised with a shal be must signifie a suture estate and on earth because of other circumstances as we are now enumerating that
are found to be in a quite contrary estate to Satans binding from seducing For in those ages were infinite monstrous Heresies and Apostasies so well knowne to the learned that I spend not time to quote Historians For beside the Heresies afore touched there arose within the said thousand yeers viz. about six hundred and odd after Christ horrid Mahumetisme spread to this day over a great part of the world About which time the mystery of Papal iniquity had wrought to a great height Both increasing for the generall to this day Both the one by their Turkish wars the other by their massacres having poured out a sea of Saints blood Now how can wee say with any shew of reason that Satan was bound this while from seducing the world when he did so potently prevaile 4 Where are the Learned or the Libraries to tell us of the rising or of the reigning of the Saints or Martyrs from sixty nine to one thousand sixty nine after Christ 6 If the thousand yeers begin at sixty nine yeers after Christ and consequently end at one thousand sixty nine there hath been since that a thousand sixty nine to this yeer one thousand six hundred fifty two above five hundred and eighty yeers which five hundred and eighty yeers cannot be counted a litle season It is said Rev. 20.3 After the thousand yeers are expired Satan shall be let loose a little season But by Pareus his account of the expiration of the thousand yeers at the thousand sixty nine yeers Satan since that hath been let loose five hundred and eighty yeers as wee have said which cannot be reckoned for a little season in comparison of the thousand yeers of Satans binding as is Saint Johns sense for it is above halfe as much as a thousand yeers Seventhly and lastly If the thousand yeers are so long since expired where and when since that expiration hath appeared that after a little season was gathered together Gog and Magog encompassing the Camp of the Saints upon a new seducement by the Devil and were consumed by fire from heaven upon which the day of judgement began SECT III. The usefulnesse of the Old Testament to the point in hand touching the glorious state of the Church yet to come § 1 HAving laid the foundation of the proofe of our Thesis touching the glorious state of All things upon earth yet to come in the twentieth Chapter of the Revelation Now let us take all the Bible afore us both Old and New Testament in order and hear what harmony they make as an Anthem or Prelude before that glorious Scene begins The Old Testament laid downe the ground of our hope The New Testament now so long since Christs coming in the flesh carries on our expectation to look for such a thing Wee shall cull out of the Old Testament those places that to our best light are most cleer and have some touches of explanations out of the New Testament § 2 And great reason there is to take before us the Old Testament because the New Testament in speaking of this visible glorious Kingdome of Christ to be on earth refers us to the Old As Peter in 2 Ep. Chap. 3. v. 13. refers us to Esa 65.17 Wee saith Peter look for new Heavens and a new Earth according to his PROMISE wherein dwels righteousnesse which promise is that of Esa 65. Not to repeat things spoken afore Here is mention of Heavens in the plurall The one Empyrean Heaven is unchangeable Therefore Heavens of pure manifestation of Doctrine of pure practise of Gospel order of a new state of the Church of new peoples added to it of a renovation of all things on earth must be understood It must be meant of such heavens as God will shake Heb. 12.26 spoken by a Jew Paul to the Jewes the Hebrews after Christs coming and ascending At which time of his presence in the flesh though he shooke down the vaile viz. at his passion and gave the Temple a shake by Prophesie Matth. 24.1.2 c. which tumbled it downe about forty yeers after his ascension yet he had not to that time shaken downe the vaile off the Jewes heart 2 Cor. 3. Nor hath he to this day as sad experience testifies No nor the Iewish worship in their Synagogues practised to this very time Nor hath he set up things so as they must remaine instead of the things that are shaken Therefore Peters promise of new Heavens wherein dwels righteousnesse is yet unfulfilled A phrase too short to reach so high as to advance the commendation of the Empyrean Heaven as it is impertinent to tell us that there shall dwell righteousnesse where we well know was never any the least unrighteousnesse We expect and must expect by all circumstances upon that place such a fulfilling of that Promise as shall create or make new Heavens on Earth wherein dwels righteousnesse here below where formerly hath been unrighteousnesse That place onely can be said to be made new with the inhabitation of righteousnesse that formerly had no righteousnesse or little left it being worne out In like manner the same Peter in 2 Ep. chap. 1. ver 19. speaking of Christs Kingdome referres us to the Old Testament viz. Numb 24.17 We have saith he a more sure word of PROPHESIE whereunto yee doe well that yee take heed as unto a light that shineth in a darke place untill the day dawne and the Day-star arise in your hearts which is taken out of that of Numbers 24.17 There shal come a starre out of Jacob c. out of Jacob shal come he that shal have dominion c. At Christs Incarnation this Star Christ did arise on some of their hearts when the Starre guided the Wise men to goe to the place of Christs birth and there to worship him and after some few gleanings of people beleeved on him But this while he was but as an evening Star Peter saith now after his Ascention that the time was yet to come that he should be a morning Star a Sunne upon the hearts of the generality of the Jewes And it were strange if any wise man should dreame that at the same instant Christ should call the Jewes and come to the last Judgement That in the same moment the black cloud of the day of Doome should cover the world and the Day-star of the Sonne of righteousnesse should arise on the numerous peoples of the Jewes scattered in all Nations Thus in Act. 3.20 21. we are referred to the PROPHETS since the WORLD BEGAN to know and hope for the visible Kingdome of Christ on earth of which we speake One of which Prophets to speake nothing of Acts 3. having spoken so much in the second Booke is Enoch to whom Jude also referres us ver 14 15. and quotes his words to supply the losse of his Book Enoch the seventh from Adam prophesied Behold the LORD COMETH with ten thousands of his Saints to execute judgement and convince all that are
brake off three of the ten Dan. 7. v. 20.24 that is about the yeer one thousand * Bucholc Ind. Chron ad an 1009. Periodus Judaica inquit Helvic ad an 950. circiter after Christ the Saracens tooke Hierusalem and have held it to this day And about the yeer after Christ one thousand foure hundred and fifty Mahomet alias Mahumete took Constantinople where Constantinus Palaelogus the last of the Grecian Emperours was utterly overthrown ** Bucholc Ind. Chron. ad an 1453. inde inquit orientis imperium penes Turcas fuit Sic Helvic in Chro. Atque hinc inquit imperium orientis prorsus ad Turcas tranâ—rit So that the Turke plucked up by the roots that is wholly subdued to him three of the ten Roman hornes or Kingdomes to wit Asia Graecia and Syria of which Jury was a part and became absolute Emperour of all the Easterne Empire *âŽ* Vid. Huet in Dan. 7. v. 8. But as for the rest of the ten hornes of the fourth Beast the Roman Empire being the fourth Kingdome upon the earth and diverse also from all the Kingdomes it is said it devoures the residue of the whole earth v. 23. and shall tread it downe and break it in peeces And thus the seven Roman hornes and the one Turkish Horn subduing three of the ten shall go on in their dominions to enslave the generality of the whole earth blaspheming God and making war with the Saints untill a time and times and halfe a time be finished v. 24 25. And then v. 26. the Iudgement shall sit and they i. e. the aforesaid judgement Iudicature or Sessions shall take away the said dominion and shall give it v. 27. to the people of the Saints of the most High Sutable to this Circumstance of order in Rev. 13. 1. c. There is a Beast rising out of the Sea that is the Roman Emperiality or Empire Antichristed or Papized that answers to all those foure Beasts in Daniel 7. For this Beast is like a Lyon in his mouth like a Beare in his feet like a Leopard in his adorned shining skin or faire outside And for his head it is sevenfold with ten hornes which ten hornes say the learned grew all on one head viz. the last of the seven heads said to have ten hornes because so at first as we said but now upon Dan. 7. but it hath for continuance but seven hornes because the Turk the King of the bottomlesse pit Rev. 9.1 to 12. brake off three Againe as the Beast aforesaid in Dan. 7. must hurt but for a time and times and halfe a time or dividing of times So this Beast in this 13 of the Revelation that contains all foure Beasts in Dan. 7. because it hath the evill qualities and Tyrannicall power of all those foure And from this one ariseth the other with one horne breaking off three of the others ten must continue and have power to doe mischiefe two and forty months vers 5. of this 13. of Rev. which two and forty months is made all one with a time and times and halfe a time Rev. 12.14 ¶ 3 The last thing wherein the seventh of Dan. and Rev. the twentieth agrees is in intents viz. to set forth that the Saints shall yet have a glorious Kingdome on earth over which they shall under Christ there reigne For seeing both visions agree in forme and matter and sense who can doubt but they must intend the same thing In that seventh of Dan. it is oft mentioned and hinted in sundry passages that the SONNE OF MAN must have the same Kingdome or dominion which all the foure Beasts had successively and he must give it to the Saints vers 13 14. I saw one like the Sonne of Man and there was given him dominion and glory and a Kingdome that all People and Nations and Languages should serve him His dominion is an everlasting Dominion 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 seculi saith Arias and oft signifies but for a long time expounded presently everlasting that is shall not be destroyed that is by any other earthly Monarch as the other foure destroyed one another vers 17 18. The foure great Beasts are foure Kings expounded here and verse 24. Kingdomes which shall arise out of the earth But the Saints of the most High shall take the Kingdome and possesse the Kingdome which the other foure Beasts had successively v. 19 20 21. the same is repeated againe with applications of the type or vision v. 23 24 25 26 27. All which was never yet fulfilled nor can the ultimate judgement be a time for it In like manner Rev. 20. Christ comes DOWN from heaven v. 1. and chaines up the Devil and for a thousand yeers To what end Not for a state of glory in the highest heavens above as all those passages testifie But that the Saints may rise and reigne with Christ a thousand yeers on earth as it is expresse Rev. 5.10 as a part of the proposition to the whole Revelation that and Chapter 1.7 making up the whole I say to reigne in New Jerusalem which to that end also comes down from heaven Chapter 21.1 and so long to reigne as till Satan bee let loose againe to seduce the Nations that the ultimate judgement begins verse 7. to the end of the Chapter So that what dominion the King of the bottomlesse pit had Rev. 9.1 c. to hurt for five months and what dominion the Beast had for two and forty months Rev. 13. and both under Satan while he was loose that very same in pure substance though not in the evill quality the Saints must have under Christ So that where the Saints were hurt beheaded and persecuted even there they must rise and reigne under Christ a thousand yeers v. 4. of this 20. of Rev. § 6 Thus you see there is great reason why we should looke into the Old Testament as well as into the New for this glorious estate of the Church yet to be on earth Where note for conclusion of this third Section That as God gave the Church in the Old Testament a glorious temporal estate on earth as well as a spirituall viz. That in Paradise on earth so by the like reason he will give both to the Church of the New Testament on earth described in Revel 21 c. as a second Paradise on earth For the New Testament must not be inferiour but rather better then the Old only with this difference The Old Testament-Church being then but in its infancie had the temporall first as a type of the Spirituall The New Testament Church must have the Spirituall first and the Temporall last being then made compleatly up and unto a perfect man according to the stature of Christ Ephes 4. SECT IV. Wherein the Promise to Adam Gen. 1.26 27 28. paralleled with Psalme the eighth as the eighth Psalme with Heb. 2.5 fully opened to prove our maine Position that there is yet to be on earth
by the Apostles so to signifie as hath been said that it is never used to signifie the supreamest Heaven even as it would have been most unapt for such a signification So that put all the Apostles first phrase in Heb. 2.5 together and the inhabited world to come can signifie no other but that the Monarchy on earth in the Apostles time under the Romans should be hereafter before the last Judgement the Monarchy of Christ or of the Saints under him Which the second phrase of our Apostle viz. of WHICH WEE SPEAKE doth more explaine and demonstrate For where did the Apostle speake afore of that world to come as he intimates in this relative speech but in Heb. 1. ver 6. which being read ingenuously and with an honest plainnesse of interpretation according to the Greek * Our Translators in putting AND after the word saith doe goe against common sense against the propriety of our English against the contexture of the Greek and against the Hebrew text whence it is quoted Is it not against common sense and the idiom of our English to speake thus in a recitall of anothers words He saith or he said AND so and so What more ridiculous then for us about to tell the words of another man then to make And the first word of the recitall In a History of the Old or New Testament it is a common thing to bring in a party with And he said but in a quotation it is not tollerable And t is against the contexture of the Greek wch plainly runs thus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which as rendred afore runs smoothly but as our Translatours render and place the order of words of the whole verse they do with a vaine tautalogie as it were joyne to saith two ENDS for it runs thus AND againe he saith AND Lastly our Translatours intimate as if the latter AND were in the Hebrew whereas there is no such thing For the whole place in Psal 97.7 is to to a word thus Confounded he all they that serve graven Images that boast themselves of Idols WORSHIP HIM ALL YEE GODS runs thus But when AGAINE he bringeth in or shall bring in the first begotten sonne into the WORLD he saith Whence they that will grant us least will yeeld thus much that would in Heb. 2.5 must signifie the world on earth or else they utterly overthrow the Apostles reference there The world to come OF WHICH WE SPEAKE But we must by their favour inferre more viz. that in this Heb. 1.6 is mention of the same world to come on earth else how doth the Apostle chap. 2.5 speake all that For unto the Angels hath he not put in subjection the world to come in forme of a repetition of what he had said afore of the selfe-same matter which hee no where afore mentions unlesse in chap. 1. ver 6. viz. BUT when AGAINE he bringeth in the first begotten into the WORLD he saith ALSO or in LIKE MANNER or LIKEWISE Let all the Angels of God worship him For our Translators have very untowardly and incongruously put and placed AND between saith and let †as they have needlesly if not prejudiciously to the genuine sence of the verse put And at the beginning and altered the order of words of the Greek which if kept as we have followed it in our translating runs exceeding smoothly Some dictate to us that Againe must be referred to saith not to bringing in I would if possible they had also demonstrated it to have saved our labour of demonstrating the contrary The first AND seeing they translate it And would serve one would thinke to signifie againe he saith For more surety they have put two And 's but it is safest for us to keep close to the Originall having chap. 2. ver 5. with many other texts to hold analogie which fluently runs as we said But when againe he bringeth in the first begotten into the world he saith likewise Let all the Angels of God worship him As to signifie Christs coming againe into the world to come on earth after the ruine of Antichrist and all his adherents as we say the Old and New world which was distinguished by the Floud ruining the ungodly whiles the race of visible Saints still lived And if all that I have spoken in the Text and Margine doe sufficiently evince with ponderating unprejudicated men that so as aforesaid the Text is rightlier read then the Quere will be when did God ever to this day bring his first begotten Sonne into the world Againe when the ninety seventh Psalm was pend Christ had not been brought in at all in the flesh into the world even as 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifies as led by the hand And when the Epistle to the Hebrewes was pend Christ had been brought into the world but once never since againe And for the heavenly Angels of God they did worship him at his first coming attending serving and admiring his Incarnation Luke 2. Temptation Mark 1.13 Resurrection Mat. 28. Dispensation of the Gospel 1 Pet. 1.12 and Ascention Acts 1. Christ said he could have twelve Legions of Angels at his command but 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Angel in the Revelation signifies also Men-Angles that is Magistrates as well as Ministers so viz. the Angelicall Potentates Kings Emperours Judges and Powers over men as the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Elohim Psal 97.7 quoted by the Apostle †See more Sect. 10. §. 2. signifies the same Psal 82.1 so that according to the latitude of the words and the designe of God all human Principalities Powers and Dominions must submit to Christ and his Saints under his conduct command or government as well as the Angels then shall give him a more visible and fuller honour the Saints being made 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 are made able to see it But that we may returne to Heb. 2. this was never yet since Adams fall performed viz. man so to be over all visibly on earth as Adam was over all which is Davids application in Psal 8. of Gen. 1.26 c. and Pauls explication in this second of Hebrewes of Psalme 8. * Some weekes after I had pend these things upon Heb. 2.5 compared with Heb. 1 6. c. I met with Master Modes Opuscula newly set forth concurring with me in the Grammer and sense sense of those places with his learned reasons which I have therefore here inserted in the Margin 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 â—nim inquit Terra est non caelum At ubi inquies de hac 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in praecedentibus locutus est Apostolus ut dicat 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Aio ab istis verbis v. 6 cap. 1. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. id est cum verò ITERUM introduxerit primogenitum suum in orbem terrae dicit c. Quae enim ex inde ex libro Psalmorum â—d finem usque capitis citantur de adora tione Angelorum de sceptro
Felix Jun. and the Country of Madianaea on the South of Arabia Hieron Fourthly Midian of whom came the Midianites those arch enemies of the Jews for which God commanded to vexe them of whom was Balaam which gave that wicked counsell against Israel Their maine Country also had from them the name of Madianitis in the borders of Arabia petraea But because also some of them dwelt in the Countries adjoyning to the Ishmaelites therefore they are sometimes called Ishmaelites though of so different an original as aforesaid Gen. 37.25.28 Judg. 7.33 and 8.24 Fifthly There came of Keturah Ishbak who was the founder of Laodicea Scabiosa in Suria Sixthly Shuah of whom came the Saccai inhabiting the East part of Syria by Batanaea Jun. Seventhly Sheba whose posterity dwelt in Arabia deserta Prerer Jun. Eightly Dedan of whom came the ' Dedaneans who inhabited as Hieron supposeth in Aethiopia or in the Country next to the Idumeans as it seems to be hinted Jer. 49.7 8. or in Adadi in Syria Palmerene Jun. Ninthly Epha whose Country is named in Isa 60.6 and is scituated beyond Arabia called Saba Hieron l. 17. in Isa Tenthly Epher of whom saith Josephus Africa had its name Of the rest named in that of Gen. 25. the Countries are not knowne only they are said in verse 6. to dwell East-ward in the East-Country that is Arabia or Syria So that we see many Kingdomes and Nations both of Jews and Gentiles thus far as we have computed came out of Abrahams loynes according so the aforesaid promises and how many Nations since who is able to reckon Now say the above-mentioned Scriptures out of the Old Testament the multitude of Nations to come of Abraham are to partake of the Covenant as an everlasting Covenant God to be their God Yea ALL the Nations of the earth to be blessed in ABRAHAM and to be blessed IN HIS SEED often there repeated 4 ¶ The Lord addes in the said Old-Testament quotations an obsignation or sealing if I mistake not of all the three particulars afore mentioned viz. Of spirituall salvation Of an happy possession of the earth and of a numerous multiplication in Jewes and Gentiles over the face of whole earth accompanied with that salvation in that their injoyment of that universal possession 1 Of salvation he gave them the seale of Circumcision which was a signe and seal of the Covenant of grace viz. of the righteousnesse of faith Rom. 4.11 And it is said afore in that Gen. 17. that this Covenant or token of the Covenant should be in their flesh for an everlasting Covenant because as in the substance God would continue a Seal of his Covenant for ever till the Restitution of all things as the Covenant it selfe should bee for ever still the same salvation should be sealed still the same use of the seale to confirme the assurance of faith still upon the same ground of the tenor of the Covenant of grace as we shall see after onely the matter of the seale to bee changed viz. the Green waxe of water to be put in the room of the Red waxe of bloody Circumcision Secondly Of that happy possession upon the face of the whole earth he gave them the seale of the seven Kingdomes of the whole Country of Canaan and that for an everlasting possession so as still as it is annexed to be their God For from the time they first entred Canaan according to the promise they were never universally and absolutely expelled out of it and shall there keep possession till they be most gloriously restored to the possession of it the seed of Abraham the beleeving Jews and Gentiles ruâ—â—ng there and over the whole earth as long as ever there shall be any habitation on earth as the Rere of testimonies yet to march up shall abundantly testifie And if any enemies shall rise up against the Nations of Jewes and Gentiles the seed of Abraham by faith they shall as surely conquer them as they did the land of Canaan Thirdly Of their numerous blessed multiplication God gives the seale of changing Abrams name to Abraham He should not be onely Ab-rom that is an High-father but Ab-Rom-Hamon an High-father of a multitude even as he changed Sarais name to the same intent from Sarai my Mistresse to Sarah A or the Mistresse § 4 Sutably how are the said promises to Abraham extended in their utmost breadth to his posterity viz. Isaac Jacob Joseph Ephraim and Manasseh Gen. 26.4 Gen. 48.19 Gen. 49.26 quoted afore at large all sounding of an universall happy dominion over the face of the whole earth § 5 Consonant to this Old-Testament Plat-forme doe the excellent Master-builders the Apostles in the New Testament reare the superstructure with distinct reference to the places and particulars of the Old ¶ 1. For Salvation they often expresse it under the notion of the righteousnesse of faith and of imputing faith for righteousnesse and of being blessed through faith ¶ 2. For Possession it is afore expressed by the Apostle that their leaving of Mesopotamia their owne native Country and never returning though they might and after that their sojourning in Canaan so long as strangers and pilgrims in Tents and Tabernacles though it was promised them for an inheritance and doing all this by faith not seeing the Promise fulfilled by sence did argue that they sought a Country an heavenly one a City that hath foundations prepared of God made and built by God All which how can we better and safelier expound then by the Scriptures which having told us Rev. 20. we shall reigne with Christ on earth as the meaning hath been proved even where Gog and Magog shall after make opposition a thousand yeares In the next chapter viz. 21. they shew us the place and state where and how viz. in the New Heaven and New EARTH in the holy City new Hierusalem coming downe from Heaven where God himselfe will be with them and be their God and all teares shall be wiped away with many other Characters and Circumstances fully answering to that afore of Heb. 11. Which as we have before demonstrated cannot be meant of the Highest Heaven but of a state on earth The like wherof we have in 2 Pet. 3.13 that the Saints shall injoy a new earth according to Gods promise which Promise extant Esa 65.17 will not indure to be interpreted but of a state on earth as the branches of it evince ¶ 3. For Multiplication As the generality of the world Jews and Gentiles have according to the flesh come out of the loynes of Abraham so the Apostles exposition of the Promises holds forth that the generality of the world shall be the Children of Abraham by faith and blessed in THAT SEED of him viz. Christ That they that are of the faith of Abraham are the children of Abraham That God would justifie the HEATHEN through faith according to the GOSPEL he preached to Abraham That the sence of that Promise In thee Abraham all the
Cap. 11. The Sadduces â—â—kt R. Gamaliel whence he could prove that God would quicken or make alive the dead he answered them 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Out of the Law Deut 31.16 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 out of the Prophets Isa 26.19 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 out of the holy writings Cant. 7.9 The Greek and Latine Fathers likewise interpret this place of the Resurrection of the dead viz. Irenaeus l. 5. c. 15 and c. 34. yea and of the Resurrection of the just Tertul. de Resur c. 3 1. Cyril Aug. lib. 20. de Civit Dei Clemens Romanus in Ep. ad Cor. As for the third part the agreement between Isaiah and Iohn prophesying of the joyful state of the Church and their joying in it he that hath but half an eye may see that it signifies that great will be the glory of the Church when those things mentioned by Isaiah and Iohn shall be fulfilled and can signifie no lesse then a glorious restauration of the Church on earth as all circumstances concur in both places Even as great was the Prophets and the Evangelists joy personating or representing the Church in a way of Songs of praise John in the 9 10 11 12 verses of this seventh of the Revelation speakes of the Churches triumphing on this wise After this saith he I beheld and lo a great multitude which no man could number of all Nations and Kindreds and People and Tongues stood before the Throne and before the Lamb cloathed with white Robes and Palmes in their hands and cryed with a loud voyce saying Salvation to our God that sitteth upon the Throne and unto the Lambe And all the Angels stood round about the Throne and about the Elders and the foure Animals or living creatures and fell before the Throne on their faces and worshipped God saying Amen Blessing and Glory and Wisdome and Thanksgiving and Honour and Power and Might bee unto our God for ever and ever Amen Which expressions of Praise meetly suit to the words of our Prophet in the five and twentieth of Isaiah vers first second third and fourth O Lord thou art my God I will exalt thee I will praise thy Name for thou hast done wonderfull things by faith here praising God for things to bee done as if done as the Church doth in that seventh of the Revelation for thou hast made saith Isaiah of a City an heap c. Therefore shall the strong people glorifie thee c. for thou hast beene a strength to the poore a strength to the needy in his distresse c. And verse 9. It shall bee said in that day Lo this is our God wee have waited for him and hee will save us This is the Lord wee have waited for him wee will bee glad and rejoyce in his salvation Thus of the first Instance The second Instance John likewise in the 21 Chapter of Revelation first foure verses applies those three parts of Isa 25. viz. the Churches salvation the enemies destruction and the Churches exaltation unto a future glorious state of the Church yet to be upon the earth I saw saith John there in a Prophetick vision a new heaven and a new EARTH which sounds shrilly of a state on earth For the first heaven and the first earth were passed away and there was no more Sea Pareus confesseth New in quality not in substance which plainly condescends to a glorious state of the Church to be on earth the highest heaven above being of so much better a substance physically as the Philosophers rationally contend that it needs not to be made better in quality Therefore the meaning must be that the lower heavens and the earth below shall be qualified with freedome from all evill as to the Church and the inhabitants thereof high and low shall be made better both physically and morally The old heaven and earth must passe away The enemies of the Church must be removed or converted Adams curse shall cease Rom. 8. and in this state shall as in 2 Pet. 3. dwell righteousnesse and absolute pure worship And the cessation of Sea signifies also the removing of all enmities against the Church farre from her For if it be taken figuratively it signifies no more brinish brackish waters of false doctrine in the Church as waters sometimes in Scriptures signifies doctrines and no more wicked men among the Church compared Isa 57. to the troubled Sea for there shall bee as John tells us in this 21 of Revelation no unclean thing to enter into this estate If taken literally with some acute wits it signifies that at the time of this great Restauration the Sea shall be no longer totally liquid and fluid but at least at top in most parts of the habitable world crusted over consolidated and compacted to be as a Chrystaline heaven below to bee an high-way for all parts of the world to travell each to other for spirituall communion without any impediment of wind or weather Then being a time as of a New creation there will be no need of trafficking for riches Nor shall the knowledge of the Lord be bounded from the poor Indians who have not the help art or animosity of Navigation to learn of Christians Then nor the Egyptiack Sea with the seven streams nor the great Euphrates c. shall hinder Jews or Gentiles from personall spiritual communion and communication God would rather either thus alter or else dry up all Seas then the glory and welfare of his Church should be hindered To that wee have said touching the meaning of the cessation of Sea our grave new Annotationists concurre thus farre No more Sea say they either literally for there will need none for trade The fire perhaps at the worlds end will dry it up or figuratively no more warre against nor trouble in the Church The Church shall not be like the raging Sea but like the quiet earth So they Saint John goes on in the description of the glorious state of the Church on earth of which Isaiah prophesies I saw saith St. John New Jerusalem coming down FROM Heaven saying The Tabernacle of God is WITH MEN and He will DWELL with THEM and they shall be his people and God himself shall be WITH THEM and be their God all which cleerly relate to a state on earth and God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes and there shall be no more death nor sorrow nor crying nor paine Which words exactly answer to Isaiahs words in v. 8. of swallowing up death and wiping away all tears Third Instance In like manner St. John carries down other passages of Isa 25. to the times to succeed long after him not fulfilled to this day For what is there spoken in Isa 25. v. 2. and v. 12. of making the City of strangers an heap a defenced City a ruine a Palace to be no City an high Fortresse into dust c. to the great joy of the Saints so that they shall sing for joy of
crying c. And lastly the application of v. 21. of this sixtieth of Isaiah is as cleerly applyed to the same purpose Rev. 21. v. 27. And there shal in no wise enter into it any thing that defileth neither whatsoever worketh abomination or maketh a lie § 3 Now where is the man or book that can say these things have been fulfilled since the time of this Prophesie That the Nations of Jews and Gentiles have conjoyned in matters of Religion as in the first ten verses of this sixtieth of Isaiah When ever did the Nations of the Gentiles bow down to the Jews and those that would not serve them did perish as v. 11.12 When were the Jews made an eternal excellency and the joy of many Nations as it is in 15 v when as v. 21. were the Jews made a righteous people to inherit the Land for ever But as sure as God is true these things must be And upon earth as the circumstances constraine And therefore before the ultimate judgement SECT XXIV § 1 THe fifteenth place in Isaiah is in Chapter 63. first six verses of which in a word Christ comes up as it is revealed to the Prophet from Edom with dyed garments from Bozra red in his apparrel by treading the Wine-presse alone treading downe his enemies in fury til their blood be sprinkled upon his garments § 2 John in the Revelation Chapter 14 v. 19 20 and Chapter 19 v. 11 12 13 14 15 16. applies these in the same phrase and figure to Christs destroying of Antichrist to be fulfilled on earth yet afore the last judgement Another Angel came out from the alâ—ar which cryed to him that had a sharp sickle saying thrust in thy sickle and gather the clusters of the vine of the earth for her grapes are fully ripe And the Angel thrust in his sickle into the earth and gathered the vine of the earth and cast it into the great Winepresse of the wrath of God And the Winepresse was trodden without the City and blood came out of the Winepresse even unto the horse bridles c. And I saw heaven opened and behold a white horse and he that sate upon him was called FAITHFULL and TRUE and in righteousnesse he doth judge and make war His eyes are as a flame of fire and on his head were many Crownes c. And he was cloathed with a Vesture DIPT IN BLOOD his name is called THE WORD OF GOD. And the Armies which were in Heaven followed him upon white horses c. And out of his mouth goeth a sharp sword that with it he should smite the Nations and he shall rule them with a rod of iron and he TREADETH THE WINE-PRESSE OF THE FIERCENESSE and VVRATH OF ALMIGHTY GOD. And hee hath on his vesture and on his thigh a name written KING OF KINGS and LORD OF LORDS § 3 These are obvious enough for every one to apply to the point in hand according to our former method so often repeated ## SECT XXV THe sixteenth place in Isaiah is Chapter 65. verse 17 c. to the end of the Chapter Verse 17. Behold I create new Heavens and a new EARTH and the former shall not be remembred c. v. 18. But be you glad and rejoyce FOR EVER in that which I create for behold I creat JERUSALEM a rejoycing and her people a joy v. 19. And I will rejoyce in Jerusalem and joy in my people and the VOYCE OF VVEEPING SHALL BE NO MORE HEARD IN HER NOR THE VOYCE OF CRYING v. 20. There shal be no more thence an infant of dayes nor an old man that hath not filled his dayes c. And they shall build houses and inhabit them c. And plant vineyards c. Before they call I will answer c. The woolf and the lamb shall feed together c. § 1 This will every one say that marks what he reads must signifie a state of the Church upon earth to bee before the ultimate judgement ## § 2 And there is no man or monument can be produced that ever this was so fulfilled since it was prophesied Therefore it must signifie a state on earth yet to come according to the Prophesies of the Apostles and their applications of the aforesaid Prophesie of Isaiah So doth Peter and John apply the 17. verse Peter in 2 Ep. chap. 3. v. 12. and 13. comforts the Jews to whom he wrote 1 Pet. 1.1 that before the ultimate judgement there should be new Heavens and a new EARTH wherein dwels righteousnesse according to Gods promise meaning this of Isaiah 65.17 And John in Revel chap. 21. refers this same place of Isaiah to the time of the glorious state of the Church on earth immediately after the fall of Antichrist In Rev. 19. the three last verses is Antichrists fall Chap. 20. the Devill is bound and the Saints reign Chapter 21. is their glorious estate described and in part by these words of the Prophet Isaiah I saw saith John a new Heaven and a new Earth and the first heaven and the first earth were passed away And addes in verse 17. Nothing that defileth enters therein In like manner the 18. and 19. verses of this 65 of Isaiah are referred and applied by St. John in Rev. 21. the first five verses to the glorious state of the Church yet to come after the fall of Antichrist Behold I make all things new new Heavens and new Earth and new Jerusalem which is all one as to say he creats And wipe away all tears from their eyes and there shall be no more sorrow c. I need say no more of this place to an understanding Reader of which Mr. Mead comparing it with 2 Pet. 3.13 and Peter with it saith Miror c. I wonder how any man can understand this of a state in the highest heavens SECT XXVI THe seventeenth and last place in Isaiah is Chapter 66. v. 5. c. to the end of the Chapter * This place of Isa 66. from the fifth verse c. Justin Martyr in his Dialog cum Tryph. p. 312. doth testifie to belong to the Kingdome of Christ that is to be at his second coming In which words saith he commending this place of Isa is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the mastery of our being againe generated or made new at the Resurrection 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and absolutely of all who expect Christ shall appear at Jerusalem and by well doing study to please him Thus Just Mart. with which Mr. Mead is much taken and understands him in those words 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 to mean the Resurrection of the godly § 1 The Prophet in the fifth verse directs his speech to them that in an holy manner trembled at Gods word The effect of his speech there is that though their false brethren hated them and cast them out for Gods name sake saying Let the Lord be glorified that is we have done well in casting them out or let God appeare in his
the dayes of his life Upon which words the Old Genevah notes and our New Annotations say thus This seven and thirtieth year of Jehojachins imprisonment was the five and fiftieth year of his age so long had Nebuchadnezzar kept him in prison And so long were his wife and children in Babylon whom Nebuchadnezzar son Evil-Merodach after his fathers death preserved to honor Thus by Gods providence the SEED OF DAVID was PRESERVED UNTO CHRIST Thus they and they say well For of Jebojachin alias Jeconiah came Salathiel a Prince c. Jer. 29.2.1 Chron. 3.17 Matth. 1.12 and so downward the Scepter doth not utterly depart from Judah till Shiloh Christ comes Gen. 49.10 Thus you see they were not altogether without a King in the time of the Babylonish captivity 2. Nor without a Priest in the said time of that captivity nor after unto Christs time Jeremiah and Ezekiel who both lived in the time of that Babylonish captivity were Priests Jer. 1.1 Ezek. 1.3 And after in the time of Antiochus Epiphanes one of the Kings of the Grecian Empire that same famous Mattathias that stood up for the rescuing of the Jews against that Antiochus was a Priest and Judas Maccabeus was his on 1 Maccab. 2.1 2 3 4 5. And chap. 3. v. 1. And unto and in Christs time there were Priests and High-Priests and Sacrifices Luk. 1.8 2.24 Matth. 26.3 Job 2.13 14. And abundantly often in all four Evangelists We conclude therefore that it is impossible â—o understand these many dayes to signifie the time of Iudahs captivity in Babylon yea or as our New Annotations would have it the time since Iudahs return from Babylon till Christs ascension But these many dayes must be extended unto the conversion of the Ten Tribes as well as the two yet to come Dr. Mayer with Calvin * On those words After that long time they shall have David their King ratiocinatively speaks out our conclusion at length of words thus Calvin saith he ingenuously confesseth that by David spoken of in the Prophets Christ is alwayes set forth and therefore this long time of the Jews being without a King c. must be understood of the time immediately fore-going their imbracing the Faith of Christ and therefore not of the time of their captivity for then they had not David for their King Neither can it be understood of the time immediately going before Christs coming and after their return for then they had Princes and Priests and Sacrifices And what remaineth then but to understand it of the time that now is at the END WHEREOF the Iews shall turn to Christ And herein Gualter and Tossartus follow Ierom. § 4 All that hath been said will be yet made more evident by that ## punctual specisication of the time in the next verse following when the Israelites shall be delivered and saved viz. It shall be after that in the former verse 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in as Vatablus Grotius Arias and Jerom renders it novissimo dierum that is the last of dayes even as in like manner the Septuagint and Chalde render it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is in the end of dayes And therefore justly doth Lyran interpret this last of dayes to be sub sinem mundi i. e. A little before the end of the world And Rabbi David Kimchi thus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. This saith he shall come to pass in the last times in the beginning of the time of salvation when the children of ISRAEL shall return by Repentance And Dr. Mayer thus It is said that this should be in the last dayes whereby the time of the Gospel is alwayes set forth all the time afore being counted old Heb. 1.1 2. But these Novissima tempora that is these are the newest times this Latine phrase signifying the last times because all things are new Yea and AT THE LATTER END OF THEM the Jews shall be new creatures as are all that are in Christ and then the world shall be destroyed and God will make a new Heaven and a new Earth If to all these you will hear a learned Papist Alapide it is worth while because whiles an enemy to the truth in Hypothesi he telleth the very truth in thesi In the last of dayes for so he renders our Text according to the Old Latin that is saith he In the end of the world when a little afore or at the coming of Antichrist especially after the SLAYING of him the ISRAELITES and JEWES who clave to him while the said Antichrist was alive and reigned partly by remembring the Sermons and Miracles of Elijah and Enoch and partly by the Exhortations of other Preachers shall be converted unto Christ even as I have said upon the 11 chap. of the Revelation For then all Israel shall be saved Rom. 11.25 So Saint Hieronym Haymo Albert. Hug. Lyran and others Secondly I sidore and a Castro think these things to be done in the Incarnation and first coming of Christ to wit INCHOATIVELY For then A FEW of Israel BEGAN to be converted Others erre who think these things to have been performed in the relaxation of the Babylonish captivity by Cyrus Thus Alapide confesseth twice over in his works the just time of the fulfilling of these things to wards the end of the world and at the destruction of Antichrist But like a Papist he blindly supposeth that Antichrist is not yet come that so his Pope might not be thought to be Antichrist But what he hath granted is enough for our purpose truth so far prevailing upon a Papist § 5 Thus the persons i. e. the Israelites the Ten Tribes as well as the Two and the time of their deliverance being cleared next for the close of this Chapter and our consideration of this Prophet comes the deliverance it self viz. they having been so long a time humbled by great afflictions after all at the time aforesaid they shall return and seek the Lord their God and David their King That is God and his Son Christ or God in his Son Christ Even as verynear it their own Rabbins and Hebrew Doctors render it in their Chalde Paraphrase 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i. e. After that the children of ISRAEL shall be led by REPENTANCE and shall seek the worship of their God And shall obey Christ the Son of David c. And thus the learned pious Christians viz. The Genevah Notes our New Annotations and Dr. Mayer understand it by authority of Scripture In the latter dayes Hebrew the end of dayes that is when the world now neer unto an end they shall seek David their King that is The Messias Christ the Son of David Jer. 30.9 Ezek. 34.23 24. Ezek. 37.24 Mat. 9.27 Apoc. 22.16 And his Kingdom in which Davids Kingdom is promised to be for ever Psal 72.17 i. e. To the end of the World For David himself long since is dead as the Apostle argues Acts 13.34 35 36. when he would prove that
according to those prophesies ver 1 2. To what end Why now as he declares himselfe particularly to observe the time when this prophesie shall have an end that the day may dawn and the Day-star arise Which saith he ver 3 4 5.6 7. though some through wilfull ignorance sooffe at the promise of CHRISTS COMING yet be it a thousand years off and more all this to God is but as one day And when that time is come that day shall be a thousand years So that though it seem long to men yea so long to impenitent men as if he would never come yet he will be sure to come and that suddenly as a theife in the night and formidably to the wicked as in form of a day of Doom the Heavens passing away and the Elements melting and the works of the EARTH dissolving But not so to the Church not so is the state of the Church expressed with a keen antithesis NEVERTHELESSE q. d. notwithstanding those high words and huge deeds WE beleevers according to his PROMISE that divine ancient promise so particularly expressed Isa 65.17 18 19 20 c. look for new Heavens and a NEW EARTH wherein dwels righteousnesse Which cannot be the description of a state in the highest Heavens which were never worne old nor made of earth nor without the inhabitation of righteousnesse So that the result of Peters discourse is that that Sun of righteousness or Day-star shall rise and radiate at the time of the dissolution of the power of the wicked and the restitution of all things for the glory of the Church on earth Our oft touching upon this 2 Pet. 3. afore makes us speak so sparingly of it now ¶ 3. That coming of Elijah in the fift verse before this great day must signifie an Elijah yet to come either personally or personatedly For though Elijah is said to come in part personatedly in John Baptist representing him by the similitude of his zeale in doctrine and austerity of life Matth. 17.12 yet Elijahs coming is not totally nor mainly fulfilled to this day He must yet come again either as we said personally that is he himselfe individually in his owne person or else personatedly that is if I may so speake specifically represented by one of the like kind and degree of parts exactly like unto him viz. mighty in spirit and action to doe as aforesaid in this context to convert the heart of the Fathers to the children before that great day afore mentioned yet to come where he shall Matth. 17.11 RESTORE ALL THINGS That this truth may find the better entertainment in mens apprehensions I will for the most wave my obscure selfe and sentence herein and present it in the words of divers learned men wherein they urge their owne reasons for it ¶ 4. The Scribes of and among the Jewes the clerick Classis of them very learned men in their generations by office Expounders of the Law Ezra 7.6 9. Luk. 5.17 and 7.30 asserted after John Baptists death from this very Text of Malachie that Elijah was to come Mat. 17.10 From them grounding on that Text some of the twelve Disciples after Christ had chosen them and indowed them with wonderfull gifts Matth. 10.1 2. c. and had shewed them his transfiguration on the mount Mat. 17.1 2 c. to 9. take up the same Tenet as worthy of consideration touching the coming of Elijah and presseth it upon our Saviour in the same Mat. 17.10 the Lord Christ in answer to them first doth clearly acknowledge at that time a good while after John Baptists death * For John Baptist was beheaded An. 32. after Christs birth and Christs transfiguration was An. 33. Buchol Ad An. 32 33. That Elijah SHAL COME and asserts it with a TRULY as our Translators render it as indeed in sence so it is And then Christ addes that when hee comes he SHAL 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 restore all things Which makes one maine objection that John Baptists time on earth was not the ALL of Elijahs coming Besides Christ speaks of Elijahs coming so long after John Baptists death in the present tence 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 commeth as intimating that he is still coming or yet to come So that as Christ comes twice once past another to come so with a proportionable decorum his Harbenger comes twice both times to usher in his Master The one is past in John Baptist the other is to come in him that is still called and expected by the name of Elijah as we shall see more by and by ¶ 5. Of the Christians likewise long since Christs ascension there are many men of fame for piety and learning both ancient and modern that doe not only assert but argue expressely or couchedly for the coming of Elijah yet to be fulfilled 1. Tertullian who flourished about the year one hundred and eighty after Christ in his Book concerning the Resurrection asserts †Quis inimicos Christi jam subjecit pedibus ejus secundum David Psal 110 Quis coelo descendentem Iesum talem conspexit qualem ascendentem Apostoli viderant Nulla ad hodiernum tri bus ad tribum pectora caeâ—iderunâ— â—gâ—oscentes qâ—eâ— puâ—ugerunt Nâ—mo adhuc EXCEPIT HELIAM Nemo aâ—huc fugit Antichristum Nem adhuc Babylon â—xituâ—â— flevit Tertuâ— lib Ve Resurâ—ect â— 22 Et â—cce mutam â—obis Heliom THESBITEN Sed â—nim Metempsychosis illorum est revocatio animae jampridem morte functae in aliud corpus iteratae HELIAS autâ—m non ex decessione sed ex translatione venturus est nec corpori restituendus de quo non est exemptus sed mundo reddendus de quo est translatius non ex post liminio vitae sed exsupplemente prophetiae idem ipse sui nominis sui bominis Tertul. lib. de Anima Cap. 35. that Elijah after his time was to come by the same reason that his coming is a positively set down in Scripture to be a signe of Christs second coming as any other signes Some of his words are these who hath subjected Christs enemies under his feet according to David Psa 8. Psa 110. who hath seen Jesus so or such a one descending as the Apostles saw him ascending Act. I. II. There is no Tribe with Tribe to this day smiting their breasts acknowledging him whom they have pierced Zech. 12.10 c. Matth. 24.30 Rev. 1.7 No man hath yet RECEIVED ELIJAH Mal. 4.5 Mat. 17.11 No man yet hath fled from Antichrist Rev. 12.6 c. he means from the persecutions of Antichrist for he was not in his time risen to that power as to persecute nor till long after And saith Tertullian no man hath wept over the ruine of Babylon Rev. 18.9 c. He goes on in another place thus And behold I will send you Helias the THESBITE But indeed their Metempsychosis or transmeation of soules is the revocation of a soule that having long since finished the death of that
the terme and end of the world In the Talmud wee read 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. The world shall endure six thousand yeers in one it shall be destroyed upon which many comment thus The ELEMENTARY and TERRESTRIAL world shall endure six thousand yeers and in the seventh thousand all shall return to their ancient chaos of which they were made And after that a New world shall exist And that likewise after it hath stood six thousand yeers shall also relapse to its former Chaos And then the revolution of the world shall endure for nine and forty thousand yeers And after that the heavens and the earth shall be annihilated * It seems by this that what the doctrine of Mahomet said of 1000 yeers and 49000 was learned of these Rabbins All this they thinke to be shadowed forth partly by the six dayes of the Creation because according to the Psalmist Psal 90.4 A thousand yeers in the sight of the Lord are but as yesterday Partly by the Law and the Commandement That six yeers the land should be tilled in the seventh it should rest and in the fiftieth the Jubile should be celebrated As for my opinion saith R. Menasse I thinke That after six thousand yeers the world shall be destroyed upon one certaine day or in one houre that the orbs of heaven shall make a stand as unmoveable that there shall be no more generation or corruption and all things by the resurrection shall be renovated and return to a better condition And this saith he out of doubt is the opinion of the most learned Aben Ezra who commenting on that place of Isaiah Chapter 65.17 Behold I create new heavens and a new earth c. saith thus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i.e. Rather we are to say that the Heavens are expansed and that God will make new the aire to be singular good c. and then also shall there bee added to the earth a fresh vigor whereby it shall bee made New According to which verdict of Aben-Ezra saith Menasse There is a total and universal reforming or new-framing of the world And although the Text hath it New Heavens yet there is no necessity nor doth the sense require it that we should understand New Heavens to be meant of other Heavens diverse from these now in being but onely that there shall be a certain Instauration and Reformation of them into better And whereas afore the Ancients said that after six thousand yeers the world shall be destroyed in one the meaning is not that after six thousand yeers should be nothing how can it be measured by ONE Againe the word Destroy doth not signifie a total annihilation but onely a ruine or lapsing of things Therefore from those words cannot be concluded that the world shall be reduced to nothing but as R. Hasday thinketh 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i. e. Nothing else can be gathered from the aforesaid speeches but that there is a CERTAIN NECESSARY ETERNITY OF THE WORLD IN SPECIE or KIND that is that the world be not plainly consumed and turned out into nothing but still bee turned into a better world Accordingly R. Huna saith concerning R. Joseph Galilean even those heavens of which it is written I create new Heavens are already created in six dayes in Genesis And suteably in that 65. of Isa 17. speaking of creating a new earth he doth not say meerly 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 new but with an additional of an emphatical article 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 this same earth New So that as Psal 102.25 26. The heavens and the earth waxing old as a garment are CHANGED as a new drest garment And to the same purpose the Ancients speak * Par. 30. Noah say they saw the New world yet at that time the world was not altogether destroyed but renewed according to Psal 102.26 The summe is That the world shall not be destroyed for a thousand yeers but in one day or punctum of an houre the earth shall suffer a mighty change and upon that change immediately shall follow the resurrection of the dead and a new world Even as it is in Zoar * Parasah Toldoth Ishac 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 From the hour of the resurrection of the dead the world shall remain stable And Lactantius Firmianus intimates that he had received it from a Cabalist that the terme of six thousand yeers being consummated the state of all humane affairs shall be formed into a better condition ¶ 5 In the fifth chapter is held forth by the Rabbins what kind of ruine there shall be of the world before the great restauration of it yet to come And concerning the Jews war with GOG and MAGOG All the Rabbins saith Menasse Ben Israel agree in this That theISRAELITES after their return into their own Country at the time of their redemption are not to injoy a full and perfect tranquillity and peace until the last war with Gog and Magog shal be finished For it shall come to passe saith he that after the Israelites shall returne into Palestine that Nation of Gog and Magog shall come to invade and possesse that Country and that with an huge multitude of men and infinite forces of souldiers with the same hope and mind to recover the Kingdome and Empire to themselves as the Goths and Vandals accompanied with a multitude of vile persons subjected unto themselves most puissant Kingdomes and triumphed over them And although perhaps they may be perswaded that Monarchy of the Jewes to bee erected not without the singular divine providence of God yet haply they may thinke that it shall continue but for a time and so may conclude that it will bee as possible for them to subvert and subdue it as it was for Nebuchadnezzar and Titus Vespasian formerly to overthrow and enslave it With this hope and confidence those Nations of Gog and Magog shall with an armed power invade the Holy Land and having againe expulsed thence the Israelites they shall endeavour to subjugate them under their power All which may be confirmed by divers places of Scripture 1 By Ezekiel Chap. 37. where the Prophet treating of the gathering together and restititution of the Ten Tribes and of the other Two signified by the Two sticks in which the names of Judah and Ephraim were written and declaring that all those Tribes shall be conjoyned and shall have David to be their King for ever c. he by and by subjoyns in the 38. Chapter that this people shall be broken and exceedingly troubled by Gog and Magog Therefore he begins the 38. Chapter thus Son of man Set thy face against Gog the land of Magog c. And prosecutes the reason Vers 14. Therefore Sonne of man prophesie and say unto Gog Thus saith the Lord God In that day when my people dwelleth safely shalt thou not know it And thou shalt come from thy place out of the North parts thou and many people with thee all
family in heaven and earth is named There is Bethel even where God in special appears which special appearance is in the person of Christ And lastly where ever Christ is with us wee are with him so as that for that time is heaven to us therefore the Apostle Paul desiring a state in the world to come Phil. 1.23 calls it a being with Christ not heaven So that yet still it remaines to bee proved that Christ shall not appear to his people before the ultimate day of judgement or that Christ hath no place of refreshing his people for a time before the ultimate day of judgement but onely the highest heavens after the ultimate day of judgement SECT II. Mr. Baylies second Argument § 1 AS to his accusation of coyning new and false senses to many Scriptures wee say it is a begging of the Question And we retort it For Mr. B. opinion for many generations hath so allegorised upon all the Prophets speaking of the state of the Jewes and of the universal Church to be on earth afore the ultimate day of â—udgement that I confesse I was thereby for a long time kept in the darke so that I could make no use of the Histories and Prophesies of the Old and New Testament in relation to these things but onely here and there by way of morall observations and allusions § 7 But let us heare his Argument Christ sits at the right hand of God till the last day therefore he comes not to reign on earth a 1000 yeers before the last day To which we say that this argument thus far hath been argued and answered in effect in the first argument yet because there are some fresh proofs we are contented againe to answer it and to discusse them And for answer we deny the Antecedent taking the last day in Mr. Bailyes sense for the ultimate day of judgement But if we take the last day for that day in 2 Pet. 3. which shall be a thousand yeers then Mr. Baily concludes nothing against us But Mr. Baily will prove the Antecedent that Christ doth sit at the right hand of the Father till the last day meaning the ultimate day of judgement viz. the evening of our last day For so I suppose he means his proof is his major Proposition in Ps 110.1 Christ sits at the right hand of God till ALL his enemies be made his footstool Whence he assumes this minor But all his enemies are not made his footstool till the last day For till then Satan death and all wicked men are not fully destroyed therefore c. To this major Proposition out of Ps 110.1 Mr. B puts in a word of great consequence to serve his own turne which in divine arguing from a text is very foule play viz. the word ALL. For as it is not in our English Translation so nor is it in the Hebrew text where it is onely 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 thine enemies indefinitly And the Apostle having an infallible spirit to know the mind of the Scriptures quoting this place Heb. 10.13 renders it that Christ sits there expecting 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. putting no ALL in But suppose it be said ALL all his enemies this is sufficiently fulfilled when Christ overcomes all all his enemies are so subdued yea visibly in themselves or in their effects that they shall never hurt the Church more which shall come to passe when the Iewes are settled at the beginning of the thousand yeers as many Scriptures afore shewed And to speake according to St. Iohn in the Revelation then as in Chap. 19. Antichrist and all his adherents shall downe then as in Chapter 20. Satan shall downe then as in Chapter 21 Sinne shall downe And for death this is destroyed Chapter 20. For if all the Saints then live and reigne a thousand yeers then is this a state of immortality of their bodies And for the ultimate day of judgement then is not a destroying of death but a reviving of the worst death sc the second death to the worst of men so that the wicked live onely to dye that death Rev. 20.12 to the end It is said that the last enemy of the Saints that is destroyed is death 1 Cor. 11. Because so St. Iohn names the enemes in order First all the wicked Rev. 19. Then the Devill Rev. 20.1 And last of all death v. 4. and all these orderly at the beginning of the thousand yeers at the beginning of the seventh Angels sounding his Trumpet I say at the beginning thereof And to make all our answer plainer When it is said All shall be under Christs feet the meaning is not that all shall be annihilated For after the ultimate day of judgement there shall be viz. in hell sinne and devils and wicked men and the greatest death viz. the second death i. e. eternall condemnation therefore the meaning must bee that all shall be so under Christs feet that they shall no more mischiefe the Church Satan shall not seduce them Sinne shall not touch them Death shall not dissolve them But at the end of the thousand yeers Satan and the hypocrites in the corners of the world shall begin to make an head and this immediately draws downe Christ to the ultimate day of judgement who raiseth all the dead wicked and takes them and the wicked that are then alive and passeth everlasting condemnation upon them Rev. 20.7 to the end of the Chapter SECT III. Mr. Bailyes third Argument § 1 ALL the godly at Christs comming from heaven doe rise immediately to a heavenly glory ergo none of them doe arise to a temporall glory for a thousand yeers upon earth § 2 Answ We might deny that wee call the Argument you call it the consequence because Mr. Baily doth not say to glory in heaven much lesse the highest heaven For their state on earth a thousand yeers is not onely an heavenly glory but the state is called Heaven Rev. 21.1 c. 2 Pet. 3. But that we shall fix our answer upon will be the denying of the Antecedent and expounding of the proof Mr. Baily brings for proof of the Antecedent 1 Cor. Chap. 15. vers 22.1 Thess 4.14 Matth. 25.31 Joh. 6.39.40.44 Heb. 9.28 ¶ 1 To the two first we answered afore For the third place of Matthew it concludes nothing to the said Antecedent For Christ separates the sheep from the goats notably at the beginning of the thousand yeers when the open wicked then alive generally perish Revelation 19. and all the Saints alive are set in a glorious condition Chap. 20. ¶ 2 To the fourth place viz. in Joh. 6.39.40.44 I will raise it up at the last day We answer this doth not infer any thing in behalf of the Antecedent For lo this thousand yeers is truly the last day For as it is in 2 Pet. 3. before it are the last dayes in which men shall say Where is the promise of his comming And it is after said A thousand yeers
whiles the said darke troubles are extant and incumbent upon the Church even therein is a continued tendency towards the glory thereof these refining the Church for that state Malac. 3. verses 2 3. and thereupon Christ is neerer and readier for their full deliverance and acceptance verses 4.5.17 § 4 For after the night is over the day dawns unto the appearance of the day-star the Sunne So at the end of these dark troubles yea for the ending of them Christ the Sonne of Righteousnesse shall appeare Malach. 4.2 mark the method of that Prophet after that Chapter 3. v. 2 3. compared with 2 Pet. 1.19 all which places are largely discussed afore So that when the said troubles are at the highest then Christ will appear most gloriously for the destruction of the causers of all those troubles even all the enemies of the Church of which appearance of Christ and destruction of the enemy see Dan. 7.13 14. c. 2 Thess 2.8 Rev. 19. verse 11. c. to the end of the Chapter where they are lively characterized most worthy the Readers perusall Upon which destruction on the enemies by the presence of Christ the glorious time of the thousand yeers begins and that with the resurrection of all the Elect as most methodically it follows after that in Daniel as a close of all the troubles mentioned in the whole Prophesie Chap. 12. the two last verses and doth methodically follow that in the Revelation as the blessed Catastrophe of all the confusions in that whole Prophesie in Chapter 20. the first six verses So that next in an immediate order of nature followes the New Creation Chapter 21.1 of which in the next Section CHAP. II. Touching the New Creation THe Chaos being made the Creation of all particulars follow which New-creation is mentioned both in the Old and New Testament Rev. 21.1 John sees a New Heaven and a New Earth How so unlesse created new For the alteration is such that the old heaven and earth seem as it were to passe away So that this New Heaven and Earth is that which Peter and the rest that beleeved with him 2 Pet. 3.11 12 13. did expect that all the former being dissolved there should be New Heavens and a New Earth according to Gods PROMISE Now where is that promise but in Isa 65.17 Behold I create New Heavens and a New Earth so that the former shall not be remembred or come into minde In all which places the expression of earth demonstrates that it is a state on earth besides many circumstances annexed in all the said places before discussed in our third Book the word Heaven being no opposition to it which from Gen. 1. to the end of the Revelation is oft used to signifie those Heavens of the Ayre clouds c. which are appurtenances of the Earth which Paul calls by intimation the first Heaven 2 Cor. 12.2 § 2 With the Creation of this New World are created therein the appurtenances of it viz. ¶ 1. New Jerusalem Immediately after the Creation of a New Heaven and a New Earth St. John sees Rev. 21.2 the holy City NEW JERUSALEM comming DOWN FROM GOD out of HEAVEN and therefore signifies a state on earth And the Prophet Isa in that 65. Chapter verse 18. having mentioned the creation of the New Heaven and the New Earth immediately addes that the Lord saith Lo I create Jerusalem viz. into a happy condition of which by and by ¶ 2. The Inhabitants of this New World and New Jerusalem are no lesse then created First If there were no more then the conversion of the Jewes as the preparation to this new state especially they having been so long opposite to Christ this were no lesse then a Creation A Miracle is a kinde of Creation And the School-men say That though Conversion be not a Miracle properly yet it is more then a miracle Let mee give my vote in this reason because Conversion is out of resistances of mans stubborne minde and heart Miracles are wrought on non-resistances And in this is Conversion more then Creation because Creation is out of matter that hath a disposition of submission to the will of the Creator But mans unregenerate will whiles such is obstinately opposite But no man will doubt but that a Resurrection is a Creation Now the Scripture compares the conversion of the Jewes to a Resurrection Ezek. 37.5 c. Dan. 12.2 Rom. 11.15 In all which places the Call of the Jews is metaphorically called a Resurrection For it is a raising from spiritual death to spiritual life from sinne to grace and from Civil bondage to Civil liberty as the Scripture oft mentions But secondly The Inhabitants are further multiplyed and perfected by a Physical Resurrection of all the deceased Saints Rev. 20.4 and a Physical mutation of the living Saints 1 Cor. 15.51 52. So that as the Apostle saith in that Chapter verse 44. and Phil. 3.21 They shall have spiritual bodies needing nor meat nor drinke c. and made like to Christs glorious body as we have several times discussed afore Now a real Physical Resurrection of bodies and such a reall physicall change of them are no lesse then a Creation Is it not fully a Creation to make men of dust Is it not a creation to change flesh and blood into a likenesse to the radiating Sunne Just so is it inthese things ¶ 3 The Qualifications of places and persons are created As first Righteousnesse being one of the qualifications is also created In 2 Pet. 3.13 in that New Heaven and New Earth made New by creation as the quotation of it out of Isa 65.17 demonstrates there dwels Righteousnesse by vertue of that Creation Grace being nothing else but divine created qualities even as in that 65. of Isa it is expresse that God will create in Jerusalem other excellent qualifications which we shall presently name Sutably Peter in that 2 Epist 3. Chap. v. 13. having mentioned the New Heaven and Earth addes as an appurtenance to it wherein dwels righteousnesse and all by vertue of a Creation as the Apostles referring to Isa 65.18 plainly speaks And from both places John hath this in his vision Rev. 21. verse 1 2 and 27. That into this New Heaven and Earth and holy Jerusalem all new as we shâ—wed by Creation there shall in no wise enter any thing that defileth as in the first creation all that God made was good yea exceeding good Gen. 1.31 Secondly There shall be created in this New state the qualification of peace Isa 57.19 I CREATE the fruit of the lips PEACE â—EAâ—E to him that is afar off by captivity or otherwise and to him that is neer saith the Lord and I will heal him Peace peace doubled signifies very great absolute perfect peace as that time shall be a time of an universal perfection Thirdly Of this New state there shall bee another qualification viz. joy or rejoycing and that by the means of the New creation for it
same purpose apply Hag. 2.21 22. By shaking heaven and earth once more saith he the Prophet seems to mean in part that there shall be a change not onely of the customes of the people which are the Earth but also of Kingly powers and humane Majesties which are the Heavens Which place of Haggai the Apostle applies to the Kingdome of Christ Heb. 12.26 27.28 29. of which application though part may comport with the Kingdome of Christ as spiritual which hath ever been yet the rest seems to â—ooke as farre as Christs Kingdome to come on Earth For since Haggais or Pauls time God never so shook the material heavens of Orbs and Stars or the metaphorical of Royalties and Majesties that the Kingdome succeeding as the Text plainly intends could not be moved Even as the close exhorting to serve God acceptably because he is a consuming fire is most like to Peters exhortation 2 Pet. 3. to bee holy in conversation because after the destruction of the world by fire we shall have new heavens and a new Earth The place seems to allude to and to Prophesie from Gods shaking of Mount Sinai that as at that time God shook his people out of Egypt and separated them by divine Lawes from all the Nations of the earth to be a Royall Church by themselves so he will shake all the world of high and low ones when he sets up his last kingdom viz. Christs visible kingdom on earth and therewith makes all new For saith my Author that same Once more signifies the removing of all former old things in Earth and Heaven viz. of Customes of People and Crownes of Kinglyhoods and makes all new with sanctity and spirituality in the quality though men and creatures shall be in substance extant upon the earth according to their species or kinde and his Sovereignty in paramount glory ruling all Just as Zachary hath it Chap. 14. verse 9. And the LORD shall be KING over ALL the EARTH In that day shall there be ONE LORD and his name one That is as some learned expound There shall be no more Lords but the Lord Christ and his Dominion shall be greater then ever any was Which the Prophet Malachy doth notably surveigh Chap. 1. verse 11. in these words From the rising of the Sunne even to the going downe of the same my name shall bee great among the Gentiles c. CHAP. IV. Concerning the Qualifications or Qualities of this Kingdome of Christ Viz. Negatively it is a State that is Sinless Sorrowless Deathless Superiorless c. Temptationless Timeless Positively it is the Restauration of the Creation Perfection of all Qualities Confluence of all Comforts Preface to Eternity With several other Qualifications by a natural and necessary consequence flowing from these SECT I. It is Sinlesse § 1 ANd no wonder For it is not imaginable that the deceased Saints should be raised and the living changed to injoy this glorious state on earth in Christs Kingdome with the least tincture of sinne either of their owne or others This were to bring the deceased Saints to their losse And the changed state of the living would not be freed from sinne which would bee their greatest sorrow which as the next Section demonstrateth cannot consist with this glorious state It would be a misery not a felicity for the soules of the deceased to come out of supernal glory into a body of sinne or for them or the changed to be mixed with the society of gracelesse men A meer regenerate estate not yet perfect lamented that condition so long since as Lot and David 2 Pet. 2.7 Psal 120.5 yea the latter complained of society with men of faire outsides flattering with their lips and eating bread at his Table but were not right at heart And our Saviour warns his Disciples as of a danger that they should bee among men that outwardly seem to be sheep but inwardly were Wolves which this glorious state will not admit So then the huge augmentation of this Kingdome or fifth Monarchy shall not as in worldly Monarchies cause pollution and corruption This shall bee Status optimus maximus the biggest and best state that ever was or shall be on earth all suitable to a resurrection The places of Scripture asserting the sinlesseness of this time are very many and very cleer so that I need but repeat them to convince the ingenuous Reader ¶ 1 Adam we know was created sinlesse according to the Image and likenesse of God to have Dominion over all and to rest on the Sabbath now this state of Adam is applied by David Ps 8. to a future state of man which the Apostle Paul accommodates to our estate and rest in the inhabited world to come Heb. 2.5 and Chap. 4. verse 9. as wee have afore demonstratively expounded those places If there be any difference it is in this as the Apostle sets it forth 1 Cor. 15. that our estate shall be better then his ¶ 2 Num. 30.5 6 8. The Lord thy God wil bring thee into thine owne land and the Lord thy God will circumcise thine heart and the heart of thy seed to love the Lord thy God with all thy heart and all thy soul and thou shalt returne and obey the voyce of the Lord and do AL HIS COMMANDEMENTS Which was spoken of and to the Jews long since deceased being never yet so fulfilled to them or any of that Nation succeeding them and therefore according to the truth of God must be fulfilled to all the elect of them and of their posterity ¶ 3 Isa 11.6 The Wolfe shall dwell with the Lamb c. and they shall not hurt c. For the earth shall bee FULL OF THE KNOWLEDGE OF THE LORD AS THE WATERS COVER THE SEA which whether we understand of men or beasts it argues a restauration to an estate like that of innocent Adam And the reason adds the glory of the cause as the thing is a most glorious effect That this innocent time shall follow upon an ocean of divine knowledge ¶ 4. Isa 59.21 This is my Covenant my WORD AND MY SPIRIT SHALL NEVER DEPART from thee for ever ¶ 5. Isa 35.8 There shall be an high-way and it shall be called the way of holinesse THE UNCLEAN SHAL NOT PASSE OVER IT ¶ 6. Isa 60.21 Thy people shall be ALL RIGHTEOUS ¶ 7. Jer. 32.40 41. I will make an everlasting Covenant with them that I will not turne away from them to doe them good But I will put my feare into their heart that they shall not depart from me Yea I will rejoyce over them to doe them good and will plant them in this Land assuredly WITH MY WHOLE HEART and WHOLE SOUL See this great promise must be fulfilled when the Jewes are settled in their owne land ¶ 8. Ezech. 36.23 to verse 30. I will gather you from all Countries and bring you into your owne land and I will sprinkle cleane water upon you and you shall be cleane from ALL
texts of Isa 25.8 and Hos 13 14. to be then fulfilled doth clearly import a state on earth of a visible glory of the Church when the Jewes shall be called For the said Prophesies mainly had an eye to the restitution of the Jews As the Apostle extends them to Jews and Gentiles attained by Christ And speaks in this Chapter all along of the resurrection of Saints which John Rev. 20.5 calls the first Resurrection and doth not speake of the generall Resurrection of the wicked ¶ 3 Adde to the three former places to prove that this time we speake of shall be a deathlesse condition another most evident place sc Rev. 21.4 I have diverse times demonstrated that this Chapter cannot bee meant of everlasting glory in the highest heavens And once I runne over the whole Chapter to that end And now you may cast your eye upon 1 2 3. verses which lead to the fourth now quoted New heavens because the old passe away But the highest heavens are never old nor passe away And a New earth which cannot import Heaven No more Sea This in no wise can belong to a description of glory in the highest heavens I saw New Jerusalem the holy City comming downe from God OUT of Heaven not going up to Heaven The Tabernacle of God is with men and he will dwel with them Then it follows v. 4. God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes and there shall be no more death nor sorrow nor crying nor paine So that the taking away of all tears as is here expressed is the same with Isa 25.8 And in both places the taking away of death and of sorrow are conjoyned ¶ 4 So that in Revel 7. the last verse relates to the same place of Isa 25.8 And intends fully the taking away of death though not so fully mentioned ¶ 5 The last place to prove this deathlesse condition is Rev. 22.2 3 It is evident that this 22 Chapter relates to the same state as Chapter 21. witnesse not only v. 14 15. But v. 1 2. of the Fountain of water and Tree of life which signifies a state on earth Now in relation to our Point by reason of their partaking of the Tree of life it is said in v. 3. There shall be no curse i. e. No death For that was the original curse to Adam if he did eat of the Tree of knowledge of good and evill If he did not he might have eaten of the Tree of life and lived for ever Hee should never have dyed but beene translated So now shall it bee in this State § 3 Thus you see the grounds that make it most probable that this time shall be a Deathlesse time A kinde of beginning of immortality If men say the contrary it is by presumptuous interpretation and with a bold THAT IS But these places speake so plaine downe right that I must leave them as I finde them and not dare to alter them If any one intimation in other Scriptures may be found they must for ought I see be accommodated to these The plainer must make the darker comply To deal faithfully with you There is onely one considerable place that I know of relating to the time I speake that hath something of an intimation of mortality to be in these times and that is Isa 65.20 It cleerly relates to the time we speak of v. 17. Behold I create New Heavens and a New earth c. which Peter refers to this time 2 Pet. 3.13 in relation to the promise in that Isa 65. Now the 20. verse our Translators have rendred thus There shall be no more an Infant of dayes nor an old man that hath not filled his dayes For the childe shall dye an hundred yeers old but the sinner being an hundred yeers old shall be accursed Now as far as I can see into Languages and the context these words For the childe shall dye an hundred yeers old may be more fitly translated That the childe should dye an hundred yeers old For the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in the Hebrew is exceeding often used yea and so rendred by Translators to signifie THAT as wee have here rendred it As for turning shall into should it is not worth the mentioning before a Grammarian that knowes that 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 so rendred will infer that the verb speak subjunctively Now read the words so easily altered in the English and without the least violence to the native acception of the Hebrew and the meaning will be quite contrary to any intimation of the mortality of the Saints in this glorious time of the thousand yeers For according as we have translated the sense will runne cleerly thus There shall be no more thence or from that time viz. of the beginning of the thousand yeers of the New Creation an infant of dayes or an old man that hath not filled his dayes that the child or young man should dye at an hundred yeers old So that here is no mention of the mortality of the Saints but of their immortality Which for further clearing of the Text may bee made out two wayes ¶ 1. Thus Hee that is an hundred yeers old in those dayes is but 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as it is in the Text but a youth or young man as our old Translation renders it For as a youth hath but the tenth part of that age which many men live in these dayes So an hundred yeers are but the tenth of this Millenary time of life to the inheritors thereof Againe as in the first age of the world wherein Adam lived one of an hundred yeers old was but a young man to one at his full age in those dayes as Gen. 5.4 Adam lived an hundred and thirty yeers and begat a sonne But Adam after that lived eight hundred yeers so all his dayes were nine hundred and thirty neer a thousand Even so in this Millenary age of the New creation one of an hundred yeers old is but a young man to the thousand yeers that hee shall reigne with Christ on earth So that the sense of the Prophet may fairly be taken to be this That in the time of this New creation the thing a type at least of the highest glory and the time a preface of eternity as the young man must not have his dayes cut off so the old man must fulfill his dayes And how are both these accomplished in this New creation but by both their living on earth a thousand yeers old and young all Saints reigning on earth a thousand yeers When I speake of old and young you must understand those Saints that are found alive at Christs comming which anon after are changed for all the deceased Saints are raised to an equall perfection and absolute maturity of age and nature even as the other are changed into the same exactnesse though at Christs first appearance different in age c. So that we may well understand the Prophet to allude to the age of
the first Adam that if in a sinfull state his age at a hundred yeers was but as it were youth his whole age amounting to near a thousand yeers how much more shall the Saints by means of the second Adam live a thousand in a sinlesse condition ¶ 2 It may bee congruously made out that the Prophet in this Text intends rather the immortality of the Saints then their mortality thus There shall be no more THENCE an infant of dayes nor an old man that hath not filled his dayes that the childe youth or young man should dye an hundred yeers old OR the sinner an hundred yeers old should be cursed Thus we read the whole verse to the tune or sound of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 THAT as before we rendred it turning our English but in the latter clause into Or the Hebrew being the conjunction 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which as Mr. Mede saith being like materia prima capable of innumerable forms of significations may well be so rendred here And then the sense will bee this that at that time of the New creation which St. John saith shall be a thousand yeers there shall be neither he that shall naturally dye in his infancy nor he that shall naturally dye in his riper age before he hath made up his full dayes nor he that shall be a sinner whereby his dayes should be violently cut off ¶ 3 If it may better please some they may read it to this sense That at that time and that glorious estate though the old sinner shall be cut off yet no Saint either young or old shall dye at all All these wayes of reading the text in favour of the immortality of the Saints the word THENCE doth much animate and justisie As if the Prophet should say thus out of this New Creation for the duration thereof there shall no such person be found that shall be mortal though all the transgressors the enemies thereof that are without it shall be cut off at its very beginning even as we have largely amplified afore upon sundry occasions But if wee lanch out into the context as wee intimatedly promised afore to wade into the depth of the precedent and subsequent coherence or dependence of this text our reading of the words and rendring of the sense of it for the immortality of Saints will bee made much more perspicuous First it is said in v. 17. Behold I creat new Heavens and a new Earth alluding no doubt to the first Creation of the world in glorious perfection and Adam in innocency who should never have dyed if he had never sinned And the former shall not be remembred viz. for their meannesse by reason of mans sin Nor as it is in the Hebrew ascend upon you That is the imperfections of the former state of things should not touch them when they should attain this New one of the main imperfections of the former state being mortality it being the sad memoriall and effect of dolefull-sin Therefore the removall of this the Prophet must mainly mind 2. It is said in verse 18. Be you glad and rejoyce 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 age to age or for ever in that I create which cannot consist with death or death with it which quencheth natural joy which every thing hath in its natural being and morall joy which it hath in the injoyment of its well-being 3. It is said in verse 19. I will saith the Lord rejoyce in JERUSALEM and joy in my people and the voyce of weeping shall be NO MORE heard in HER nor the voyce of crying Now if sorrow must be gone that it shall be no more then I thinke there shall be no more death 4. In the 20. verse it self It is strange that according to our English there should be mentioned the death of Saints and not the death of the wicked of whom it is said onely the sinner an hundred yeers old shall be accursed And what doth this Atheistical creature care for that as long as he may live and enjoy his sinfull pleasure on earth therefore according to our reading in the third and lowest sense at ¶ 2 the sense must be that of the Saints nor young nor â—â—old shall be incompleat in their yeers by death but the sinner at an hundred yeers old which is much for him to live shall be accursed that is he shall dye sc be mortal So first The Antithesis Secondly The story of Gen. 2. The curse was In the day thou eatest thereof thou shalt dye i. e. be mortal liable to death And this thing death is that which strikes a dart through the liver of a wicked man The fear of this to him is worse then that of hell For hee seldome fears hell till he sees death If he were sure he should not dye he saith in his heart a pin for hell Fifthly It is said in verse 22. They shall not build and another inhabit which is whiles mortality reignes marke the reason For as the dayes of a tree are the dayes of my people And many sorts of trees live a thousand yeers It is a promise and therefore to be taken in a favourable sense And surely trees in Paradise at least so long lived as Adam once eating of the tree of Life continuing in obedience But at this time is all obedience and here is the tree of life Rev. 21. And sixthly it followes in this 22. verse of this 65. of Isay And mine elect shall LONG injoy the works of their own hands How doe they injoy them long if no longer then heretofore in the reign of mortality It is a promise and a promise is to be interpreted in favour of the Promisee as a Lease in favour of the Lessee All these plainly to mee justifie my reading of this Text to cast out mortality from the Saints And that I may the lesse seem presumptuous and singular in this and withall adde something for illustration give me leave to shew you other famous Translations to the same tune First The Arabick renders this 65. of Isa 20. thus Neither shall there be any more a young man imperfect in age nor an old man that shall not fulfill his time For the young man shall fill up an hundred yeers But the SINNER that after an hundred yeers dyes shall be accursed Observe This Translation casts out mortality from the Saints and applies it to Sinners onely as it were by not regarding the common pointing of the Hebrew by which points oft-times we suffer much as Arcanum punctationis hath abundantly demonstrated 2 The seventy Greek Translators translate much to the same effect 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. Neither shall there be any more one that is not ripe sc in age nor an old man that hath not fulfilled his time For the young man shall bee an hundred yeers old but the sinner that dyes a hundred yeers old shall be also accursed Observe here as on the Arabick 3 The Chaldee Paraphrase also favours our
cap. 2. de EXALTATIONE DOMINI bis repetitam de DIE MAGNO an Judicii ut R. Schelomo an MESSIAE ut R. D Kimchi an RENOVATIONIS MUNDI ut R. Asche c. an alio nomine appellaâ— veris deque CHRISTI tunc temporis REGNO articulatim ornateque ibidem depicto apertissimè intellexerunt Huic testimonio secundum ex Midrasch Tehillim exhibetur Ubi semper Psalm 90. v. 15. laetifica nos pro diebus c. sic paraphrasticè emphasi non mediocri legitur LAETIFICA NOS PRO DIEBUS QUIBUS AFFLIXISII NOS scilicet per Babyloniam per Graeciam per Romanos idque Laetifica in diebus MESSIAE quot sunt dies Messiae R. Jehosuas dixit quod sunt duo millia annorum sicut dictum est 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 SECUNDUM DIES QUIBUS NOS HUMILIASTI i. e. secundum duos dies DIES ENIM VNA DEI SANCTI ET BENEDICTI SUNT MILLE ANNI juxta illud QUONIAM MILLE ANNI IN OCULIS TUIS TANQUAM DIES HESTERNA Dixerunt etiam Magistri quod secundum FUTURUM quod Paulus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 imò 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Heb. 1.6 Heb. 2.5 appellat DIES MESSIAE erit una Deus enim sanctus benedictus in FUTURO nimirum seculo faciet ei diem unam de qua dictum est Zechar. cap. 14. ET ERIT DIES VNA ET IPSA EST NOTA DEO NON DIES NEQUE NOX ET ERIT AD TEMPUS VESPERI ERIT LUX Haec dies est SECULUM FUTURUM VIVIFICATIO MORTUORUM § 9 Testimonium numer ato tertium e libro Berachoth lib. 11. c. 1. scilicet 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 quod sic se habet Dixit Benzuma Futurum est ut Israel non faciat memoriam exitus ex Aegypto in FUTURO SECULO ET IN DIEBUS MESSIAE vide sis conjunctam Rabbini interpretationem Et quid est hujus rei probatio Quod scriptum est Jerem. 23. ECCE DIES VENIUNT ET NON DICENT VLTRA VIVIT DOMINUS QUI ASCEND ERE FECIT FILIOS ISRAEL DE TERRA AEGYPTI c. Dixerunt sapientes Non quòd evellendum esset nomen Aegypti de loco suo sed quod mirabilia quae fient in diebus REGNORUM scilicet MESSIae erunt 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 i. e. principale Aegyptus erit 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 i. e. accessorium § 10 Priusquam nos alia proferamus testimonia animadvertant acutiores oculi inter Rabbinos quoto mundi MILLENARIO dictum JUDICII vel MESSIae vel ut appellant R. Asche R. Abba R. Chanan RENOVATIONIS MUNDI TEMPUS fore non convenit Quippe quod non nulli longiùs in septimum alii propius in sextum Caeteri dignissimum observatu in MILLENNIUM circiter quintum incidere promittunt De quinto consulatur Rabb Asche § 11 Quarta hujus seriei antiquitas ELiae Domo egreditur 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i. e. Doctrina Domus Eliae Justi quos Deus RESUSCITASIT Resurrectione nimirum primâ quam Magistri passim nec non Author libri Sapientiae Cap. 3. v. 7 8. agnoscunt non redigentur iterum in pulverem Si quaeras autem MILLE ANNIS ISTIS quibus Deus sanctus benedictus RENOVATURUS est mundum suum de quo dicitur ET DOMINUS SOLUS EXALYABITUR ILLO DIE quid Justis futurum sit Sciendum quod Deus sanctus benedictus dabit illis alas quasi aquilarum ut volent super facie aquarum juxta Jesch 40.31 Expectantibus Dominum innovabuntur vires efferentur alâ instar aquilarum § 12 Respondet ultima primae antiquitatum Hebraicarum quam R. Saadias ex doctiorum 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 eximi is suppeditat Quippe qui in Danielis cap. 7. v. 18. SUSCIPIENT REGNUM SANCTI DEI ALTISSIMI fic prophetat 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 i. e. Eò quod rebellarunt Israelitae contra dominum auseretur ab illis ipsorum regnum Dabiturque quatuor hisce Monarchiis quae regnum possidebunt in HOC SECULO Captivumque ducent subjugabuntque sibi Israelem usque ad FUTURUM SECULUM donec REGNAVERIT MESSIAH § 13 Verùm enimverò MESSIAH nequaquam regnaturus est in SECULO vel duratione in Caelorum altissimo Continuandâ 1 Ep. ad Corinth ca. 15. v. 24.28 Nec dum in terris haec Saadiana vel Caeterorum Rabbinicae praedictiones impletae fuerint testanti experientid Quarum authores eodem fuisse animo cum nâ—strâ thesi netesse est Quae vel hâc de causâ tanquam novitia aut singularis condenmari nequit SECT 2. Of Greeke Antiquities § 1 OUr Greeke Companions in this our own Position are divers That wee over-burden you not in the entrance of this Treatise with such things as are not pleasing to every Reader we will present to you onely three each according to his age The first is JUSTIN MARTYR who flourished about the yeare after Christ 141. so near the time of John the Evangelist this John living till the hundreth yeare after Christ In that 141. yeare after Christ this JUSTIN gave in his Apology for Christian Religion in writing to ANTONIUS the EMPEROUR To allow him a sufficiency of judgement and time to bee a famous Philosopher at that time so famed and to write that Apology wee had need to allow him to be fifty yeers old as he himself testifies and so to suppose him living afore John was dead and so long as he was above one and forty at the time of his Apologizing This man for his great learning renowned with the honourable title of Philosopher witnessed to bee Godly by his pious Apology in those bloody persecuting times and sealed to be so in his death by the after-name and fame of MARTYR I say this man this great Justin Martyr professed himselfe and many other Worthies in his time to bee of the same minde with our POSITION His very words are these I and all that are every way orthodox Christians doe know both the future RESURRECTION of the body and the THOUSAND YEERS in Jerusalem that shall bee re-edified adorned and enlarged as the Prophets EZEKIEL and ESAY and OTHERS doe declare For so Esay of this thousand yeares Isa 65.17 For there shall bee a new heaven and a new earth and the former shall not be remembred neither shall they come into their mindes but they shall finde joy and rejoycing in those which I create For behold I make Jerusalem to triumph and my people to rejoyce c. to the end of the Chapter But of that For the dayes of my people shall bee as the dayes of the tree of life hee giveth this sense viz. In these words we understand saith hee that the one thousand yeeres are pointed at For as it was said to Adam In that day thou eatest of the tree in that same day thou also shalt dye Wee know he did not accomplish a thousand yeers Wee know also that saying That a day with the Lord is a thousand yeeres is
slaughters of the wicked the just the meane while being hidden The last judgement upon the wicked Nations being ended the just shall come forth of their hiding places and shall finde all covered with dead carcasses c. All the race of wicked men utterly destroyed Nor shall there bee in this world any more any Nation but the Nation of God Then for seven yeers there shall bee no hewing down of woods c. And now there shall bee no more war but peace and rest eternal * And when the THOUSAND yeers shal bee compleatly ended * the World shall bee made new by God and the heavens shall bee folded together and the earth shall bee changed and God shall transforme men into the similitude of Angels and they shall be as white as snow and shall converse alwayes in sight of the Omnipotent c. At that time shall bee that SECOND and pullike Resurrection of all in which the unjust shall be cast into eternal torments This is the Doctrine of the holy Prophets which wee Christians follow So farre Lactantius neer 1400 yeers since I thought it too much to write out all the Latine and Greeke for the Learned seeing they may have recourse to the Author himselfe And I thought it too much to render all the Latine here into English lest I should burden the English Reader Tu es Sacerdos in aevum Nec Sacerdos autem Ezechias ne in aevum etsi fuisset At in CHRISTUM conveniet ordo Melchisedec quoniam quidem CHRISTUS proprius legitimus Dei antistes Praeputiati sacerdotii pontifex tum in Nationibus Constitutus a quibus magis suscipi habebat Cognituram se quandoque circumcisionem Abrahae Gentem quum ultimò acceptione benedictione dignabitur Tertul. l. 5. contra Marcion in Pros cap. 9. LACTANTIUS Tertulliano secundus praeceptor testanti Bucholcero crispi Caesaris filii Constantini vir disertissimus floruit Anno post Christum 314. qui in 7 INSTITUTIONUM DIVINARUM libro ad Constantium ut asseritur scripto splendenti tunc temporis tantâ religionis gloriâ haec habet verba Ut inquit Cap. 1. istius libri in quarto libro de primo Domini adventu diximus sic in hoc secundum referamus adventum QUEM JUDAEI QUOQUE ET CONFITENTUR ET SPERANT c. quoniam necesse est ad eos CONSOLANDOS REVERTATUR ad quos CONVOCANDOS prius venerat Dispositione inquit Cap. 2. summi Dei sic ordinatum ut injustum hoc seculum decurso temporum spatio terminum sumat extinctâque protinus omni malitiâ piorum animis ad beatam revocatis quietum tranquillum pacificum aâ—â—eum denique seculum Deo ipso regnante florescat Plato inquit Lactantius Cap. 14. multi alii Philosophorum cum ignorarent originem rerum supremumque illud tempus quo mundus esset effectus multa millia seculorum fluxisse dixerunt ex quo hic pulcherrimus mundi extiterit ornarus sicuti fortasse Chaldaei qui un Cic. tradidit in lib. de divinatione primo quadringenta septuaginta millia annorum Monumontis Comprehensa se habere delirant c. Nos autem quos divinae literae ad scientiam veritatis erudiunt principium mundi finemque cognovimus de quo nunc in fine operis disseremus quoniam de principio in secundo libro explicavimus Sciant igitur Philosophi qui ab exordio mundi enumerant seculorum millia nondum sextum millessimum annum esse Conclusum quo numero expleto Consummationem fieri necesse est ET HUMANARUM RERUM STATUM IN MELIUS REFORMARI Cujus rei argumentum prius est enarrandum quo ratio elucescat Mundum Deus hoc rerum naturae admirabile opus sicut arcanis facrae Scripturae continetur sex dierum spatio consummavit diemque septimum quo ab operibus suis requieverat sanxit Hic autem est dies Sabbathi qui linguâ Hebraeorum a numero nomen accepit unde septenarius numerus legitimus ac plenus est Nam dies septem sunt quibus per vicem revolutis orbes conficiuntur annorum septem steilae quae non occidunt septem sydera que vocantur errantia quorum dispares cursus inaequales motus rerum ac temporum varietates efficere creduntur Ergo quoniam sex diebus cuncta Dei opera perfecta sunt per secuta sex id est annorum sex millia manere in hoc statu mundum necesse est Dies enim magnus Dei Mille annorum circulo terminatur sicut indicat Propheta qui dicit ANTE OCULOS TUOS DOMINE MILLE ANNI tanquam DIES UNUS Et ut Deus sex illos dies in tantis rebus fabricandis Laboravit it a religio ejus veritas in his sex millibus annorum laborare necesse est MALITIAPRAE VALENTE AC DOMINANTE Et rursus quoniam perfectis operibus requievit die septimo eumque benedixit necesse est ut in fine sexti millesimi anni MALITIA OMNIS ABOLEATUR E TERRA REGNET PER ANNOS MILLE JUSTITIA SITQUE TRANQUILLITAS REQVIES A LABORIBUS QUOS MUNDUS TAMDIU PERPESSUS EST. Verùm quatenus id eveniat ordine suo explicabo Saepe diximus minora exigua magnorum figuras praemonstrationes esse hunc diem nostrum qui ortu solis occasuque finitur diei magni speciem gerere quem circuitus annorum determinat Eodem medo etiam figuratio terreni hominis Caelestis populi praeferebat in posterum fictionem Nam sicut perfectis omnibus quae in usum hominis molitus est Deus ipsum hominem sexto die ultimum fecit eumque induxit in hunc mundum tanqam in domum diligenter instructam ita nunc sexto die magno verus homo verbo Deifingitur id est sanctus populus doctrinâ praeceptis Dei ad justitiam figuratur Et sicut tunc mortalis aque imperfectus e lerrâ fictus est ut mille annis in hoc mundo viveret ITA NUNC EX HOC TERRESTRI SECULO PERFECTUS HOMO FINGITUR UT VIVIFICATUS A DEO IN HOC EODEM MUNDO PERANNOS MILLE DOMINETUR Est inquit Lactantius Cap. 15. in arcanis sacrarum literarum transcendisse in Aegyptum cogente inoptâ rei frumentariae principem Hebraeorum cum omnidomo cognatione Cujus posteri cùm diutiùs in Aegypto commorantes in magnam gentem crevissent in gravi atque intoler ando servitutis jugo premerentur percussit Aegyptum Deus insanabili plagâ populum suum liberavit traductum medio mari cùm discissis fluctibus in utramique partem dimotis per siccum populus graderetur Conatusque rex Aegyptiorum profugos insequi Coeunte in statum suum pelago cum omnibus copiis interceptus est Quod facinus tam clarum tamque mirabile quamvis ad praesens virtutem Dei hominibus ostenderet tamen prefiguratio figura majoris rei fuit quam Deus idem in extremâ
ten Tribes also if haply by any meanes this Epistle should come to any of their hands §. 8. Doctor Mayer in Epistolam Jacobi haec habet verba Initio hujus capitis nihil difficultatis inest nisi quòd eos ad quos scribit duodecim tribus dispersas appellat Si enim Epistola haec institueretur pro Judaeis nuper per Claudium Caesarem Hierofolymâ expulsis ut ante praefati sumus Quaestio oritur quo pacto illos diceret duodecim tribus quae omnes non nisi duae fuerunt cum semisse caeteris à captivitate suâ per Salmanasarem nunquam uti legimus ad hunc usque diem redeuntibus Respondetur dici potest Jacobum inter scribendum ad illas etiam respexisse si forte ullo modo haec Epistola in illarum manus perveniret Sic Mayer §. 9. Doctor Prideaux our Country-man however hee bee against us about the stating of the one thousand yeers how justly wee shall afterwards God permitting dispute the case hath in his Inaugurall Orations these words Rightlier therefore others thinke that after the Roman Idol-madnesse is vanquished and the Mahumetan blasphemies are taken away from among them the Jewes shall lift up their eyes to the mountaines of the Scripture from whence by the Spirit inwardly illuminating they shall attaine light and salvation This opinion which refuseth legall rights as deadly declines Monarchy as aerie and utopian nor thinkes it sufficient to answer to the Apostles MYSTERY if in any age one or other of the Jewes come to the Christian faith neither approves in that hoped generall Call of them the returne of Enoch and Elija nor doth put before it that fulnesse of the Gentiles but according to the direction of the Text sets it after I say this opinion among the Ancients Chrysostome Hilary Austin Ambrose Hierom Aquinas Scotus Cajetanus and many others doe imbrace onely touching some accessories now and then every one will abound in his owne sense They that defend it among the later Writers are P. Martyr Grinaeus Beza Pareus and most largely a Commentator of our own in his most learned Hexapla namely Dr. Willet Nor doe I see what solidly can bee opposed Thou wilt say when the Sonne of man shall come shall hee finde faith on earth Doubtlesse not so frequent in the hearts of justified ones as floting upon the lips of hypocrites For doth it seem strange that among most Professors not so many sincere ones are to be found seeing that out of many that are called a few are chosen But That wicked one 2 Thess 2.8 shall reigne so long as till hee bee consumed with the spirit of the mouth of the Lord at this glorious coming How then can it bee that between the ruine of Antichrist and the end of the world so famous a Call of the Jewes should intervene Most easily because the Spirit shall not in a moment make an end of him but gradually And his coming may bee said to be glorious not with the full majesty of him as present at first but by certaine premised beames of him approaching Meane while when and how that which the Apostle here foretels is to be fulfilled is not requisite perhaps for us to understand to an inch seeing it is a mystery Nor might I thinke in the meane space that the Jewes after such a conversion shall make a withdrawing from the Gentiles but rather they with them shall integrate themselves into one and the same Church Doctor Prideaux Anglus quondam Theologiae professor Regius in Academiâ Oxoniensi quamvis contra nos contendat de MILLE annorum statu constitutione quà m justè 4. Libro annuente Deo disputabitur tamen in ORATIONUM suarum INAUGURALIUM sexta Parag. 7. DE VOCATIONE JUDAE ORUM haec habet verba Rectiùs igitur alii post deletam Romanam Idolomaniam Et è medio sublatis Mahomatismi blasphemi is Judaeos arbitrantur oculos ad montes Scripturae elevaturos unde Spiritu intus illuminante lucem salutem consequentur Hanc sententiam quae legalia aversatur ut mortifera Monarchiam declinat ut aeream sive utopicam nec sufficere putat ad Apostoli MYSTERIUM si QUOVIS seculo unus vel alter Judaeus ad fidem Christianam accedat nec probat in expectandâ istâ GENERALI VOCATIONE Henochi Elijae reditum nec praeponit istam plenitudinem Gentium sed ut textus dirigit POSTPONIT amplectuntur inter Antiquiores Chrysostomus Hilarius Augustinus Ambrosius Hieronimus Aquinas Scotus Cajetanus COMPLURES Alii nisi quod de quibusdam accessorì is non nunabundabit unusquisque suo sensu Defendunt inter recentiores P. Martyr Beza Grinaeus Paraeus in Hexaplâ suâ doctissimâ Commentator è nostris copiosissimus nimirum Doctor Willetus Nec video quid solidè potest opponi Filius inquies hominis cùm venerit num reperturus est fidem in terrâ Non adeò frequentem proculdubio in cordibus justificatorum quà m natantem in labris hypocritarum Ecquid enim rarum videtur inter Professores plurimos non adeo multos sinceros inveniri Cùm ex vocatis multis pauci subinde eligantur At tamdiu regnabit 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 2 Thess 2. donec absumatur spiritu oris domini in illustri illo suo adventu Qui fieri igitur potest ut inter Antichristi excidium mundi finem tam celebris intercedat Judaeorum vocatio Facillimè cùm in momento spiritus ipsum non conficiet sed gradatim adventu dicatur illustris non plenâ statim praesentis majestate sed praemissis appropinquantis radiis Interim quando quomodo implendùm illud sit quod hic praedicit Apostolus non requiritur forsan ut nos ad amussim teneremus quia est mysterium Nec aestimaverim interea Judaeos post talem conversionem secessionem à Gentibus facturos c. quinimo eos cum illis potius crediderim coalituros c. §. 10. Mr. R. Maton our Country-man hath also written two Books in favour of our opinion the one is called ISRAELS REDEMPTION or the Propheticall HISTORY OF OUR SAVIOURS KINGDOME ON EARTH That is OF THE CHURCH CATHOLICKE and TRIUMPHANT with a Discourse of GOG and MAGOG The second is entituled thus ISRAELS REDEMPTION REDEEMED or THE JEWES GENERAL and MIRACULOUS CONVERSION to the Faith of the Gospel and returne into their owne Land and our Saviours personal reigne on earth clearly proved out of many plaine Prophesies of the Old and New Testament and the chiefe arguments that can be alleadged against these truths fully answered OF PURPOSE TO SATISFIE ALL GAINSAYERS and in particular Mr. ALEXANDER PETRIE Minister of the Scottish Church in ROTERDAM The later of these I confesse I have not read but onely seene The former I have cursorily and doe finde that though hee apply and presse the Scriptures hee alleadgeth but briefly yet pertinently and solidly §. 10. Magister R. Maton Anglus duos scripsit anglicè libros quorum
verbis quid planiùs quid pleniùs significari potest quà m idem illud sub toto caelo in â—ERRA itaque dominium quatuor Monarchiis arreptum sanctis exhiberi Sic simul cum Christo in terrâ 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 diu regnabunt Christiani A Daniele transeamus ad Johannem Apocalyps 11. v. 15. c. septimus Angelus clanxit factae sunt voces magnae in Caelo dicentes facta sunt regna MUNDI Domini nostri Christi ejus vel ipsius Christi scilicet Domini nostri Christi ut Christi qui regnabit in secula seculorum duranti nimirum TEMPORE TUM viginti quatuor illi SENIORES ignota in caelis relatio ut numerus qui in conspectu Dei SEDENT in THRONIS regnandi situs indicium prociderunt c. dicentes Gratias agimus tibi domine c. quòd adeptus sis vi scilicet potentiam tuam MAGNAM quae parva quodammodò videbatur anteà REGNUM inieris quod initium aliquod innuit iratae sunt gentes Lugent homines die judicii non irascuntur Et venit ira tua puniens scilicet Antichristum satellitesque ejus in terrâ praestitutum tempus mortuorum primâ nimirum resurrectione ut judicentur qui quomodo statim sequitur dare mercedem servis tuis c. scilicet in Terrâ ut probant sequentia perdas eos qui perdunt praesenti tempore TERRAM cujus minima cura ad ultimum Judicium habenda est Tunc apertum est Templum Dei in Caelo visa est Arca pacti ipsius in ejus Templo facta sunt fulgura voces Tonitura terraemotus c. quae omnia magis contra quam pro statu in supremo Caelo intelligantâ—r necesse est Claudat hunc Paragraphum Apostolus ad HEBRAEOS 2. vers 5. c. MUNDUS ILLE FUTURUS inquit homini subjiciendus est non angelis Graece 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 ille habitabilis seu inhabitatus mundus ille futurus duplici emphatico juxta inquit Psalmum octavum ut concesserat Deus Genes 1. v. 26. quod respicit Psaltes NUNC autem dicit Apostolus nequaquam HACTENUS videmus quòd omnia subjecta sunt ILLI tantum JESUM illum pignus rei gloriâ honore cernimus Coronatum c. § 4 Omnia quae recensuimus testimonia satis ni fallor suggerunt meditanti viro eminentiorem in terrâ regnandi speciem sanctis adhuc restare Olim dominati sunt quandoque ex parte tentationibus nec non peccato nunquam vero generi humano Quibus omnibus dicto MILLENARIO seu tempore terricolis adhuc futuro penitus semperque dominabuntur victores Vitam eorum fore oportet ut vita faeliciter resurgentium futura est resurrectione ad designandum hunc statum bis repetitâ Apocalypsis cap. 20. Si fiant spiritualiter tantum reges Sacerdotes ut objectores vellent Apocalyps 5.10 quo tropi invento profligabitur sequentium verborum literalis sensus ET praeter illud sacerdotium regale regnabunt IN TERRA Verum ne in taedium incidamus repetitionum nec non praejudicium subeat causa leviusculis grandiorum anticipationibus clausâ hâc sectione ad ultimam transitur perstringendam SECT IV. Something of the space of time viz. The THOUSAND YEERS of the Saints reigning with Christ on earth § 1 THe time of the Saints reigning with Christ upon earth is so punctually and positively set downe to be A THOUSAND YEERS that I know not how without perverting the Scripture to make it more or lesse It would seeme to mee a presumptuous thing to heare the holy Spirit to tell John six times over in six verses together namely Rev. 20. v. 2 3 4 5 6 7. of a â—housand yeers precisely touching the same businesse in the severall parts and appurtenances thereof never varying the phrase to a weakning but foure times of the six to a strengthning of it with mighty emphasis in the Greek as to say THE or THAT â—AME thousand yeers if I the meane while should imagine another number § 2 I know no such phrase in all the Bible of a thousand yeeres put for any other number but really for a thousand yeers to encourage mee to such a boldnesse of imagination That of Peter 2 Epist Chap. 3. v. 8. in Gods account is nothing against us § 3 Besides the parts to which this number is applied are so cemented together as cause and â—ffect distinction and opposition c. that they mightily strengthen and prove the just account of a thousand yeeres Satan is bound a thousand yeeres that hee should not deceive the Nations till that same thousand yeeres should bee fulfilled Then the Sants lived and reigned with Christ THAT SAME thousand yeeres so the Greeke But the rest of the dead lived not againe untill those thousand yeers were finished Whiles the Holy ones are made Priests of God and of Christ and reigne with Christ a thousand yeeres It is worth our noting by the way that instead of adding here Kings to Priests as Rev. 5.10 it is supplyed with this That they reign with Christ a thousand yeers so that when it is said Rev. 5.10 The Saints are made Priests and KINGS to God their Kingly-hood is there meant in relation of that which there followes viz. Their reigning upon earth even as for ought I know yet all the Saints shall bee able to serve and worship God immediately without the helpe of any Administrator in the old Testament called Priests in the New Ministers Elders c. § 4 Nor is it of least consideration that the thousand yeers that we might not stretch or shrinke this number if we will observe the sealings of it at both ends are bounded in with two most notable things namely TWO RESURRECTIONS The living of the Saints whiles the rest of the dead lived not begins with the First-Resurrection This saith v. 5. is the FIRST RESURRECTION as relating to the second at the end of the thousand yeers v. 7. c. to v. 14. And when Those thousand yeers are expired Satan shall bee loosed hee shall seduce the Nations and go about to disturb the REIGNING Saints and the beloved City and then appeared a great Throne and one sate on it from whose face the earth and heaven fled away and the DEAD small and great stood before God c. SECT IV. Analecta de TEMPORIS spacio nimirum de MILLE ANNIS quibus Sancti cum Christo in terris sunt regnaturi Apocal. cap. 20. v. 2 3 4 5 6 7. § 1 TEmpus sanctorum in terra regnantium toties adeò praecisè asseritur MILLE fore annos caeteris concurrentibus ut me latet penitùs quomodo mihi liceat nisi pervertenti Scripturas plusve minusve pronunciare Audax nimium ne dicam stupendâ praesumptione viderer audito Sancto Spiritu sexies haud minus sexque contiguis versibus dictante eundem
conceived by the most learned through the Red Sea So when Israel was to re-edifie the Temple and to settle in their owne land after the captivity Christ appears as a Commander of an Army on horse back with troops behinde him Zech. 1. And as the Sonne of man sitting in judgement as a King Dan. 7. Some will perhaps say these were types of his incarnation If that so in some generall semblance yet these did more distinctly set forth his visible Monarchy to come And therefore his incarnation is made a type or platforme of his coming as a Monarch Act. 1.11 And therefore as the Prologue to his visible appearance againe as a Monarch to reigne as Revel 20. he appeares as a glorious King Rev. 1. with all circumstances to set forth the glory of his Royalty much more therefore in consideration of all that Christ hath said and done in relation to that in the New Testament may we expect him to come and visibly appeare at the setting up of his Monarchy He tells Pilate he was borne to be a King and therefore must be a King But he would not set it up yet afore his ascention Act. 1. Hee must first goe into a far Country and after that receive his Kingdome as wee heard afore out of Luke 19. Chap. 1. Sect. 7. of this second Booke Hee must first ascend up on high and then hee leads Captivity captive spiritually as a Preface to his visible appearance to make the Church spiritually and Corporally glorious which the Apostle immediately hints in that fourth of Ephes Untill wee come to a perfect MAN unto the measure of the stature of the fulnesse of Christ which by and by after that in the same Chapter hee calls THE NEW MAN WHICH AFTER GOD IS CREATED IN RIGHTEOUSNESSE and HOLINESSE As alluding to the state of innocent Adam And therefore as the first Adam did visibly appeare as a glorious Monarch over the visible world so shall the second Adam according to the Prophets and Apostles Doctrine in Psal 8. Hebr. 2. being divine Commentaries on Adams Monarchy Gen. 1. vers 26 27 28. Of which place God assisting you shall heare abundantly in the next BOOK FINIS LIBRI SECVNDI THE THIRD BOOK PROVING That there shall be a most glorious state of the Church and of all things in relation to the Church and that on earth yet before the ultimate day of Judgement CHAP. I. The partition of the ensuing Discourse HAving cleared the visible appearing of Christ personally In the second place we proceed to the proof of his reigning in this visible Kingdome on earth by his mysticall body his members the Saints Wherein we have two things to doe 1 To prove That there is such a Kingdom yet to be on earth as aforesaid in the generall Proposition 2 What that Kingdome will be in the particulars We shall manage the first by foure meanes 1 By Texts of Scripture 2 By Arguments drawne from Scripture 3 By the common consent of all sorts of men as if a law of nature 4 By solution of all the maine objections against it CHAP. II. Containing the Scriptures to prove That there shall be yet on earth before the last Judgement such a Reigning such a visible Kingdome of Christ such a glorious state of the Saints and of all things as is before propounded THE drift scope and sinues of strength of all which places fall into this demonstrative Syllogisme Those things which are prophesied in the word of God and are not yet come to passe must bee fulfilled But the great sensible and visible happinesse of the Church on earth before the ultimate day of judgement is prophesied in the word of God both in the Old and New Testament Therefore it must be fulfilled that such a state be extant upon earth before the ultimate day of judgement The major is granted by all that beleeve the word of God The minor is proved by the ensuing Scriptures SECT I. The twentieth Chapter of the Revelation fully discussed with a demonstration of the true meaning of the one and twentieth Chapter being the exposition of the twentieth § 1 BEfore we take all the choice places of the whole Scriptures in order as they lye in our English Bibles I shall pitch the foot of my Compasse to draw a right and clear circle upon the twentieth Chapter of the Revelation It being the manner and method of the Holy Spirit to declare things especially of this nature gradually as the Church is meet to heare the state thereof requires and the time of fulfilling it drawes neerer and â—o speaks most and plainliest at last Many other instances might be given but that the subject under hand is vast enought of it selfe All these advantages falling to the share of this twentieth Chapter of Revel touching the point in hand as the Catastrophe result and designe of all that God hath spoken before in the Old and New Testament it makes this twentieth of Revel no lesse then a golden key to unlocke the Bible especially the Old Testament that we may look further into other places of Scripture then meerly to make morall observations out of them and mean while doe over-looke the Prophetical intent of God in them § 2 In this twentieth Chapter of the Revel vers 1. it is said AND I saw an Angel come downe c. which AND or as the Translator of the Arab. furthermore or as in sense it oft signifies then imports that John saw immediately afore something in order to this what was that even that which our late invented distinction of Chapters and verses puts in Revel 19. v. 19. I saw saith John the Beast and the Kings of the earth and their Armies gathered together to make warre against him that sate on the horse and against his Army namely against Christ and his members or Saints vers 11 12 13 14. And what was the issue of the War That John goes on to tell us in the twentieth verse of this nineteenth Chapter And the Beast was taken and with him the false Prophet that is the Antichrist either under the notion of humane Imperialty or of Ecclesiasticall Prophesie or Teaching were cast alive into the lake c. And the remnant were slaine with the sword of him that sate upon the horse AND saith John in this twentieth Chap. vers 1. after this I saw an Angel come downe from heaven having the key of the bottomlesse pit and a great chaine in his hand and he laid hold on the Dragon that old Serpent which is the Devill and Satan and bound him a thousand years c. which can meane no other thing but Christ and his Saints conquest over the Beast and the false Prophet and their Armies on earth notwithstanding all the power and policy of their seducing Generalissimo the Devill Here then in all is Christ and his Army and Anti-christ and his Army conflicting and they conflict with the Sword and Antichrists Army is slaine with the sword
and he shall be to me a SONNE But when AGAINE to give it you as afore in termes and order of words close to the Originall * Thus Arias doth order them When the Apostle would say And againe he saÃd in verse 5. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 but in this sixth verse he saith 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which last word is in the second Aâ—rist in the subj mood which sounds future and so the Syriack 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 But againe He SHALL bring his first begotten Sonne into the INHABITED world he saith let all the Angels worship him The sense is obvious That God never owned any one of the Angels to be his only first begotten Sonne but when againe he shall bring his first begotten Sonne into the world he hath given command that all the Angels shall worship him as his only begotten Sonne That this text speakes of Gods bringing his first begotten Sonne againe into the inhabited world now after Christs ascention when the Apostles wrote that we have afore largely discussed Book 3. chap. 2. Sect. 4. § id est sectiuncula 4. I only adde be heedfully mindfull of the Apostles expression in the future now after Christs coming in the flesh and that after the generall Iudgement Christ as Christ shall lay downe all his dominion over Angels and men and therefore it must be of some middle time between our present generation that these 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 rendered here Angels must give Christ whiles he is Mediator a more ample and apparent homage then ever they have done according to the glorious state of Christ and of things at that time on earth 3 ¶ For this place of the Hebrewes Let all the Angels of God worship him is quoted by the Apostle out of Psal 97.7 which word for word according to the Hebrew * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is Bow downe to him all yee Gods which as we said afore comprehends as all Angels so all Kings Potentates and Magistrates called by God himselfe Gods Psal 82. ver 1. ver 6. and so applied by Christ Joh. 10.34 Jesus answered them Is it not written in your Law I said YEE ARE GODS 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 if he called them gods to whom the Word of God came c. And indeed they can properly bow or crouch downe as the Hebr. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and the Greek 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 precisely signifie as the Angels can doe it only vertually And on the other side 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Angel is oft used in Scripture to signifie eminent men in Office Mal. 4.1 Rev. chap. 2.1 chap. 2. chap. 3. But granting that the Apostles designe being to prove Christ to be above Angels doth render the Hebrew Text according to the Septuagint Greek then a common Translation in frequent use throughout the world since the late Greek Monarchy over all 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 worship him all yee his Angels yet this is as true that as the Apostle closeth that his discourse in that first of Hebrews with a touch of Christs future dominion over all Angels and men on earth saying To which of the Angels said he at any time quoted out of Psal 110. sit thou on my right hand till I make thine enemies thy footstoole so that 97. Psalm doth really include and intend our position in hand viz. Christs visible glorious Kingdome over all the world yet to come For in the first verse of that 97. Psalm it is said The Lord reigneth let the earth rejoyce let the multitude of the Isles be glad thereof Or the Lord reigning the earth SHALL rejoyce and the many Islands SHALL * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 be glad ** 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 This LORD is Christ as the Apostle applyes it Heb. 1.8 9. Now Christ had reigned in his ordinary providence and power from the creation to the Psalmists time c. as appeared in overthrowing his and his peoples enemies and preserving his people in the flood in the fire on Sodome in his miracles in Egypt Wildernesse and the Red-sea in his victories over the several Nations in Canaan c. And after the last judgement it is improper to say Christ reignes in glory 1 Cor. 15.28 And Christ never yet so reigned as is described in this first verse of this 97 Psalm That ALL the EARTH without limitation shall rejoyce at that his reigning and the multitude of Isles shall be glad By Isles according to an ancient usuall Hebraisme and Jewish phrase is meant all the Nations of the GENTILES Isa 41. v. 1. Keep silence before me O ISLANDS and let the PEOPLES or NATIONS renew their strength * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 And v. 5. The Isles saw it and feared and the ENDS OF THE EARTH were afraid Chap. 42. v. 4. The ISLES shall wait for his Law and so nine times in this Prophet three times in Jer. 9. times in Ezek. in Zeph. once viz. Chap. 2. v. 11. The Isles of the Heathen or Gentiles * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 In Gen. once Gen. 10.5 The Isles of the Gentiles The reason of the phrase is because the Jews dwelling in the continent of Asia they counted all the world Islanders that were divided from them by the Mediterranean Sea Whence is that phrase of Isles of the Sea Ester 10.1 Ahasuerus laid a taxe or tribute upon the land and upon the ISLES OF THE SEA And Isa 24.15 Glorifie the name of the Lord God of Israel in the ISLES OF THE SEA And Ezek. 26.18 Now shall the Isles tremble in the day of thy fall yea the ISLES THAT ARE IN THE SEA shall be troubled yea to make all yet plainer it is twice said viz. Jer. 2.10 Ezek. 27.6 The Isles of Chittim By which Chittim is oft understood the Roman Monarchy as Dan. 11.30 for one instance So that according to this sense of this 97 Psame vers 1 All the world of Jewes and Gentiles must be glad and rejoyce at the reigning of Christ as it follows in the sixth verse The Heavens declare his righteousnesse and ALL the people see his glory ALL without exception which two clauses cannot be aptlier applyed and expounded then by that Rev. 1.7 Rev. 20.1 Rev. 21.1 Christ comes in the clouds and every eye shall see him Christ as the great Angel descending from heaven binding Satan and causing his Saints to reigne on earth New Jerusalem a New Heaven and a New Earth being brought downe from Heaven wherein as Pet. 2 Ep. 3. chap. enlargeth dwelleth righteousnesse But ALL PEOPLE yet never saw that his righteousnesse and glory ALL the gods as in v. 7. all Kings and Princes Potentates Magistrates and Powers never yet worshipped him as Christ but generally in all ages from the Creation to this day have opposed him as such both of Jewes and Gentiles 4 ¶ But all must ere the last judgement either sincerely or seemingly worship him Psal 22.27 28 29. which Psalme is concerning
glory to shew favour to you if we have not done well in casting you out yet the Lord should appear to their joy that had been so hated and cast out for his name sake and those their false brethren should bee ashamed § 2 In the seven and eight verses most evidently the Prophet setteth forth the manner of the conversion of the Jews I say conversion their settlement will cost longer time as it seems Dan. 12. the three last verses viz. their conversion shall bee as the birth of a child before the mother is in pain as the birth of a Nation at once which well may bee being to bee done by the appearance of Christ in the Clouds § 3 In the 10. and 11. verses All Nations must rejoyce with Jerusalem because they shall suck the breasts of her consolations that is share in her comforts ## § 4 In the twelfth verse The Lord will extend peace to Jerusalem like a River and the glory of the Gentiles like a flowing stream See a glorious conjunction of Jews and Gentiles § 5 In the 13 and 14 15 16. verses is set forth the sensible comforts of the Church and the corporall destruction of their enemies As one whom his mother comforteth so will I comfort you and ye shall be comforted in Jerusalem and when ye see this your heart shall rejoyce and your bones shall flourish like an herb and the hand of the Lord shall be known towards his servants and his indignation towards his enemies For behold the Lord will come with fire c. For by fire and by his sword will the Lord plead with all flesh and the slain of the Lord shall be many Illustrated vers 24. They shall go forth and look upon the carkasses that have transgressed against me for their worm shall not dye nor their fire be quenched and they shall be an abhorring to all flesh Which in the generall to bee taken literally is confessed both by Jews and Christians Consult our new Annotationists upon the place See Sect. 41. § 5. ¶ 2. § 6 In the 18 19 20 and 21. verses is held forth to us the congregating of all Nations both Jews and Gentiles into union of true religious worship and beholding of the glory of God and that as the Jewish Doctors expound it in his destruction of the enemies of the Church in the dayes of the Messias In the 22. verse we have the height and length of this glorious estate of the universall Church of Jews and Gentiles on earth It is no lower then a state of a new Heaven and a new Earth And it is to be perpetuated It is to remain unalterable continue say our new Annotationists for ever § 7 Now these things were never yet fulfilled according to the phrases and circumstances of the place as to the Gentiles nor in the substance as to the Jews who remaine totally unconverted to Christ and are dispersed and despised to our sorrow throughout the world But God must be true therefore these must be fulfilled and on earth before the ultimate judgement as every verse doth hint unto us And therefore St. John in the Revelation Chapter 18 Chapter 19 Chapter 20 and Chapter 21. doth apply these in a way of Prophesie to the glorious state of the Church on earth yet to come at the fall of Antichrist I shal give you them in summe and short because I have before so often made particular applications of them Babylon the great is fallen is fallen How much she hath glorified her selfe so much sorrow and torment shall be given her Her plagues come in one day death and mourning and famine and she shall be utterly burnt with fire Rejoyce over her thou heaven and ye holy Apostles and Prophets for God hath avenged you on her And after these things I heard a great voyce of much people c. saying Allelujah salvation and glory and honour and power unto the Lord our God for true and righteous are thy judgementss for he hath judged the great Whore that hath corrupted the earth and hath avenged the blood of his Saints And again they said Allelujah And the foure and twenty Elders said Amen Allelujah And I heard as it were the voyce of a great multitude and as the voyce of many waters and as the voyce of mighty thunderings saying Allelujah for the Lord God Omnipotent reigneth And the beast and the false Prophet were taken and cast into the lake fire And the rest were slain with the sword But the Saints reigned with Christ a thousand yeers in the new Heavens and new Earth to whom the Kings of the earth and Nations of the world bring their honour § 8 Now let him that readeth understand and consider whether he were best to beleeve his owne phantasie or the opinions of men rather then St. Johns series and system of Visions and Prophesies so aptly in phrase and matter expounding the Prophet Isaiah of a future glorious state of the Church on earth yet to come Thus of the Prophet Isaiah SECT XXVII NExt we come to the Prophet Jeremiah The first place for our purpose is in Chapter 16. verse 14 15. compared with Chapter 23. verse 3. c. to verse 9. The words of that in Chapter 16. verse 14 15. are Behold the dayes come saith the Lord that it shall be no more said The Lord liveth that brought up the children of Israel out of the land of Egypt But the Lord liveth that brought up the children of ISRAEL from the LAND OF THE NORTH and from ALL THE LANDS whither he had DRIVEN THEM and I will bring them againe into THEIR LAND that I gave unto their Fathers § 1 The Prophet calling these of whom he speaks by the name of Israel and in relation to their returne out of the Land of the NORTH and out of All Lands whither they had been driven must needs comprehend as well the ten Tribes as the two And the more cleerly to hint to us that his meaning is not onely of a reduction of them to their own Land but of their conversion unto their God and this not at a petty call of a few of them but at the great call of the generality of them all he subjoyns the bringing in of the fulnesse of the Gentiles verse 19. The Gentiles shall come unto the Lord from the ends of the earth and shall say surely our Fathers have inherited lyes c. At which time of the coming in of the fulnesse of the Gentiles as their coming from the ends of the earth fully expresseth All Israel saith the Apostle Rom. 11.25 26. shall be saved § 2 Now let us parallel this with that in the 23. Chapter verse 3 4 5 6 7 8. wherein wee have the same expressions with further illustrations and explanations to confirme the same The words of the Prophet there are verse 3. I will gather the remnant of my flock out of ALL Countries whither I have driven them and will bring
absolutely for ever 2. If any hanker and long after the sence that our translation hints as if the three former Beasts had a kind of life allowed them after their dominion was taken away to give these content we can give them this faire answer which may likewise be handsomely improved as to the illustration of the ruine of the fourth Beast and so of the glorious remaining of the fift Monarchy That though the three former monarchies were dis-robed of their Monarchicall paramount Emperiality the former by the latter yet those three divine providence permitting had continued unto them some degree of regality untill some good space of time that the fourth had been in being and power which is the more probable 1. Because how else could it bee said that the third trampled the second and the fourth the third yea all the remainder of the former unlesse they had some entiry or being to be trampled 2. Because the whole Image is broken by the ruine on the feet of the fourth and last And therefore probably there were certaine broken limbs of the three former remaining to be beaten into dust with the fourth 3. Because wee have some such account given us in the faithfullest humane Histories First For the Armenians part of Chaldea as some learned affirme had a King and Kingly dignity even unto the dayes of the Roman Monarchy Tigranes King of Armenia was subdued by the Roman Pompey and his Country made tributary and so stamped under foot But after a while even in the reigne of Tiberius the same Armenia was fortified against the Romans whom the Emperour rather pacified with promises then subdued with Warre who after got the staffe so far into their hands againe that in the reigne of Jovinian they were called Friends not Vassals to the Romans Secondly For Persia they had great power in the time of Antiochus the great and of his sonne Antiochus the vile of the Greeke Monarchy downe unto and farre into the times of the Roman Emperours Of whom Julian lost his life Valerian went under ransome and Jovinian put to the shamefull foyle of the losse of foure whole provinces Thirdly For the Grecian Monarchy after the Romans had trampled Egypt Anthony and Cleopatra being subdued by Augustus and their Countries reduced to Provinces yet after the Greekes did so far shake off the Roman yoake as that they withstood divers of their stoutest Emperours viz. Galienus Aurelian and Dioclesian And this last answer doth also well illustrate the prophesie That whereas somthing of the former Monarchies remained in the days of the later yet the fift should leave nothing of the fourth and so nothing of the former All being to be broken in the feet of the fourth So glorious should the fift Kingdome be Now let the reader take which answer he pleaseth § 11 Having cleared we hope this knot let us now goe on with Daniels visions wherein he having already shewed us towards the discovery of the Who and what that destroyed the fourth Beast the posture and Acts of the Session of Judicature next he represents to us the person or persons the Captaine and his Army that tooke from the fourth Beast the Roman Monarchy and all other Kingdoms into their owne hands of power and these are Christ and his Christians vers 13 14. Daniel saw in the night-visions fitly signifying the Antichristian darknesse that then clouded the Church one like the Son of Man come with the cloudes of Heaven This is Christ who relatively as a King and Captaine Generall as the Scriptures set him forth and Mystically as he is by union of the Spirit head of his Church doth infer as soon as he is come an Host of Christians at his heeles as part of his Session when hee sits all which must necessarily bee here understood as the 18 26 and 27 verses being of the interpretation of the vision give sufficient warrant vers 18. But the SAINTS OF THE MOST HIGH shall take the Kingdome for ever Zech. 1.8 Heb. 2.10 Revel 19.11 12 13 14. even for ever and ever ver 27 28. But the Judgement shall sit and they of the Judgement viz. as it is in this vision the Son of Man and his ten thousand times ten thousand of all Nations Languages and Peoples that beleeve in him shall take away his the fourth Beasts dominion to consume and destroy it to the end And the Kingdome and Dominion and the greatnesse of the Kingdome under the whole Heaven shall bee given to the PEOPLE OF THE SAINTS OF THE MOST HIGH whose Kingdome is an everlasting Kingdome and all Dominions shall serve HIM Where most evidently Christ called here the Son of Man doth as a publicke person and a representative as the second Adam of all mankind that beleeve include and signifie all the sonnes of men that beleeve and they and he are so one mystically by faith and relatively as a corporation or united Emperiality that it is indifferent to the Holy Ghost to mention HIM or THEM to be the Ruler of this fifth Monarchy As for that his coming we mentioned but now Daniel expresseth it in the said thirteenth verse The Sonne of man came with the Clouds of Heaven Upon which words Mr. Parker saith thus The Sonne of man is Christ the Head including also his Body the Church as appeareth ver 26 27. He is said to come and this is his second coming in a large sence comprehending his coming to beare rule on earth by setting up his Kingdome breaking down the enemy and this is the space of forty five yeares and then his visible appearing at the Resurrection immediatly ensuing to finish the New Jerusalem begun in heavenly perfection And in this large description his second coming is usually taken in the Prophets He is said to come in the Clouds of Heaven that is on high above the glory and power of the Kingdomes of the earth in the supereminent Majesty of his Kingdom Rev. 11 12. Isa 52.13 Mat. 24.30 Thus Mr. Parker I only adde this that by the current and tenour of Scripture this phrase of his coming in the Clouds signifies withall that he shall visibly and really appeare in the natural Clouds at that his second coming but now mentioned as Christ himselfe and Saint John expounds the Prophets Matth. 24.30 Revel 1.7 Then shall appeare saith Christ in that twenty fourth of Matthew ver 30. the signe of the Sonne of Man in Heaven and then shall all the Tribes of the earth mourne and they shall SEE the Sonne of Man coming in the CLOVDES of Heaven c. And saith John in that Revel 1.7 Behold he cometh WITH CLOVDES and every eye shall SEE him and they also that pierced him § 13 He is said in the same thirteenth verse both to come to the Ancient of dayes that is as he is Mediator to the end to obtaine the Kingdome for his Saints being removed from the enemy So the Lamb is said to approach to him that
certain 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Formes of Ecclesiastical doctrines according to which all Teachers in the Church were to frame their discourse and direct their opinions Some of these 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Formes of Ecclesiastical doctrine are recorded by Gelasius Cyzicenus in his Historiâ Actorum Concilii Niceni History of the Acts of the Council of Nice Amongst these there is this Forme for the Doctrine of the state of the Resurrection * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Cap. 7.18 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Pâ— 27.13 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Mat. 5.5 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 â—â—a 26.6 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The world was made more minute or lesse i.e. imperfecter or viler because of fore-knowledge For God fore-saw that man would sinne Therefore we expect NEW HEAVENS AND A NEW EARTH accrding to the holy Scriptures when shall shine forth the apparition or appearance and Kingdome of the great God and our Saviour Jesus Christ And THEN as Daniel saith Chap. 7.18 The Saints of the most HIGH SHAL TAKE THE KINGDOME and there shal be a pure earth holy a land of the living and not of the dead which David fore seeâ—ng by the eye of faith cryes out Psal 27.13 I beleeve to see the goodnesse of the Lord in the LAND OF THE LIVING A land of the meck and humble For blessed saith Christ Matth. 5.5 are the meek for they shall POSSESSE THE EARTH And the Prophet s aith Isa 26.6 The feet of the meek and the humble shall tread upon it 1. Judge by this notwithstanding fifty yeers opposition how powerfull the Chiliastical party yet was at the time of that Council By some whereof if this Forme were not framed and composed yet was it thus moderated as you see that both parties might accept it every mans interpretation being safe to himselfe as being delivered in the terms and language of Scripture 2 Judge whether in my explication of the state of the Thousand yeers I have not kept within the compasse of this Forme and not swerved one jot there-from This you see was the opiâ—â—on of the whole Orthodox Christian Church in the age immediately following the death of S. John when yet Polycarp and many of the Apostles Disciples were living as Justin Martyr expresly affirmes A Testimony absolute without all comparison to perswade such as rely upon authority and antiquity even as you have seen the same opinion continued throughout the next age following that And therefore it is to be ADMIRED that an opinion once so generally received in the Church should ever have been so cryed down and buried But those times which extinguished this brought other alterations into the Church beside this and perhaps something in lieu of that and relating to it which perhaps few observe that have knowledge enough of the rest namely that this opinion of the FIRST RESURRECTION was the reall ground and mother of prayers for the dead so anciently received in the Church which were then conceived after this manner THAT THEY MAY HAVE THEIR PART IN THE FIRST RESURRECTION See Tertullian who first mentions them The reason was because this having part in the first resurrection was not to be common to all but to be a priviledge to some namely of Martyrs and Consessors equipollent to them if God would so accept them Moreover the beleefe of this Prerogative of Martyrs in the first resurrection was that which made the Christians of those times so joyously desirous of Martyrdome These things will perhaps seem strange but will be found true if examined And yet may not seem so strange to considering minds if they take notice that even so neer to us as in King Edward the sixth his time in comparison of those ancient times though now an antiquity in parallel with later times this our opinion of the glorious state on earth yet to come before the ultimate judgement was given to that age as a Catechismal fundamental King Edward the fixth his Catechisme alleadges for our opinion to be drunk in by all that should receive the true Christian or Protestant Religion For the Author of the Catechisme set forth in that King Edward the fixth his time and by that King authorised May 20. in the last yeer of his reigne explicates the second Petition of the Lords prayer thus Q. How is that Petition Thy Kingdome come to be understood A. Wee aske that his Kingdome may come for as yet we see not all things subject to Christ wee see not how or that the stone is cut out of the mountaine ☞ without humane helpe which BREAKS INTO PEECES AND REDVCETH into NOTHING THE IMAGE DESCRIBED BY DANIEL how or that the onely rocke which is Christ doth POSSESSE AND OBTAINE THE EMPIRE OF THE WHOLE WORLD given him of the Father As yet Antichrist is not slaine whence it is that we desire and pray that at length it may come to passe and be fulfilled and that Christ alone may reigne with his Saints according to the divine promises And that be may live and have dominion in the world according to the decrees of the holy Gospel and not according to the traditions and laws of men and the wils of the TYRANTS of the World God grant saith the Reply of the Questionist that his Kingdome may come most speedily In Mr. Foxe his Martyrologie you shall find in the examination of Mr. Philpot that the Bishops when they came brought this Catechisme with them but what special relation it had to him I know not nor is ought there mentioned about it The Kings Letters before it begin thus Cum brevis explicata c. Whereas a compendious and plain way or forme of Catechisme written by a learnedman was presented unto us we committed the perusal and trial thereof to certain Bishops and other learned men c. And in the same Catechisme concerning the end of the world The Question being put thus The end of the world the sacred Scripture cals the consummation and perfection of the MYSTERY OF CHRIST and the RENOVATION OF ALL THINGS So the Apostle Peter speaks 2 Ep. Chap. 3. We expect new heavens and a new earth according to Gods promise wherein dwels righteousnesse And it seems agreeable to reason that the corruption mutability and sinne to which the whole world is subject should at last cease Now by what means or wayes of circumstances those things shall be brought to passe I desire to know of thee Answ I will declare as well as I can the same Apostle attesting The heavens in manner of a stormy tempest shall passe away and the elements estuating shall be dissolved and the earth and the works therein shall be burnt As if the Apostle should say The world like as wee see in gold shall be wholly purged with fire AND SHALL BEE BROVGHT TO ITS UTMOST PERFECTION which the little world man imitating shall likewise bee freed from corruption and mutation And so for mans sake for whose use the great world was
are as one day with the Lord and then after that by way of exposition he saith We expect new heavens and a new earth All this in 2 Pet. 3. The beginning of the thousand yeers is the morning and day-light of this last day And the last end is the evening and night So that in the morning of this last day they that are Christs are raised and as soon as raised their everlasting life begins for they dye no more for ought I know ¶ 3 To the fifth and last place we answer It doth not infer the Antecedent The words in that Heb. 9.28 are Unto them that looke for him shall he appeare the second time without sinne unto salvation All that Mr. Baily saith upon this place to stretch it to his end is That Christ hath but two times of comming to the earth First in weaknesse to dye upon the Crosse Second time in glory to give everlasting salvation without distinction to all beleevers who look for his comming To which words of Mr. Baily wee say That it doth not follow infallibly that because the Apostle there names two commings by reason of the Antithesis of a second state in opposition to the state of humiliation that therefore there is no third time of his comming Mr. B. now confesseth a second comming of Christ to the earth And it were nothing contrary to Scripture if wee should say that after his second comming at the beginning of the thousand yeers he shall come againe the third time to universall and ultimate judgement But we contend not in this as in relation to our particular point here in hand but shall conclude our answer with this that all that can be inferred from this place is onely this That whereas Christ appeared with sinne upon the Crosse i. e. Hee was reputed a sinner by men and our sin imputed to him by God and was so was made a sacrifice for sin Isa 53.2 Cor. 5. v. ult At his next appearing his second appearing after this as the Apostle reckons hee shall appear in no such garb under no such opinion or notion but most glorious which is truly performed at the beginning of the thousand yeers at which time begins the salvation of them that look for him SECT IV. Mr. Bailyes fourth Argument THe conceit of the thousand yeers makes Christs Kingdome to be earthly and most observable for all worldly glory But the Scripture makes it to be spirituall without all worldly pompe Neither doth the word of God make the Kingdome of the Mediator of two kinds and of a different nature but one uniform from the beginning to the end Luke 1.32 The Lord shall give unto him the Throne of his Father David and he shall reigne over the house of Jacob for ever And 1 Cor. 15.25 He must reigne till hee hath put all things under his feet Here this is but one Kingdome and one way of ruling a Kingdome meerly spiritual and no wise worldly Luke 17.20 The Kingdome of God commeth not with observation neither shall they say Lo here or lo there but the Kingdome of God is within you And John 18.36 My Kingdome is not of this world If my Kingdome were of this world then would my servants fight but now is my Kingdome not from hence Rom. 14.17 The Kingdome of God is not meat and drinke but righteousnesse peace and joy of the Holy Ghost Eph. 1.20 Hee raised him up from the dead and set him at his right-hand in heavenly places and hath put all things under his feet and gave him to be head over all to the Church Then Mr. Baily concludes with this untrue speech The Millenaries make his Kingdome to appeare in Armies and Battels in feasts and pleasures in worldly pomp and power and will not have his Kingdome to stand in ANY of that spiritual power which since his ascension he hath executed on Principalities and Powers which is a false speech if intended as it appears of all Millenaries and so of Protestant Millenaries And it is an answer sufficient meerly to deny what he doth simply affirme without proof If any shall say that we may give a word of answer to this aspersion and rid our hands of it that Battels and Armies at first shall be remotio impedimenti to beat downe Turk and Pope and all their obstinate adherents as it is in Dan. 12. Rev. 17.16 Rev. 19.19 to the end that so these enemies being beaten downe the Kingdome we speak of might be set up it doth not therefore follow that it is asserted that this Kingdome doth consist in these or if it should be said that to all the spiritual glory and power and pleasures they shall have added all outward comforts in a sanctified manner as Adam had as the Apostle Heb. 2.6 in a quotation out of the eighth Psalme as the eighth Psalme is quoted out of Gen. 1.26 sets forth this Kingdome in its peace and comfort to bee like that of Adam in innocency doth it therefore follow that its ave red that this Kingdome consists in these as in its essentials They marbee additionals and circumstantials Isa 65.16 to the end and Matthy 19.29 yet not be the fundamentals and essentials much lesse can it bee truly imagined that any Protestant so indeed would say as Mr. B. affirmes that this Kingdome of which we speake doth not stand in any of that spiritual power which since Christs Ascension hee hath executed on Principalities and Powers Sure the spiritual power shall continue there though it doth not exercise it selfe on Principalities c. when they have submitted onely I make this exception If Mr. Baily means a Classical Presbyterian power I think there shall be none at all I say the lesse to these foule aspersions in this place because I have so abundantly anticipated my selfe afore where I have ripped up the whole mystery of all this iniquity In the third Book Chapter 3. Section 2. beginning at page 369. Jerome is brought in jerking at the Millenaries to the same tune as doth Mr. Baily But hee is I thinke as soundly and justly jerked for his injustice more scholastico as ever any Libeller was by the Lictor or Bedle of the Magistrate There for his fables you have it retorted upon him that by his owne allegation he intimates that the opinion of the thousand yeers was ancienter then his time And his own words are brought against him wherein he confesseth that many Ecclesiastical men and Martyrs have said the same things that he spake against And therefore hee confesseth that he cannot condemne them even when hee had reported them farre worse then ever they spake Yee have there likewise Justin Martyr brought effectually disproving Jerom. Adde to all yee have there Mr. Medes taking Jerom to task In the same third Book third Chapter and third Section yee have the particulars of the aspersions discussed and their Authors disproved They are fathered upon Cerinthus by one Gaius seconded by Dionysius Alexandrinus simply
is creation wee now look at not the qualifications themselves which is the businesse of the third Head in the next Section Isa 65.18 19. Be you glad and rejoyce for ever in that which I CREATE for behold I CREATE Jerusalem a REJOYCING and I will rejoyce in Jerusalem and joy in my people and the voyce of weeping or crying shall be no more heard in her All which are spoken as a parcel of the glorious state of the New Heaven and Earth and New Jerusalem Consonant to St. Johns description of the New Heavens and New Earth and of holy New Jerusalem Rev. 21.1 2 3 4 5. That there is the voyce of triumph from Heaven saying The Tabernacle of God is with men and he will dwell with them c. And God shall wipe away all tears c. and there shall be no more sorrow c. because he that sate upon the Throne said Behold I MAKE ALL THINGS NEW write for these things are true ¶ 4 There shall be at that time created a desence upon or over the Saints over the Church and over all their glory so that their glorious enjoyment in that glorious estate on earth shall not bee subject as formerly to any invasions subversions interruptions or diminutions from any power on earth or in hell Isa 4. verse 4 5. When the Lord shall have washed away the filth of the daughters of Zion then the Lord will CREATE upon every dwelling place of Mount Zion and upon her assemblies a cloud of smoake by day and the shining of a flaming fire by night alluding to the pillar of fire that lead Israel in the wildernesse for UPON ALL THE GLORY SHALL BE A DEFENCE So that what ever shall be hereafter affirmed in this our sixth Book according to the Scriptures touching the excellency of the RESTITUTION or glorious state of all things yet to be on earth shall be an established estate that no enemy shall be able in the least to remove or molest But why do the Scriptures cal this RESTAURATION or RESTITUTION a Creation Surely because of the great likenesse if not samenesse in kinde with the first Creation as to the Physical notion thereof both in regard of matter manner parts and end ¶ 1 As for matter as the immediate Creation viz. of the Chaos was of nothing so mediate Creation viz. of particulars out of that Chaos was of nothing such nothing so or no such thing as into which it was created So that as the first sort of creation was of absolute nothing so the second comparatively or equivalently of nothing For what was the confused clouded Chaos towards the forming of light life and beauty c Even so in this New creation the world shall be asit were resolved into a Chaos again All things shall be in a most confused and forlorne condition men shall be stript of humanity the earth shall be an Aceldoma and Golgotha all things full of unparalleld troubles as our Saviour describes Matth. 24. And lo then shall Christ appeare most gloriously to new-create all things as t is in that same 24. of Matth. Just as we find it Prophesied throughout the Old Testament in most of the Prophesies afore discussed as Hos 3 4 5. Dan 12.1 c. that Christ shall restore all things in the most desolate and Miserable times Most suitable matter for that efficient who is to worke upon it The best cause to worke upon the worst matter He that is All-things yea more then All-things the All-sufficient Almighty to worke upon those nothings who can worke better on that worst then the best of creatures can upon the best and most prepared things For materiam superabit opus the workmanship shall exceed the matter So that as God alone was able and did educe out of those nothings Gen. 1. this beautifull Fabricke of the world so Christ Jesus our Lord shall out of those worse-then-nothings create this glorious new world of which we treat ¶ 2 For manner also it is a Creation in that like the creation of the first world the main parts of this New shal be made in an instant It is true that the Philosophers say that generation is ex nihilo tali in instanti of a nothing so and in an instant as plants of seeds birds of egges beasts of their Semen as are likewise the bodies of men But this Philosophical Generation notwithstanding in the first part viz. that it is of that which is nothing so is far below the lowest namely Mediate Creation in that generation is by very many previous dispositions and various successive preparations of the matter gradually bringing those bodies to their kinde whereas Creation even mediate creation in one act brings forth every thing perfect at once As for the second part of their description of generation that it is done in an instant that is the forme is introduced in an instant I think excepting mens souls it is a meer tradition and fable grounded upon another fiction of wit that material forms are substances which being beleeved in the Schools hath brought in with it a many inextricable knots as how the formes of the Elements remaiâ—e in the mixed body compounded of them how the forme is educed out of the power of the matter as they affirme and yet the forme is a substance of a different nature from the matter and is a distinct co-ordinate essential principle in specie How a sword killing an horse or the like drives out one forme and brings in another or else there were more then one forme afore or else matter may subsist without a forme c. whereas creation yea mediate creation introduceth all formes of things yea and of men too in an instant As we see in the First Creation in every dayes worke It was but said Let it be so and presently it was so And so proportionably will it be in the New Creation that by parts Christ will doe great things suddenly First The call of the Jewes shall be on a sudden Isa 66.8 Who hath heard such a thing who hath seen such things shall the earth be made to bring forth in one day or shall a Nation be borne at ONCE For as soon as Zion travelled she brought forth her children Secondly The appearance of Christ shall be on a sudden Matth. 24.27 As the lightning commeth out of the East and shineth even to the West so also shall the comming of the Sonne of man be Thirdly The change of beleevers surviving at Christs comming shall be in a moment in the twinkling of an eye 1 Cor. 15.51 Behold I shew unto you a MYSTERY we shall not all sleep but we shall all be CHANGED in a moment in the twinkling of an eye Fourthly The resurrection of the deceased Saints at Christs comming shall be in like manner Ibid. 1 Cor. 15.52 We shall be changed in a moment in the twinkling of an eye at the last trump For the Trumpet shall sound and the dead shall
YOUR FILTHINESSE c. and I will save you from ALL YOUR UNCLEANNES 9. Ezekiel Chap. 44.9 speaking of the glorious state of the Church in the last dayes addes Thus saith the Lord no stranger uncircumcised in HEART shall enter into my Sanctuary ¶ 10 Dan. 12.3 At the time that Michael shall stand up and deliver his people they that be wise shall shine as the BRIGHTNES OF THE FIRMAMENT and they that turne many to righteousness AS THE STARS FOR EVER AND EVER Which is to come to passe before the last universal resurrection and ultimate judgement as we have before demonstrated ¶ 11. Zeph. 3.13 The remnant of Israel SHAL NOT DO INIQUITY nor SPEAK LYES neither shall a DECEITFUL TONGUE be found in their mouthes which words relate as the context afore shews to a state of the Church in the last dayes on earth as the thing demonstrates that it was never yet fulfilled ¶ 12. Zach. 14.20.21 Upon all shall be holinesse to the Lord. ¶ 13 Malach. 4.1 c. The day commeth that shall burne as an oven And all that are proud and doe wickedly shall be as stubble and the day commeth that shall burne them up saith the Lord that it shal leave them neither root nor branch All these places and others have been demonstratively cleared to relate to the time following upon the Call of the Jewes and their settlement All which laid together make up a sinlesse condition § 2 Which will be more cleare and more clearly settled on our spirits by adding some places of the New Testament ¶ 1 In 1 Cor. 15.52 54 55 56. it is said When this corruption shall put on incorruption at the sound of the last Trumpet then O death where is thy sting The sting of death is sinne But thanks be to God that gives us victory through our Lord Jesus Christ Now as wee have before proved there is a vast space viz. of a thousand yeers of the whole terme of the last Trumpet afore the universal ultimate Resurrection ¶ 2 In 2 Cor. 3.18 it is said When the Jewes shall have both vayles taken away as wee have before opened viz. that on Moses namely his forme of worship and that on their hearts viz. their unbeleef instead of the remainders of sinne they shall with open face behold the glory of the Lord being transformed into the same image from glory to glory ¶ 3 St. Peter likewise asserts 2 Pet. 3.13 That after the dissolution of this present vaine sinfull world there shall not onely be New Heavens but also a NEW EARTH wherein dwels RIGHTEOUSNESSE Proving it out of Isa 65.17 for those words be repeats This is spoken to the Jewes and concerning their share in the future happinesse on earth And that dwelling of righteousnesse there must signifie an eminent and absolute degree or else it will not surmount the present state of the Chuch in which as such dwels much righteousnesse But I need not struggle about this with most knowing men who incline to understand this place of a perfection as absolute as that in the supreamest Empyrean heaven ¶ 4 Let us adde but one place more viz. That in Rev. 21. v. 1. c. and verse last of that Chapter in a continued description of the glorious state of the Saints on earth yet to come And saith St. John I saw a new heaven and a new EARTH and I saw the holy City New Jerusalem comming down FROM GOD OUT OF HEAVEN Behold the Tabernacle of God is WITH MEN c. and there shall in no wise enter into it any thing that DEFILETH c. but they that are written in the Lambs Book Every verse of this Chapter as before we gave a particular account hath something in it incompatible and incompetible with the supreamest heavenly estate § 3 But then the question will bee where shall abide all those thousand yeers all those hypocrites called Gog and Magog that shall at last break out and go about to oppose the Church though in vain their opposition and subversion concluding in the same moment Rev. 20.8 Wee answer according to that light wee have attained that most probably they shall not be in but without the Church Rev. 22.15 Without shall be dogs evill men and such as make and love a lye The Heathens as appears by Homer * Iliad 8. did use to call the place of out-cast men 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Tartaros alluding likely to some dismal remote place of the earth as Tartary is from us and from Jerusalem The Apostle takes up that word in 2 Pet. 2.4 and makes a verb out of it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Tartaroâ— to signifie the putting of men into an Hellish solitary place So that most likely the unregenerate shall be as remote from the Church as Tartary is from Jerusalem and the Christian Church as far as it were from Hell to Heaven The Church now being as in an Heaven on earth the false-hearted spawn of future Gog and Magog shall bee remote on earth neer their future Hell To which that place of Gog and Magog Rev. 20.8 doth contribute some proof in that it saith that Gog and Magog shall bee fetched up against the Church by the Devil from the FOURE QUARTERS OF THE EARTH § 4 But if these Hypocrites were permitted neerer the Church they might perhaps be converted VVee answer no. For it is if we may use that word the Fate of this Millenary period I meane Gods righteous peremptory sentence that as all that time there shall be no degenerating of any beleevers so no more regenerating of any unbeleevers There is a judiciary sentence peremptorily passed to this purpose Rev. 22.11 He that is unjust let him be unjust still and be which is filthy let him be filthy still and he that is righteous let him be righteous still and he that is holy let him be holy still That is They shall be so still In order to which it follows WITHOUT are Dogs c. that love and make a lye And I come quickly and my reward is with mee The appearance of Christ at the preface to thiâ— thousand yeers will be as it is represented in the Preface to the Revelation Chap. 1. among the Churches viz. that then are or have been Chuâ—ches Therefore it behooves Churches and all Professors to beware they bee not sound as the Foolish Virgins that never had the oyle of regenerating grace in the vessels of their hearts and the oyle of sound principles in their heads by which they made the blaze of Profession is spent i. e. they have lost their principles and so being unready at Christs comming they come when as Ierome saith well the doors are shut SECT II. It is Sorrowlesse § 1 HAving shewed that this future glorious state of the Kingdome of Christ on earth yet to come shall be sinlesse next with good dependence we assert it is a sorrowlesse condition For sorrow came into the world by sinne therefore sorrow shall
reading though it doth a little differ from the Arabick and Greeke 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. And there shall not be any more an infant of dayes and an old man that fils not his dayes because the youth that offends at the age of an hundred yeers shall dye and he that transgresseth in the age of an hundred yeers shall be banished which reacheth thus far to our purpose to signifie that the sinners not the Saints shall dye at this time of the glorious visible state of the Church But do not I stretch the sense of the Chaldee Paraphrase To answer this and to give you a further account of the sense of that place according to the opinion of the Church at Geneva and of the Rabbins hear the great Critick Ludovick De Dieu his Animadversions on the place bringing in his report of their opinions those things I have before asserted with an addition of his own thoughts upon the place Video Genevenses c. I see saith he they of Geneva doe refer this same 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 THENCE to time translating De la en avant that is From henceforward But Rabbi D. Kimchi refers it to Jerusalem saying 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 THENCE that is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 from Jerusalem whom Vatablus and Junius follow and I thinke ought to be followed * I for more safety according to the Heb. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 with 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 referred it to both in that both time and place concur to the thing Moreover the Genevenses or they of Geneva translate the rest as if the sense of the Hebrew were this At that time so great shall be the length of mens lives that he that is now an old man shall then be counted as an infant And I see the Hebrews as R.D. Kimchi and Sol. Jarchi in their Commentaries yea and Jonathan in his Chalde Paraphrase to take the sense of this place to be That no man at that time shall be carried out of Jerusalem to burial who is but a boy no nor an old man unlesse he hath filled up his dayes that is hath lived to that length of life WHICH MEN HAD BEFORE THE FLOOD c. Thus far De Dieu his report of others viz. The Genevenses the Hebrews and the Chalde Paraphrase which how closely they concurre with us afore I need not multiply words to open the intelligent eye Next for De Dieu his own opinion upon the place it is true that he looks upon those hopes of the Jewes to use his owne words to be but dreams wherein they do imagine such a marveilous Kingdome of the Messiah and such a most happy life of the Jews AT THAT TIME ON EARTH But whiles he turnes us quite about we are but AS WEE WERE for he speaks but tantamount the same in effect which hath been already affirmed His words are these Nos haec spiritualia esse novimus c. That is wee know that these things are spiritual and so we interpret There shall not exist from thence any more an infant of dayes and an old man that filleth not up his dayes that is At that time there shal be another manner of the state of the world then there is at present For in this world many dye Infants others as it were old men of sixty or seventy yeers of age few finish their just space of life to attaine to an hundred yeers old But THEN there shall be the same condition of all whether of young or old for all shall fully make up their dayes The Prophet proves it For the child shall dye an hundred yeers old that is A childe shall not die a childe but shall fulfill the due space of his life But the sinner an hundred yeers old shall be accursed that is A childe will be happier in the Kingdome of Christ then an old man in the Kingdome of the world For a childe in the Kingdome of Christ SHAL ATTAINE A BLESSED OR BEATIFIED PERFECTION OF LIFE But the sinner in the Kingdome of the world shall be accursed even whiles hee SEEMS to have attained to a perfection of life Thus De Dieu for his own opinion By which supposing our consent to all he saies how far hath he carried us from where we were He saith he knowes these things of the Messiahs Kingdome shall bee spiritual We say so too The efficient the form or manner the end shall be spiritual and the injoyment shall be spiritualized But mens soules and bodies shall not be altered in kind then they were not men And the earth shall be earth or else how is it called a new Earth An earth though renovated And upon this must Christs Kingdome exist for he shall have none in the supreamest heavens after this on earth 1 Cor. 15.24.28 And he confesseth that in the Kingdome of Christ shall be happinesse I say no more let the Reader judge of the rest § 5 Some make another argument out of a Text that speaks no such thing viz. Heb. 9.27 It is appointed unto men once to dye therefore men in the thousand yeers must also die To which wee answer First It is not said to all men but onely to men Secondly All men are not appointed to die So the same Apostle expresly in 1 Cor. 15.51 we shall not all dye that is the meaning of sleep but wee shall be changed Thirdly Note the distinction of times It is true in that 9. of Heb. 27. that before the judgement men ordinarily die But when the judgement comes which begins at this thousand as we proved afore because the living wicked are destroyed and the dead Saints are raised and rewarded I say when the judgement comes there is no more death but changing 1 Cor. 15.1 Thess 4. There is yet behinde one objection sc The last enemy that is destroyed is death 1 Cor. 15.26 as if this Text did argue for death in the thousand yeers but it doth not For we answer Though that be the last enemy yet that is not the last thing done in the seventh Trumpet or thousand yeers but death is destroyed to the Saints at the beginning of the thousand yeers as we have largely shewed afore For verse 23,24 is said every one shall rise in his owne order Christ first AFTERWARD viz. above one thousand six hundred and fifty after they that are Christs AFTER that comes the ultimate end sc after a thousand yeers As he destroyes the death of sinne at the beginning of the sounding of the last Trumpet v. 52. sc the seventh Rev. 11. So after the sound of it many things are to be done afore the ultimate judgement Ibid. sc as afore shewed At the ultimate judgement death is not destroyed to the wicked but re-inforced in a worse kinde or degree Rev. 20.14 SECT IV. THe future glorious state on earth shall be such as wherein there shall be No humane ruling Majesty No Church-censures No superiority of persons No fears
shall not If we might be tempted this were not a sorrowlesse condition It was a part of Christs great humiliation that he was tempted though he could not be prevailed against If wicked men the instruments shall not be neer to tempt them then nor Satan the Author So the Text Rev. 19. The wicked are removed Chap. 20. Satan is removed bound up that he should not seduce the Nations any more which phrase would be weighed more then it is I have before shewed in our answer to Doctor Prideaux That the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifies any the least temptation And now I adde that for ought I know 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 may fitly be rendred Satan shall not to that end wander up and downe among the Nations The Greek may beare it And the context speaks for it For were all those expressions and acts sc laid hold on and bound him cast him into the pit and sets a seale onely to that end that he might not seduce If God had onely laid his command it had been enough to restrain his acting as when Christ commanded him out of the possessed Rather therefore the meaning is that hee might not have so much as the liberty to peragrare Gentes to wander up and downe over the Nations It must not be with him as in the dayes of the Churches afflictions Job 1.7 and 1 Pet. 5.8 Now he is held chained cast down sealed that he may not wander 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the active is to wander as planets that compasse the Earth And 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the middle voice signifies to wander from place to place viz. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as the Greek Criticks give instance obire multa loca to travel over much ground And Christ saith Now is the houre of temptation and the Kingdome of patience Then the Kingdome of perfect peace purity and exultation Rev. 11. Rev. 20. Rev. 21. The Serpent then shal only eat his dust Isa 65.25 in opposition to Gen. 3.14 And the devill that abused his body shall be shut up Now shall be fulfilled that promise Rom. 20.16 The God of PEACE mark Gods title shall tread Satan under your feet c. Now that Satan is in the pit he must be under their feet while the Saints stand on their feet on earth Satan must be under them As all things under Christs feet Heb. 2. As for Satans utter prevailing that was subdued when the Apostle spake those words For this purpose the Sonne of God was manifested that he might destroy the works of the Devill 1 Joh. 3.8 Observe it is said works c. therefore now Satan himselfe must be under their feet as that text speaks Rom. 16.20 now is to bee fulfilled perfectly that Heb. 2.8 c. All must be subject to Christ And he must destroy death AND HIM THAT HAD THE POWER OF DEATH WHICH IS the Devil verse 14. So that that time that is a Deathlesse condition is a Devil-lesse a Satanlesse time And as in Rev. 20.7 the letting loose of Satan and Satans tempting go together so by an Antithesis Satans binding and his Non-tempting goe together verse 3. Indeed it is said so frequently in the Revelation that at the seventh Trumpet at this first Resurrection when Christ reigns and the Saints with him on Earth that their businesse shall be to joy praise triumph and sing Hallelujahs Rev. 5. Rev. 7. Rev. 14. and Rev. 19.5 or six times in the beginning of that Chapter that it cannot enter into the thoughts of the purest reason that there should be any sad songs of Satan sung to the ears of a Saint Sin and temptation are more sad then death to a Saint and therefore if the lesser sorrow and death shall be gone at this time then much more temptation If nothing that defileth shall enter into this state then not the unclean spirit as Christ calls him O glorious time when there shall be no disposition within nor temptation without to sinne but so full of God and happinesse in manifestation of Christ that there shall be no thoughts but in relation to him The souls of the Elect shall not returne to their bodies to be tempted that were their losse And the living Saints are changed therefore to a state of grace beyond that now which at present is liable to Temptation SECT VI. The next Quality is the RESTAURATION OF ALL THE CREATURES AS Isa 65.17 it is said there must be New Heavens sc a New Church-state so a New Earth a New naturall politick state of persons and things For there is mention of plantings and injoying of them And verse 25. of the Wolfe dwelling with the Lamb c. and that dust shall be the Serpents meat no devouring or hurting So the close They shall not destroy nor hurt in all the holy Mountaine Of this of the Wolfe c. we spake once afore largely on Isa 11.6 7 8 9. which Lactantius takes litterally See before and after the Text it is intended for the time we speake of And the reason of all is For the earth shall be full of the knowledge of the Lord as the waters cover the Sea Knowledge signifies oft all spirituals and here imports that there shal be such an abundant manifestation of Gods presence that all whether taken litterally or metaphorically shall be as in Paradise before Adams fall So Psal 8. makes Gen. 1.26 A Prophesie or Type or both of what man shall injoy in after times And Heb. 2. applies Psal 8. to the time we speak of And Heb. 4. applies Gods resting the seventh day to a Sabbatisme on earth yet to come So the 2 Pet. 3. and Rev. 21.1 apply the New Heavens and New Earth to the said time and call it the New Jerusalem comming downe from God out of Heaven And the addition to the glory of this New Jerusalem shall be a lustre of all creatures materials of building shall be like all manner of precious stones and men shall be like Angels Kings honouring the Church No sea sc to devoure but adorn and comfort man if it be not in a great part crusted into a chrystal body like heaven above consolidated for men to travel upon and come together and to shine to adde an inlightning to the earth for more glory Adde to all this that of Rom. 8.18 As vox naturae THE VOYCE OF NATURE for our point full to our purpose though it may be not heeded for this purpose For Peter gives us a good item when being about to speak of the New Heavens and New Earth 2 Pet. 3. He tels us in v. 3. That before that shall be scoffers and slighters of this opinion of Christs comming they will be as heedlesse as men were before the renovation of the world by Noahs flood Chap. 2. And then having spoken of the New Heavens c. according to Gods promise verse 13. then in the 14. verse he exhorts men to be diligent to bee found blamelesse
c. As saith he Our beloved brother Paul speaks of these things in all his Epistles which unlearned and unstable men wrest So that in Peters judgement many things of this New Heavens and New Earth and of this glorious time are in Pauls Epistles but being as Peter hints profoundly delivered are not understood by many but perverted as we see at this time Well let us understand Paul better then so In that Rom. 8. verse 18. c. The sufferings of this present time are not worthy to bee compared with the glory which shall bee revealed in us mark REVEALED and IN US It is a bringing downe glory to us into us Then it follows verse 19. The earnest expectation of the creature waiteth for the manifestation of the Sonnes of God Mark It is here plaine that the natural creature is meant not the spiritual new creature viz. the regenerated souls They are the Sons of God And these two are contradistinct And mark further that it is said It waits for the manifestation of the Sonnes of God whereas glory in the highest heavens is an hiding of them from the Creation and would disappoint it of its expectation which must not bee because that expectation and waiting is the instinct of the creature And that is so much as that it may not be in vaine By that a tree grows to his period of age be it in never so many hundred yeers c. Accidentals of wens and warts winds and weathers doe not eradicate his instinct The curse is accidental to the creature not of the essence the creation still by instinct looks for his former state in Adam and therefore as notwithstanding nipping winter the creature every spring hath its petty resurrections as types and pledges of the great as the little Jubilee of the great So its expectation by instinct shall not faile of the great Restauration And this accidentall the Apostle argues in the next verse sc 20. The creature was made subject to vanity not willingly sc not essentially of its essential frame but by reason of him who subdued it under hope i. e. The creature was made substantially glorious essentially exceeding good and then after Adams fall which that it was the same day or suddenly after his creation I cannot yet believe Divines best reasons are not to mee convincing I cannot thinke that God would make such an excellent piece to be like a bubble or sparke Though in the third Chapter of Genesis is presently mention of Adams fall and Chapter 4. of Adams two sonnes yet Adam was an hundred and thirty yeers old when he had his third son sc Seth. I say then after Adams fall it was subject to vanity i. e. fading and unconstant with changes by Winter and Summer by him who subjected it sc by Gods curse on the creature not in anger to it but as a punishment to man whom as a Lord they should have served But God subjected it not for ever to that condition but under hope As he cursed man not forever but gave him a promise of salvation by the seed of the woman Christ that the Serpents head shall be bruised scrooched And so as man by distinct hope waites and God is mindfull of that promise above foure thousand yeers after Rom. 16.10 So the creatures have an instinct of hope impressed on their essence that they shall be restored And here is a promise for it in this 8. of Rom. verse 21. That in perfection they shall serve their Lord viz. Man being restored to his perfection by the man Christ Jesus There is a shadow of this instinct in all plants sleeping birds c. in that they live in Winter in secret and every Spring put forth in hope as the Apostle speaks that the time is come And if that be not the time then at next Winter they retire againe and wait another Winter Just as men did rationally Luke 24.21 wee hoped that this had been he c. And Act. 1. Mr. Wilt thou then at this time restore the Kingdome to Israel If not they must wait longer And as men distinctly so the creation instinctly For the promise is sure to both Verse 21. The creature it selfe also shall be delivered from the bondage of corruption into the glorious liberty of the Sonnes of God See againe the creature and the sonnes of God are two distinct things To understand the minde of the words note first that Bondage imports the creature came into this condition not from its original essence and first constitution but accidentally and violently by mans corruption sc the Fall in Adam Secondly Note that corruption is of three sorts ¶ 1 In a physical or natural respect as now the natures of all the creation are corruptible dissolvable fading as in Autumn Winter or other periods or to be corruptible with malignant qualities as the elements of aire water c. and plants grow unwholesome c. The Stars to be ecclipsed clouded and stained with malevolent constellations blasting and hurting things below and all to the defacing of their glory and dis-service to the Saints ¶ 2 In Civil respects or uses They are worne and wasted and wearied and bruised for the use of man As Land Cattel Plants c. ¶ 3 In a spiritual respect so by the sinne and corruption yet remaining in the best of men they are made to serve for sinfull uses not onely by the wicked but sometimes by the Saints as when they are used to superfluous superabounding banqueting or to please our pride or the vanity of our minds c. § 3 Now to be delivered from this corruption into the glorious liberty of the Sonnes of God imports That as the Saints shall now be advanced to the full liberty of the Sons of God sc they shall be no more under the bondage of infirmities of nature or Satans temptations or the imperiousnesse of sin or the violence of unjust men but shall bee naturally civilly and spiritually free from having receiving or doing any hurt their state shall be a full liberty and a glorious one so all the creatures of the whole creation shall partake of the same liberty thus far ¶ 1 They shall be delivered from the corruption and fading that adheres to their nature ¶ 2 They shall be delivered from the violence done to them by men ¶ 3 From their sinful use ¶ 4 Shall be delivered to their right owner viz. to the second Adam and his posterity who shall onely use them well As man shall not sweat and toyle in labour which was the curse on Adam after his fall and therefore now to be taken off so man shall not oppresse and grieve and discourage the creature How plaine then is this Text of the Restauration of the Creation to them that will understand And this was never yet fulfilled but spoken to Saints as yet expecting it verse 22.23 The creature groans and travelleth in pain till now sc under the corruption before explained and not only
in these comparisons As the Summer Sunne rising ascending and setting differs from the heavens continued into one whole Sunne whereby it would be alwayes day and alwayes glorious Summer And as a River differs from a Sea of sweet waters the River exists by succession the Sea is still the same fixed So in this state we speake of Every injoyment and injoyer shall bee as full at first in perfection and joy as at last CHAP. V. THus of Qualities now wee come to Priviledges sc That which Saints had afore either in common with others or in an ordinary degree they shall now have in a way of special Priviledge and preheminence SECT I. First Priviledge The fulfilling of most things that before were but foretold § 1 THe Mysteries and Prophesies which before they had but in the Word now they shall have in the thing ¶ 1 For Mysteries See Rev. 11.19 The Temple of God was opened and there was seen in his Temple the Arke of his Testament This cleerly relates to the time we speake of as it is evident in verse 15. The seventh Angel sounded c. And the Temple of God was opened in Heaven By comparing this with Rev. 21. verse 22 the thing is plainer And I saw no Temple therein but the Lord God Almighty and the Lamb was the Temple And this also relates to the same time See verse 1. I saw New Heaven and New Earth Verse 2. And I saw New Jerusalem This Prophesie plainly foretels of a kinde of Temple in those dayes of which we speak In Ezek. wee have much of the measures of the Temple So Ezek. Chapter 41. and 42. c. cleerly relating to a New Testament time by St. Johns exposition Rev 21. And Malachy tels us Chap. 3. verse 1. The Lord will suddenly come to his Temple And John saith Rev. 7.15 The Saints serve God day and night in his Temple Chap. 11.1 The Temple is measured Chap. 14 15 17. Angels come out of the Temple Chap. 15.5 The Temple of the Tabernacle of the Testimony in heaven was opened Chap. 16.1.17 Voyces come out of the Temple And in the Text wee alleadged Chap. 11. v. 19. The Temple of God was open and the Arke was seen Now what is the meaning of all Surely a Temple equivalently they shall have But no Temple properly as it is said Rev. 21. v. 22. I saw no Temple But God and the Lamb was that equivalent Temple yea that super-eminent Temple And the presence of God in Christ shall bee such with them that as Rev. 11.19 that spiritual Arke shall not be hid as was the material Ark in the Old Testament Temple but shall be seen In the Ark was the Table of the Law and the Pot of Manna Christ the end of the Law Rom. 10.4 And Christ and his word is the Manna Rev. 2. The Arke was in the holiest of Holies which was seldome seen and onely when the High Priest went in But now this spiritual Arke in this glorious time is commonly seen Observe That the Arke typified Christ and his Word As the Temple was a pledge of Gods presence as before that the Tabernacle was So that the meaning is That now Gods presence shall be such in and through Christ to his Church that the glory of Christ and the mystery of his word shall be far more plain unto them There shall be no material Temple but there shall be the equivalent Temple the Antitype Gods presence in Christ gloriously manifest And his Word more open and plaine then ever since the New Testament All mysteries relating to this time foretold shall be revealed Now shall bee fulfilled that Dan. 12. Knowledge shall be increased And that Isa 11. The earth shall be filled with the knowledge of the Lord as the waters cover the Sea All that men had before in the ear now they shall have in the eye their science shall be turned to experience ¶ 2 All Prophesies relating to the best of Times of the Saints welfare shall now be fulfilled The Saints shall not have these things onely in types visions or knowledge but in possession and happy injoyment The Revelation is the summe of all the Prophets This is declared to John by Christ Rev. 1. sc in a representation And therefore it is said Rev. 22.6 The Lord God of the holy Prophets sent his Angel to shew unto his servants the sayings of the Prophesie of this Booke The intent and meaning is That the Lord God that spake by the Prophets and spake of these things by the Prophets sent by his Angel to explain those things delivered by the Prophets concerning these times of which we speak Now this Book of the Revelation though it be far plainer then the Prophets yet it is not fully and wholly plain to us therefore called A sealed Booke that Christ must open Rev. 5. This opening is by the events Rev. 6. c. which will be compleatly done in this visible glorious time of the Church as we may perceive by the light now at the dawning afore the Sunne of righteousnesse doth arise Christ is the Yea and Amen of all the promises 2 Cor. 1.20 therefore when he appears again all will appear fulfilled As the woman of Samaria said Joh. 4. so it shall be sc when the Messiah commeth which is called the Christ he shall tell us all things yea restore all things Act. 3. Therefore is Christ called the WORD of GOD and the Heire of all things because he will declare and perform all things § 2 What Mr. Bolton saith of everlasting glory in the highest Heaven shall be proportionably true now in this thousand yeers We shall perfectly understand all Physical or natural and spiritual things what is the number of the Heavens The essences of the creaures How we shall know and behold God in Christ c And then shall bee fulfilled all the prayers of Saints put up for the welfare of Church and Saints from the beginning of the world Then shall Sem and Japhet dwell together Then those prayers that gave God no rest till he made Jerusalem a praise shall be answered and all the glorious things that have been spoken of the Church the City of God shall appear in their colours and be given in in great glory As it is said she is the Lords portion Deut. 32.9 His pleasant portion Jer. 12.10 His inheritance Isa 19.25 All people are the worke of his hands but his Church is his Inheritance Again the Church is called the Dearly beloved of his soule Jer. 12.7 His love his dove his undefiled all faire c. Cant. oft His Treasure and peculiar treasure Ex. 19 5. The Lords house of glory Isa 60.7 Yea His glory Isa 46.13 and THE glory of God Jer. 3.17 Nay the Throne of his glory Jer. 14.21 Nay the Crowne of his glory Isa 62.3 Nay the Royal Diadem Ibid. Againe the Church is called The ornament of God the beauty of his ornaments the beauty of his ornament in
Majesty Ezek. 7.20 Yea the Church is called Christs body Christs fulnesse presented without spot Eph. 1. Eph. 5. Now all these in the thousand yeers must be fully fulfilled Rev. 21. throughout SECT II. The Second Priviledge is A superabundant pouring out of the Spirit § 1 THe Saints ever since they beleeved have had the Spirit in some measure sc as a Spirit of Adoption and Sanctification so these are in Rom. 8. viz. v. 10. and v. 15. But now they shall have it in a more exceeding abounding manner and measure both for gifts and graces § 2 Joel 2.28 Afterwards I will pour out my spirit upon all flesh and your sonnes and your daughters shall prophesie your old men shall dream dreams and your young men shall see visions and also upon the servants and upon the hand-maids in those dayes will I poure out my Spirit I did before in the Quod sit prove First That this did relate to the time we speake of Secondly That that pouring out Act. 2. was but the first fruits sc Spirit was abundantly poured out but upon some few And Dan. 12. verse 2 3 and 4. it is prophesied of this time Many of them that sleep in the dust of the earth shall awake c. and they that bee wise shall shine as the brightnesse of the firmament and they that turne many to righteousnesse as the stars for ever and ever And knowledge shall be increased The demonstration of this place to belong to this time we speake of you have heard afore SECT III. The third Priviledge A wonderful returne of prayers § 1 ISaiah 65.24 It shall come to passe that before they call I will answer and whiles they are yet speaking I will heare That these words are within the body of a maine Prophesie of the visible glory of the Church in the time we speake of we have abundantly proved afore And you your selves may see by weighing verse 17. afore sc I create New Heavens and a New Earth c. compared with 2 Pet. 3. and 25. after The Wolfe shall dwel with the Lamb c. they shall not hurt nor destroy in all the holy mountaine And this same verse sc 24. which I urge Mr. Archer also urgeth to the same purpose in his Book of Christs Reigne on Earth page 31. saying That at this time there shall be a full and present answer to all their prayers At this time the reversion of all the prayers of all former ages will come into the Churches hands the effect of all those will flow in upon the Church unto a sea of happinesse And if this Church at present makes any prayers they shall have a present answer The Text saith Before they call The Hebrew is rendred both by the Latins Greek Syr. and Arab. Before they cry out So that before they pray as men in extremity or distresse God will answer which is plaine by that which follows For whiles they are speaking even in their hearts whiles they are but thinking prayer their desires shall be fulfilled Mr. Bolton saith that whiles the Saints are but thinking the desire of moving from one place to another from one company of Saints and Angels to another whether in heaven or on earth or both for most probably heaven and earth in common shall at last be the Sea of blisse both being made equally glorious they shall move thither even in an imperciptible time that is very suddenly Now every thing must bee compleated in its prime and therefore whatsoever requests the Saints may then make as comporting with that state it shall bee to use Christs words which then must be fulfilled to purpose But ask and have It is true this state shal be a state of perfection but it doth exist on this side the last loosing of Satan the rising of Gog and Magog and the ultimate general judgement What requests the Saints may then make we cannot affirm But sure if they make any they shal be without sinne or sorrow as before we have largely intimated The word prayer in Scripture comprehends praises and praises prayers as David calls his Psalmes Thillim Praises though they contain many Prayers That in this state the Church shall abound with praises the Revelation doth often hint as Rev. 11. Rev. 14. Rev. 19. And even as Christ layes not downe his Mediatorship till the end of the thousand yeers in divers respects of which afore so perhaps the Saints may make some kinde of prayers As for the exercise of their communion with God the use of their graces the receivall of reciprocall impressions for the continuation of their present state though God hath assured them it shall not faile prayer being the conduit of the fluxive River-like flowing in of it And for the finishing of their present state to the utmost supernal eternal glory I tenderly propose these things wherein my light is dim Most probably Adam in innocency should have spoken to God in some way of prayer And the Angel made a request to Christ Dan. 12.6 But I cease SECT IV. Upon those there former Priviledges followes this that in this glorious time the Churches Ordinances shall be in an higher Key either in Quality or Degree § 1 CHrist still holding his Mediatorship not to be laid downe till the end of the ultimate day of judgement 1 Cor. 15. and hee appearing in his glory to the Church as the great ordinance of Ordinances shall by speciall communion with the Church manifest to it the mind of God So that as God spake to Adam in Paradise and gave him the Ordinance of that seale the tree of life so here is this second Paradisian state of the Church there shall be a special manifestation and communication of and through Christ who is the maine tree of life Rev. 22. The Saints shall have such manifestations of the presence of God through Christ that now mainly is that fulfilled they shall be all taught of God as Adam was instructed in Paradise § 2 They shall have the high Ordinance that Angelical Ordinance of praise to God Rev. 11. Rev. 14. Rev. 19. Praise is as well an injunction as Prayer and as formerly Fasting was an extraordinary worship in misery so now praise in time of all mercies § 3 Their meditation which is an injoyned Ordinance I say their meditation and contemplation of God shall be as a vision of God or sight of his face Rev. 22.2 3 4. In the midst of the street and on either side of the river was the tree of life yeelding fruit the participation whereof comes not in without meditation acting or receiving and there shall be no curse there but the Throne of God and the Lamb shall be in it and his servants shall serve him which sure must be by meditation minding what they doe and THEY SHALL SEE HIS FACE So that their meditation and contemplation of God shall be as in a continuall vision of God Glorious sights cause meditation and meditation takes in
C Gaius Dionysius Alexandrinus and Eusebius most falsely to have fathered the opinion of the thousand yeers with a mixture of abhorred impieties and absurdities upon Cerinthus is proved fully out of the best Antiquity Page 372 The qualities of men in the future glorious state on earth shall be Co-ordinate Page 523 Chiliasme vindicated from voluptuousnesse Page 372 The Chaos preceding the glorious state Page 497 The new Creation of the glorious state Page 499 No Church-Censures in the glorious state held forth in this Treatise Page 523 No procreation of Children in the glorious state treated of in this Book Page 523 In that state shall be a restauration of all the Creatures Page 526 Item a confluence of all comforts Page 533 How the six dayes work of the first Creation typifie the state of the New Creation according to the opinion of the Rabbins Page 428 How according to the opinion of the Author Page 502 D Dionysius Alexandrinus in Eusebius confuted in his standering the opinion of the thousand yeers Page 372 The Dimensions of the glorious state held forth in their Treatise Page 505 That state also shall be Death-lesse Page 515 No desertions in that state Page 523 No Decay in that state ibid. E Eusebius Pamphylus justly reproved and confuted for his facile and simple credulity to Gaius and Alexandrinus falsely calumniating the Doctrine of the thousand yeers Page 372 F No Fears in the glorious state intended in this Treatise Page 523 G Gaius mentioned in Eusebius reproaching the opinion touching the thousand yeers confuted Page 372 Divers opinions about Gog and Magog Page 427 Jews confesse they shal have a strivng with Gog and Magog after their return into their own Country with their Scripture proofs thereof Page 426 H Hieronymus alias Jeroms jeers jirkings at the proofs of the glorious state to come discussed and confuted 369 The confession of beathens touching the glorious state on earth yet to come 414 I Jerom opposing the 1000 yeers confuted See Hieronimus Jerom reproved for it by Mr. Mede 435 How Christs intercession doth doth not remain in the future glorious state on earth 485 K King Edwards Catechism set forth by his authority and brought by the Bishops to M. Philpots trial expounds the Petition in the Lords Prayer Thy KINGDOM come of this GLORIOVS KINGDOM ON EARTH YET TO COME of which this Book doth treat 438 L Of the Saints living a 1000 y. on earth 53 Of the cleering of Lactantius touching voluptuous Chiliasme 435 M The confession of the Mahumetans acknowledging in substance the summe of the general position of this Treatise 418 No humane ruling Majesty in the glorious state on earth yet to come 523 N The voice of Nature for this restauration or Nature in all things groans by Natural instinct for this restauration of all things on earth yet to come which must be fulfilled God never impressing any kind of Natural instinct on the species of things in vain See largely 526 O Objections against our arguments for the general Thesis refelled 495 P The general Position propounded 1 The general Position expounded 2 The Position divided into two parts viz. I That Christ shal visibly appear in person 2 That under him the Saints shal sensibly and properly reign 77 Dr. Prideaux his arguments answered 443 Dr. Pareus answered 471 No procreation of children in the glorious state intended in this Treatise 523 The priviledges in that glorious state 536 All Prophesies shall then be fulfilled 536 Q Ten Qualifications or Qualities of the glorious state yet to come upon earth with several other consequences from those ten 507 At that time shall bee a perfection of all Qualities 532 R Of the Jewish Rabbins confession of the main of this Treatise 410 In the glorious state we speak of shall be a Restauration of all the creatures 526 S Ten Scriptures out of the N. Testament to prove the visible appearance of Christ to the Church on earth at the great Restauration 78 Five places out of the old Testament to prove the same 170 666 is fitted to be the Antichristian numeral name of Turk and Pope 87 One and fifty Scriptures out of the O. Testament collated with those allegation of them in the New to prove that there shal be yet on earth a glorious state of al things 115 c. The glorious state intended in this Treatise shall be sin-lesse 507 It shall also bee sorrowlesse 511 An abundant pouring out of the Spirit shall then be 538 12 Scriptures in the N. Testament to prove that there shal be yet on earth a most glorious state of all things 377 to 406 T Of the Saints living gloriously a THOVSAND YEERS on earth 55 Of their Reigning there so LONG 66 Of their Reigning with Christ THERE that while 68 More of the space of time of 1000 Y. of the Saints reigning with Christ on earth 74 The doctrine of the 1000 yeers vindicated from voluptuous Chiliasme 372 The state in that time shal be Temptation-lesse 525 The glorious state shal be a Time-lesse condition viz. more like eternity 530 536 V The voyce or vote of al Nations confesseth in substance the Tenet of a glorious c. 413 Our Tenet little lesse then the voice of the law of nature 434 A full answer to an universal objection 492 The state of the thousand yeers vindicated from voluptuousnesse 369 c. 479 c. W What in particular the glorious state held forth in this Treatise shal be 464 No wants in that State 523 The six dayes Works of the Creation applied by the R. to typifie the new Creation 428 FINIS
shall be subject unto him viz. so as the same Jerusalem Targum expoundeth on the 11. verse of that 49. of Gen. that those Kings and Princes that will not be subject unto him he shall kill making the Universe red with the blood of their slain and the hils white with the fat of their mighty men c. But these things were not fulfilled at Christs being on the earth in the flesh It was above three hundred yeares after ere one King or Nation was subject unto Christ viz. in the time of Constantine the Great except some sprinklings of Converts here and there called Churches the Nations and Kings of the earth either taking no cognizance of his interest or else persecuted it even as to this day they doe even ten parts of the world for one that ownes him Neither hath Christ yet taken that material and sensible vengeance on them by killing the disobedient in order to a bringing in of the rest into a visible subjection to him § 4 Lastly Paraphrast Jonathan in his Chalde Paraphrase of Hos 14.8 hath these words They speaking of the Jewes shall bee gathered together from out of the midst of their CAPTIVITY they shall DWELL under the shadow of their CHRIST and the DEAD shall LIVE and good shall grow in the EARTH and there shall bee a memoriall of their goodnesse FRUCTIFYING and never fayling as the remembrance of the sound of the Trumpets over the old wine which was wont to be offered in the Sanctuary which things were never yet fulfilled on earth We forbear to quote more out of their TARGUM or Chalde Paraphrase now because we shall afterwards oft cast an eye upon it in our discusse of severall Scriptures that tend to the PROOF of the point in hand § 5 To this let mee adde a touch out of the CAPITULA of RABBI ELIEZAR the GREAT because neare of the same Antiquity with the former his words are these As I live saith Jehovah I will raise YOU speaking of the Jewes up in the TIME to come in the RESURRECTION of the dead and I will GATHER you will ALL ISRAEL § 6 You see both doe harmonise to the same tune the effect of their words the same which is not yet fulfilled in as much as to this day the generality of the Jewes have not owned any MESSIA to be come in the flesh but refused The MESSIA Joh. 1.11 according as it was fore-prophesied Esa 53.3 He is despised and rejected of men And the remnant of beleeving Jewes never since as yet saw that particular RESURRECTION of the dead or that their gathering together out of the midst of their CAPTIVITY or that generall GOOD in the EARTH And therefor according to the Scriptures of which by and by these things are yet to come afore the last and generall Resurrection § 7 Of Hebrew Antiquities SINCE the Incarnation of Christ namely their Two TALMUDS their SEDAR OLAM is of the same age near upon with the Babylonish something of which TALMUDS was extant neare the Apostles time if not ancienter and of other Rabbins we shall give you an account in divers particulars In Gemara Sanhedrin R. Ketina hath said in the last of the Thousands of yeares of the worlds continuance the world shall be destroyed of which it is said Esa 2.11.17 THE LORD ONELY SHALL BE EXALTED IN THAT DAY And TRADITION agrees with R. Ketina even as every seventh yeare of seven yeares is a years of release so of the seven thousand yeares of the world the seventh thousand yeares shall bee the thousand of Release as it is said AND THE LORD ALONE SHAL BE EXALTED IN THAT DAY Likewise That Psalme namely the 92. is said to bee a PSALME OR SONG FOR THE SABBATH DAY THAT IS THE DAY THAT IS NOTHING ELSE BUT REST. As also it is said viz. Psal 90. A THOUSAND YEERS IN THY SIGHT ARE BUT AS YESTERDAY By which it is plaine to acute observers that the ancient Rabbinicall Jews did clearly understand the Prophesie of Isaiah in Chap. 2. of the EXALTATION of the LORD twice there repeated as meant of the GREAT DAY which some Rabbins call the Day of JUDGEMENT others the Day of MESSIA others the Day of the RENOVATION of the WORLD and of the REIGNING of CHRIST which is elegantly and emphatically there limbed in its colours to the life as it will more shine forth when we come to an accurate discusse of that Chapter In Midâ—asch Tehillim upon the 90. Psal v. 15. Wee thus read MAKE US GLAD ACCORDING TO THE DAYES WHEREIN THOU HAST AFFLICTED VS That is by the Babylonians the Grecians and the Romans AND THAT IN THE DAYES OF THE MESSIAH And how many are the dayes of the MESSIAH R. JEHOSUAS said that they are Two THOUSAND yeares and it is said ACCORDING TO THE DAYES WHEREIN THOU HAST HUMBLED US that is according to two dayes for one day of the holy and blessed God are a thousand yeares according to that BECAUSE A THOUSAND YEERS IN THY SIGHT ARE BUT AS YESTERDAY The Rabbins also have said That according to the TIME to come the DAY of the MESSIAH shall bee one For God which is holy and blessed in the FUTURE that is AGE shall make one day to himselfe of which wee read Zech. 14. And there shall bee ONE DAY which shall bee knowne to the Lord not day nor night and it shall bee at the EVENING-TIME Light This Day is the AGE or WORLD TO COME and the QUICKNING OF THE DEAD § 9 In their Booke called Berachoth wee finde this Benzuma saith It shall come to passe that Israel shall not remember their departure out of the Land of Aegypt IN THE WORLD TO COME and IN THE DAYES OF THE MESSIAH marke diligently how by World to come they understand a time on earth as Paul hath it twice viz Heb 1.6 Heb. 2.5 THE INHABITED WORLD TO COME So the Greeke so the sense For no man could imagine that heaven above should bee put in subjection to the Angels so as to need the Apostles Apology there to prevent such an imagination And how say the Rabbins in that Berachoth doth this appeare By that which is written in Jâ—rem 23. BEHOLD THE DAYES COME THAT THEY SHALL SAY NO MORE THE LORD LIVETH WHICH BROVGHT THE CHILDREN OF ISRAEL VP OVT OF THE LAND OF EGYPT Which wise men interpret thus not as if the name of Egypt should be blotted out but because the WONDERS which shall bee effected in the DAYES OF THE KINGDOME OF MESSIA shall principally be remembred and their departure out of Egypt lesse § 10 Note by the way that it is not agreed among the Rabbins in what THOVSAND yeares of the world the said DAY of JUDGEMENT or of MESSIAH or RENOVATION of the WORLD shall bee Some say further off in the seventh others nearer in the sixt but others about the fifth § 11 But to goe on The TRADITION of the house of Elijah is Those Just ones whom God shall raise
up shall not return unto dust But if you inquire what shall be to the Just in that thousand yeares in which the holy and blessed God shall RENEW his World of which it is said AND THE LORD ALONE SHALL BE EXALTED IN THAT DAY Wee must know that the Lord will give them as it were the wings of Eagles that they may stye upon the faces of waters Jesch 40.31 THEY THAT HOPINGLY WAIT UPON THE LORD SHALL HAVE THEIR STRENGTH renewed THEY SHALL BE CARRIED UPON WINGS AS EAGLES § 12 R. Saadias brings up the REARE gallantly thus on Dan. 7.18 The Saints of the most High God shall receive a Kingdome Because the children of Israel have rebelled against the Lord their Kingdome shall bee taken from them and shall bee given to the foure Monarchies which shall possesse the Kingdome in this world and shall lead Israel captive and subdue them to themselves Even TILL THE WORLD TO COME untill MESSIAH shall REIGNE § 13 Wee shall for a close of this Section awaken the Reader to have both eyes open upon this That this reigning of the MESSIAH or CHRIST so often mentioned by the aforesaid Rabbins cannot bee in the highest heavens after the ultimate day of judgement for then hee layes downe all and delivers up the Kingdome to God the Father c. 1 Cor. 15.24.28 Nor have these Rabbinicall predictions beene ever fulfilled on earth as experience can witnesse And therefore necessarily they must be in effect of the same judgement as is contained in our Position or Thesis which for that cause cannot be adjudged novel or singular 1. SECTIO De Hebraeotum Antiquitatibus § 1 HArum prima est Targumenica Targum seu Chaldaeus contextus celeberrima inter Judaeos Paraphrasis hinc desumpsit originem quò da Captivitate exolevisset lingua Hebraica neque eam ampliùs intelligerent Extat ab Onkelo in quinque libros Mosis a R. Jonathan in Josue Judicum quatuor Regum omniumque Prophetarum excepto Daniele Et a Josepho Caeco in Caeteros veteris Testamenti libros Plura complectitur quae Synagogae Judaicae faveant passim tamen eam jugulat dum luculentissimè de Méssiâ testatur Guid Mich. le Ja in praefatione seu instituti operis ratione Ad Bib. Reg. Lutetiae edita Multa sunt apud Targum Collatis praesertim exemplaribus ad nostram Thesin pertinentia Targum seu Chaldaea Paraphrasis manuscripta in Ester Cap. 1. ad hunc modum methodum cùm temporis tùm loci computat Monarchias Prima Dei fuit Illa purum putum Hebraismum prositebatur Nimrodus alteram tenebat Monarchiam Pharaonis Monarchia facit tertiam Huic Salomonis Monarchiasuccessit Eam Salomonis quinta subsecuta est nempe Nebuchadnezzaris Magni Huic Babylonici Tyranni Monarchiae sexta successit nempe Persarum Medorum imperium Alexandri Magni imperium facit septimam Alexandri Magni suorumque Satraparum imperium Julii Caesaris octava tandem excepit Monarchia Invadit hanc Julii Caesaris Monarchiam illud Messiae regnum quod nonum est imperium Haec Jacob Colerus S.T.D. in Eliae Hutteri in Biblia Ebraea praefatione Ita in terris hanc ut Caeteras post Romanam Messiae locat Monarchiam § 2 Targ. Babyl seu ordin Chald. Paraph. in Gen. 49. v. 10. Donec veniat Messias cujus est regnum ei obedient populi POPULI dignum observatu in plurali 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 § 3 Quod Targum Hier osolimitanum ad literam magis latiùs seu universaliùs exprimit REX CHRISTUS venturus est cujus est REGNUM OMNES Reges se illi subjicient Ita ut quoscunque regum principumve illi non subjecturos interfecerit ad rubo rem fluminum ex sanguine interfectorum albedinem montium ex pinguedine potentum § 4 Paraphrastes demum Jonathan in Chaldaicâ sua paraphrasi in Hos 14.8 haec habet verba 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i.e. Congregabuntur Israelitae de medio suae Captivitatis in umbrâ CHRISTI SUI habitabunt VIVENTQUE MORTUI BONUM ACCRESCET in TERRA Nec non erit memoriale bonitatis eorum fructificans indeficiens juxta ac memoria Clangoris tubarum super vino veteri quod libari solet in domo sanctuarii Quae res nunquam interris adhus impletae fuerunt Multò plus Targum habet quod ut inutilis vitetur repetitio in ventilationem Scripturarum Thesin probantium comperendinamus § 5 Huic Jonathani Concinit R. Eliezer qui paulò post Templum secundum floruit In Capitulis Magni illius Eliezer Cap. 34. haec comperimus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i.e. Vivo ego dicit dominus quòd suscitabo vos in tempore futuro in Resurrectione mortuorum et congregabo vos cum universo Israel IN TERRAM ISRAEL § 6 Haec verò quae protulerunt Jonathan Eliezer ad hodiernum usque diem ut Judaeis universè UMBRAM imo personam CHRISTI sui rejicientibus Johan c. 1. v. 11. Jesch c. 53. v. 3. minimè impleta fuerint ita pars illa quorundam credentium nunquam vel revixerunt aut de praesenti eorum Captivitate sesquimillenariâ reduces BONUM ILLUD IN TERRA vel Caecutierunt § 7 Ex Antiquitatibus Hebraeorum TALMUDICIS Judaicis nimirum Babylonicis a Ducentesimo Nonagesimo post natum CHRISTUM ad annum saltem 120m. ascendentibus reliquisque Rabbinorum post-natis abundè si placet excipiatis De Talmudicarum aevo Consulite Bucholcerum Indic Chron. ad annum Mundi 4161. Christi 191. Helvicum Theatr. Histor seu Chron. ad annum quod mirum est Christi 500. Joh. Buxtorf in recensione operis Talmudici ejus libro de Abbreviaturis Heb. vulgo annexo M. Lightfoot in Miscellan Cap. 7. De Christo confutante saltem Traditionem Talmudicam Matth. 5. Christum ipsum Judaeos inscitiae arguentem ex suâ ipsorum scriptâ lege câ scilicet ut probabile videtur Talmudicâ in quâ veteris Testamenti authentiam agnoverunt Eâ autem ratione a CHRISTO dictum est Joh. 10.34 Nonne scriptum est in lege VESTRA 1. In Gemara Sanhedrin PEREK CHELEK ita legimus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. Id est Dixit R. Ketina in UNO nempe ut intelligit ULTIMO mundi MILLENARIO vastabitur mundus de quo dicitur EXALTABITUR DOMINUS SOLUS DIE ILLO Jesch cap. 2. v. 11.17 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i. e. Convenit Traditio R. Ketinae sicut è septimis annis septimus quisque est remissionis annus ita MILLENARIUS HIC remissionis erit MILLENARIUS quemadmodum dicitur EXALTABITUR DOMINUS SOLUS DIE ILLO PSALMUS scilicet 92. dicitur CANTICUM DE DIE SABBATI Id est de die qui totus est quies dicitur Psalmo nempe 90. MILLE ANNI IN OCULIS TUIS VELUT DIES HESTERNUS En lectores perspicacissimi veteres Judaei Prophetiam Jesch
to our purpose Moreover a certaine man AMONG US whose name is JOHN BEING ONE OF THE twelve APOSTLES OF CHRIST in that REVELATION which was shewed to him prophesied that those that beleeve in OVR CHRIST shall accomplish a thousand years mark those that beleeve in Christ shall accomplish a thousand years at Hierusalem and after that the GENERAL and in a word the everlasting resurrection and last judgement of all joyntly together Even that whereof also our Lord spake wherein they shall neither marry nor be given in marriage but shall bee equall with the Angels being made the sonnes of the resurrection of God For the gifts of Prophesie are extant with us even till this time And as hee speakes thus home to our Thesis positively so hee speakes as high against them that are contrary minded negatively denying them to bee true Christians His words are these But contrary-wise I have signified unto thee TRYPHO that MANY WHO ARE NOT ORTHODOX and PIOUS CHRISTIANS DENY THIS § 2 The next of the Greeke Ancients is IRENAEUS who flourished about the yeare 178. after Christ Hee was the chiefe Minister of the Church at LYONS Hee saith hee was the hearer of POLYCARP which POLYCARP was the Disciple of JOHN And IRENAEUS had that Agnomination or post-name for his godly peace making in the Churches He wrote five Bookes against the Heresies of his time which wee have In the second whereof hee testifies That to his time the gifts of casting out Devils and miraculous healing of diseases continued which shewes that hee lived neare the Apostles times which Irenaeus himself intimates in his fifth Booke against Heresies neare the end That JOHN saw his vision of the Revelation almost in his time TERTULLIAN cals him THE MOST CURIOUS TRIER or SEARCHER OUT OF ALL DOCTRINES Of this IRENAEUS the GREAT in Learning and Godlinesse Learned ERASMUS affirmeth in his Argument or Summary of the fifth Booke of Irenaeus against Heresies that HIEROM asserteth him to bee of the same minde with the CHILIASTES that are for the THOUSAND YEERS The truth is whosoever shall read that fifth Booke of Irenaeus against Heres with a piercing eye shall finde that Hierom hath given a right judgement concerning him For Irenaeus there mainly disputing for the Resurrection of the bodies of the Saints urgeth the Prophets for that Resurrection who all speake mainly of the first Resurrection of the bodies of the Saints at the full call of the Jewes And particularly p. 575. Irenaeus urgeth that of Ezekiel Chap. 37. v. 1. to v. 15. for it as before Justin Martyr urged Ezekiel for the one thousand yeares which place is evidently for our position as wee shall see after when wee come to the proofe thereof by Scripture Li. 5. Page 576. Againe he urgeth as Justin Martyr did that in Esa 65.22 For as the dayes of the tree he puts in OF LIFE shall bee the dayes of them which is as plainly as if written with Sunne beames a part of the Prophesie of the Restauration of Israel and the New Jerusalem alleadged by Peter 2 Ep. 3. Cha. and alluded to by John Rev. 21.1 In another to place of the same fifth Booke Pag. 547. Irenaeus speakes much of the Saints after their first life here that they shall inhabit Paradise where Adam was placed at his first Creation And elsewhere speaking of the Saints possessing the Kingdome of heaven alleadgeth that place Matth. 5.5 Blessed are the meek for they shall inherit the EARTH which is taken out of Psal 37.10 11. yet a little while and the wicked shall not bee Yea thou shalt diligently consider his place and it shall not bee But the meeke shall inherit the EARTH and shall delight themselves in the ABUNDANCE OF PEACE And verse 28 29. The seed of the wicked shall bee cut off The righteous shall inherit the LAND and dwell therein for EVER Lib. 1. p. 559. One instance more for it would be tedious to you and mee to alleadge all Flesh and blood cannot inherit the Kingdome of God as if one should say saith IRENAEUS The wilde olive tree is not taken into the PARADISE of God § 3 The last of the Greeke Antiquities that we shall alleadge is out of Epiphanius who flourished about the yeer after Christ 365. whose words after mention of Athanasius and Paulinus are to this effect Moreover saith Epiphanius others have affirmed that the OLD MAN should say THAT IN THE FIRST RESURRECTION we shall accomplish a certaine MILLENARY of yeers injoying the same things as now wee doe namely keeping the Law c. By which it appeares that if not Athanasius or Paulinus aforementioned some there were in or afore Epiphanius his time that held the substance of our Thesis Yea it seems to mee that Epiphanius himselfe speakes something favourable of them that held this opinion by his words presently following viz. And that indeed it is written of this sort of MILLENARIES in the Apocalypse of John and that the Booke is received of very many even of them that are godly is manifest with more to the same effect SECT 2. De Graecorum Antiquitatibus § 1 GRaecorum qui nostrae accinunt Thesi primus est JUSTINUS MARTYR in Dialogo cum Tryphone Judaeo Eyw 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i. e. Ego autem si qui sunt per omnia orthodoxae sententiae Christiani carnis resurrectionem futuram novimus MILLE ANNOS in Jerusalem instauratâ exornaâ—â dilatatâ sicut Prophetae Ezechiel Esaias alii promulgant sic namque Esaias de MILLE istorum annorum tempore loquutus est ERIT ENIM CAELUM NOVUM ET TERRA NOVA ET NON RECORDABUNTUR PRIORUM NEQUE EORUM ILLA VENIENT IN CORDA SED LAETITIAM ET EXULTATIONEM INVENIENT IN HIS QUAE EGO CREO QUIA ECCE FACIO JERUSALEM EXULTATIONEM ET POPULUM MEUM LAETITIAM paulo post NAM SECUNDUM DIES LIGNIVITAEDIES POPULI MEI In his verbis inquit MILLE ANNOS arcanè designari intelligimus Ut enim Adae dictum est quo die de ligno comedisset eo die moriturum etiam esse scimus cum mille annos non implevisse Novimus quoque dictum illud quòd DIES DOMINI SIT SICUT MILLE ANNI huc pertinere Et vir apud nos quidam cui Nomen JOHANNES è duodecim Apostolis Christi unus in câ quae illi exhibita est Revelatione Prophetavit Christo credentes nostro Gr. Paris edit 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Annos mille Hierosolymis peracturos esse ac postea universalem ut semel dicam sempiternam omnium unanimiter simul resurrectionem Judicium futurum id quod Dominus noster dixit quod NUPTUM NEQUE DATURI NEQUE ACCEPTURI SED ANGELIS AEQUALES FUTVRI SINT utpote filii Dei resurrectionis Apud nos enim huc usque etiam Prophetica extant dona 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i. e. E contrà verò eorum qui
great a Testimony as this of JUSTIN MARTYR may be brought concerning any opinion among Christians if you except the maine Articles of our faith And the generall consent of all the ORTHODOX and in the Age next the Apostles is no small argument or prejudice against the contrary opinion or succeeding Ages It seemed the HERETICKS of those times ESPECIALLY or indeed ONELY believed it not and that for some private respect because admitting thereof they must needs also confesse a RESURRECTION OF THE FLESH and that the same God that is mentioned in the LAW and PROPHETS is also the FATHER OF OUR LORD JESUS CHRIST I am sure CERINTHUS that ARCH-HERETICK in those dayes whom after ages doe make the first broacher of this opinion is never taxed for it by them who have diligently noted his HERESIES And perhaps if hee had any sensuall conceit hereal out as it seems hee had hee was beholding to JUDAISME for it and he himself being a JEW it was not taken notice of in him But for a HRISTIAN to have such doting imaginations it would render him more wild-headed Yet no man ought to hee blamed for maintaining a TRUTH in a JEWS company either in THIS MATTER or any else if with heed bee passe by those grosse phantasies which doe blemish the truth More deservedly may wee finde fault with DIONYSIUS and his followers the great impugners of this opinion who when about the end of the third AGE the dispute about it grew very hot to lessen the Authority of the REVELATION by the evident and undeniable proofes whereof the matter in question was asserted a foule impiety they fathered it upon I know not whom yet one of the same name against the manifest witnesse of JUSTIN IRENAEVS and all the FATHERS afore them who inscribe it to JOHN THE BELOVED DISCIPLE OF CHRIST and EVANGELIST Neither can HIEROME himselfe be excused though a very learned man otherwise but easie to bee deceived who with the same DIONYSIVS doth upon an uncertaine report falsely affixe to the opinion of them who according to truth believed the THOVSAND YEERS happinesse on Earth the INJVRY OF CIRCVMCISION THE BLOOD OF SACRIFICES c. which old peeces of JUDAISME or perhaps the dreames of some HERETICKES being gathered out of a study of contention and ill will were patcht to this opinion of the PRIMITIVE CHURCH But IF hee CERTAINLY knew that the FIRST CHRISTIANS and holy MARTYRS did expect Circumcision and Sacrifices in the Kingdome of Christ how is he to be blamed that condemned them not for it but left every man to the freedome of his owne judgement either to approve or dislike thereof as Hierom expresseth himselfe openly § d. But what countenance soever this opinion hath or shall finde in this age let me tell the Reader this one thing that seeing there are so manifest prooâ—es of a GLORIOUS KINGDOME OF THE SAINTS ON EARTH out of the Old Testament there will be not better or readier way to deale with the Jewes in matter of their conversion then not to wrest the plaâ—ne Prophesies of a SECOND GLORIOUS APPEARANCE OF CHRIST to his FIRST COMING but rather to perswade them that they must expect no other MESSIAS who should fulfill all these promises expecting what is to be expected besides that JESUS OF NAZARETH whom their Ancestors crucified And this way is every where almost insisted upon throughout the whole REVELATION For whiles wee force those most cleare Prophesies concerning things promised in the SECOND COMING to his FIRST COMING the JEWES scorne and deride us and are more and more confirmed in their infidelity But for the course which I have here set downe I am much mistaken if it be not the same which was observed among them by PETER himselfe Act. 3 19 20 21. REPENT YEE THEREFORE and BE CONVERTED THAT YOUR SINNES MAY BEE BLOTTED OUT WHEN THE TIME OF REFRESHING SHALL COME FROM THE PRESENCE OF THE LORD AND HE SHALL SEND JESUS CHRIST WHICH BEFORE WAS PREACHED TO YOU WHOM THE HEAVENS MUST RECEIVE UNTILL THE TIMES OF RESTITUTION OF ALL THINGS WHICH GOD HATH SPOKEN BY THE MOUTH OF ALL HIS HOLY PROPHETS SINCE THE WORLD BEGAN § e. But I forget my selfe For indeed I thinke it more fit to publish what might bee piously believed concerning this TENENT rather in another mans sense and expressions then in mine owne being more willing to learne then obtrude mine own weaknesses To this end I have also collected Hee meanes in his Notes on his translation of ALSTED put in the Margin as I suppose What some of the most eminent DIVINES of the Church of ENGLAND Dr. HAKEWELL Dr. TWISSE Mr. MEDE c. that thou mightest not thinke it onely an Out-landish toy or phantasie of yesterday much lesse a savouring of POPERY have thought and published concerning this opinion Besides the irrefragable judgement of divine TYCHO BRAHE and with him the determination of CAROLUS GALLUS omitted by ALSTED and not long since one of the STATES PROFESSORS OF DIVINITY in the University of LEYDEN § 4. DIATRIBE de MILLE ANNIS APOCALYPTICIS non illis CHILIASTARUM PHANTASTARUM sed BB Danielis Johannis per JOHANNEM HENRICUM ALSTEDIUM Francofurti 1627. § a. Hunc Tractatum fidelissimè W. BURTON cum doct is suis Annotationibus in margine juxià positis in nostram linguam vernaculam transtulit § b. Is in priori suâ Epistolâ translationi praefixâ cùm AUTHORI tum OPERI tùm etiam SUBJECTO hoc encomiasticum per hibet testimonium AUTHOR eruditione aequalis censetur aestimationis cuilibet Scriptorum recentium transmarinorum mult is abbinc annis transactis OPUS est exegesis vigesimi Capitis Apocalypsis SUBJECIUM ejus est splendentis regni in terrâ Christi assertio res maximi proculdubio solaminis Ecclesiae Dei consolationis Non me latet Apocalypticos plerumque discursus multis obtrectationibus esse expositos ipsamque hanc Prophetiam etiamnum librum fuisse obsignatum Quum verò ego ipse multum ex hâc illius exegese satisfactionis recepissem statui apud me item Dei populum ex eâdem aliquid fructus posse emetere Quod sanè praecipuum fuit in causâ me illam omnium publicam fecisse In EPISTOLA ejus secundâ eidem praepositâ in hunc modum opinionis nostrae HISTORICE rationem reddit Quam brevibus sic accipite Liceat mihi bone lector tibi narrare perpetuam fuisse opinionem seculi Apostolis proximi RESURRECTIONEM fore ante ILLAM Die ultimo generalem beatamque fidelium conditionem in TERRA MILLE ANNOS Hoc nos edocebunt Tertullianus contra Marcion Irenaeus contra Haeres nec non Justinus Martyr in Dialog cum Tryph. Jud. ut prolixius è Justino nos anteà citavimus Quibus Justini verbis hanc suam addit sententiam Nescio inquit an tantum ut hoc JUSTINI testimonium pro aliquâ Christianorum opinione exceptis fundamentalibus fidei articulis afferri possit Generalis autem ORTHODOXORUM consensus
primum quem legi appellat REDEMPTIONEM ISRAELIS seu PROPHETICAM HISTORIAM DE SALVATORIS NOSTRI REGNO IN TERRIS c. Secundum a me nondum perlectum nominat REDEMPTIONEM ISRAELIS REDEMPTAM sive JUDAEORUM GENERALEM MIRACULOSAM CONVERSIONEM AD FIDEM EVANGELII Eorundemque in suam patriam reditum nostrique salvatoris imperium in terris personaliter ministratum c. In quibus multos recenset authores ut pote Alstedium in Chronolog cap. 32. cap. 35. Fran. Johannem de comb is in compendio totius Theologiae lib. 7. cap. 13 14. It. lib. 7. cap. 7. Foxum in Martyrolog Anglic. * Wendelinum Contemplat Natural cap. 9. sect 2. cap. 21. * sect 2. Johan Acostam De Temporalib Noviss lib. 3. cap. 11. Down in 17. Johan Cum multis aliis c. quorum verba hic describere nec mihi otium est nec animus ne lector taedio affligeretur §. 11. Mr. Archer also an Englishman hath waded farther into the point then wee have in some particulars which are not so cleer to us having written as we are informed two Treatises of it The first is expresse under his name entituled THE PERSONALL REIGNE OF CHRIST UPON EARTH The other is called ZIONS JOY IN HER KING COMING IN HIS GLORY But doubtfull whether his being subscribed with this darke name BY FINIENS CANUS VOVE Nostras etiam Archerius altiùs paulò in nonnullis nobis minus innotescentibus urinatus librum scripsit cujus titulus est REGIMEN CHRISTI PERSONALE IN TERRIS Nec non ut aiunt alium cujus inscriptio est GAUDIUM ZIONIS IN REGE SUO CUM GLORIA VENIENTE §. 12. Learned Mr. Meade our Country-man his Clavis Apocalyptica Commentarius both in Latine and English is famously known to most that read books § a. Learned Doctor Twisse his PREFACE doth shew the METHOD and excellency of Mr. MEDES interpretation of the Revelation It will not bee amisse to give an account of that Preface in the summe of it that by occasion hereof other Nations that understand not English may have it in Latine wherein at once is seen much of Mr. Mede and of the judgement of Dr. Twisse in our Position Many Interpreters saith Dr. Twisse alluding to Prov. 31.29 have done excellently but Mr. Mede surmounteth them all A Daearse set upon a Giants shoulders may see further and a Wren carried up upon an Eagle till this great bird bee wearied may with her little wings spin up a little higher But Mr. Mede hath many notions of so rare a nature that I doe not finde hee is beholding to any other for them but onely to his owne studiousnesse under Gods blessing § b. Observe Gods direction of him in the course that hee hath taken As first in his Clavis Apolyptica wherein he hath drawne together the homogeneal parts of it dispersed here and there yet belonging to the same time 2. The Author gave himselfe to write Specimina Essayes wherein he goes over every part of this book excepting the three first Chapters taking a generall view of each as he goes 3. He proceeds to a more full Commentary from the fourth Chapter to the fourteenth That which follows thence to the end containes onely his former Specimina § c. Whereas in performances of this nature two things are necessary 1. A righ discerning of the meaning of the words and phrase and tropes and figures 2. A right accomodation of things to times For the first Mr. Mede excels viz. in observing the Genius of all those As in opening the Mystery of the battel in heaven Rev. 12. and the casting downe of Satan unto the earth hee shews that States and Kingdomes in the Political world much answer to the condition of the Natural and so represented in Scripture For as the Natural consists of Heaven and Earth so the Political of Nobility and Laity And as in the Heavens there are Sunne Moon and Stars of lesser and greater magnitude So in Kingdomes King Queene and Nobles of severall degrees And as in the Earth there is great variety of Trees Herbs Flowers c. So in the people of any Commonwealth is found great variety of differences And by this way Mr. Mede doth not onely wittily please as others have done but solidly convince his Reader of the true sense even to admiration For the second viz. Accommodation of the Prophesies to their proper times a point of great skill in history I have found that Mr. Medes friends acquainted with his studies would give him the Bell for this as herein out-stripping others § d. 3. I have observed some notable distinctions in this Commentary of Mr. Mede giving great light As first That betweene the Sealed Book with seven seales which hee calls the greater the contents being very large viz. Comprising the History from the beginning of the preaching of the Gospel to the end of the world Which hee saith containes Fata imperii i. e. the destinies of the Empire and the little book mentioned Chap. 10. which he saith contains Fata Ecclesiae the destinies of the Church The first containes the seven Seales and Trumpets for the seventh seale produceth the seven Trumpets The six first Seales containe the story of the Empires continuance unto the dayes of Constantine included in whose dayes there being a strange Metamorphosis of the Empire from Heathen to Christian it is represented as it were the ending of the world and beginning of a new which Mr. Mede delivers very judiciously Then the seven Trumpets which are the contents of the seventh Seale represent the judgements of God upon the world for standing out against the Gospel and shedding the blood of the Saints First by the Heathen Emperours for which cause ruine was gradually brought upon the Empire till it was torne into ten Kingdomes The graduall was fourefold which make up the contents of the foure first Trumpets 2. By the Antichristian world the degenerated states of Christendome For which the three Woe Trumpets following containe the three degrees of divine vengeance on them 1. By the Saracens in the first Woe Trumpet 2. By the Turkes in the second Chap. 9. 3. By the end of the World Rev. 11.15 § e. Second distinction of great light and use for the clearing of the STATE OF CHRISTS GLORIOUS KINGDOME HERE ON EARTH is that Mr. Mede gives upon Revel 21.24 Between the NATIONS THAT ARE SAVED c. and the NEW HIERUSALEM where clearly hee makes it appeare that NEW HIERUSALEM is one thing and THE NATIONS THAT ARE SAVED are another The Nations that are saved are those that escape the fire are saved from the fire at Christs coming wherewith the Earth and all the works thereof shall bee burnt in the day of Christs coming 2 Pet. 3. 2 Thess 1. And the NEW HIERUSALEM saith Mr. Mede is CHRIST and his RAISED SAINTS who are called 1 Thes 4. The SAINTS WHOM CHRIST SHALL BRING WITH HIM who shall shine with a glorious light In
Clouds cannot I say be referted to the ultimate day of judgement because Christ saith This generation shall not passe the Greek is passe away it being the same word as is rendred passe away as referred to the passing away of the Heavens and the Not passing away of his word But the maine stick is in the words THIS GENERATION and ALL FULFILLED That is the Nation of the Jewes as a people most distinguishable from all Nations shall not be extinguished in Notion and Nation till ALL THOSE things afore spoken by Christ be fulfilled But if Christ should not appeare to them personally before the ultimate day of judgement for they must as the Prophet intimates Isa 66.8 be converted suddainly at once in a miraculous manner ordinary meanes having not prevailed with them these sixteen hundred yeers in the general and then so by conversion congregate them together againe according to the tenour of all the Prophets of which after in all likelyhood as man may conceive the whole Nation of them will bee extinguished They will lose the memory of their Genealogy as those at their returne from Babylon in lesse while Ezra 2.62 their language will be lost their blood and persons swallowed up by mixture with other Nations and so appeare in the common crowd at the last judgement no more distinguished then other Peoples and Nations § 4 Some would faine referre this 34. verse This generation shall not passe till all these things bee fulfilled to the time of the destruction of the Temple of Hierusalem of which Christ gave a touch v. 2. of this 24. of Matth. fulfilled about forty yeers after Christs Passion But though that of vers 2. might in part be then fulfilled yet little reason is there from thence to inferre that therefore then ALL things spoken by Christ from vers 3. to verse 34. were fulfilled Christ in vers 3. is put upon speaking to three distinct things viz. 1. Of the Time when THOSE THINGS viz. the destruction of the Temple and City of Hierusalem shall be 2. Of the sign of his COMING marke it AND 3. Of the END of the world of which largely after in its proper place so that the ALL Christ speakes of from vers 3. to 34. cannot bee imagined to bee fulfilled in the SOME things that were fulfilled at the destruction of the Temple Christ here assures us that at the fulfilling of all those things aforesaid hee himselfe will appeare in the Clouds v. 30. But at the destruction of the Temple Christ did not visibly appeare in the Clouds Nor did he then send his Angels with a great sound of a Trumpet to gather his Elect from the foure winds as hee promiseth vers 31. But at his appearing at the sound of the seventh Trumpet at the beginning of the thousand yeers of which we treat hee will so doe which is a thousand yeers before the last day of judgement of which abundantly afterwards Therefore these words This generation shall not passe or passe away c. must signifie that whereas many other Nations have passed away and been extinguished as those seven in Canaan and many others since leaving behinde neither name not thing to keep up their remembrance this Nation of the Jewes shall not bee so extinguished or annihilated but shall continue a distinct Nation at least in note and name till all these things be fulfilled aforementioned from vers 3. to vers 34. § 6 For the word here rendred Generation is not so proper to signifie an Age of people to which they usually allow an hundred yeer as that word used for it Matth. 1.1 Our word here in Matth. 24.34 more properly by use and derivation signifies a Nation And further it is not said THIS as pointing to a present Generation but THE Generation indefinitely pointing at the persons and times of many Generations All which doe much speake for this sense That the NATION of the Jewes shall not passe away or cease to be a noted distinct people till all be fulfilled As Christ saith after My word shall not passe away that is change as the Heavens and the earth shall passe away that is bee changed when that great Reformation shall come So the NATION of the Jewes shall not passe away to be changed into another people or mixedly drowned as an ingredient among many others to extinguish their name and Genealogies But as to this day so from hence forward till that GREAT TIME their name kindred and habitations shall bee distinctly knowne at least of all them that are of their own blood So that still as at this day they shall live be extant expect and professe they expect Christs coming and the sight of all these things to be fulfilled before their eyes not a peece but all § 7 Which cannot be deferred to the utmost last generall judgement because of this reason also that a little afore this mention of all things to bee fulfilled to the Nation of the Jewes before they passe away Christ saith in vers 32. and 33. That as by the Fig-trees tender branch putting forth leaves wee may know that Summer is nigh so when wee see all these things fulfilled wee may discerne that the Summer of the great Restauration of the Elect vers 31. and of all things for their use like the world in Summer is at hand For when Christ comes in the Cloudes vers 30. at the time here meant it is Summer that is all things are in their prime and perfection not Winter when is the decay and dissolution of all things I meane Christs last coming at the ultimate judgement is as a Winter that destroyes all but his SECOND coming now againe afore that day of Doome is a Summer A fit similitude to expresse the Restitution of all things That Winter ends all But by this signe of Christs coming in the Cloudes the SUMMER is discerned and discerned to bee NEER § 8 And further that in verse 46 47. well intimates that the time Christ here speakes of is not the utmost last judgement but of a glorious time afore on earth viz. Blessed is that servant whom his Lord when hee COMETH shall finde so doing that is well-doing 〈◊〉 in in verse 45. Verily I say unto you hee shall make him Ruler over all his goods Greeke is shall set him over all that hee hath Which phrases one or other suit farre better to the Saints reigne on Earth then to any thing of their condition at the last judgement For then Christ layes downe all his owne rule and power 1 Cor. 15.24.28 and therefore gives no power of rule to his people § 9 Upon these words This generation shall not passe let mee tell you that thus far that Pareus and others are of our minde That though Others understand by Generation the whole World yet it better pleaseth them to understand the JEWISH NATION as upon whom these things shall bee fulfilled Matth. 23.2 Therefore the NATION shall not passe but continue scattered
which the Apostle Heb. 2. v. 5 6 7. c. expounds of Christ and of the inhabited world to come as the Greek is vers 5. and saith that when Christ was ascended yet then all things were not put under his feet For all must be so all saith the Apostle there v. 8. that nothing must be excepted except as 1 Cor. 15. God himselfe But of this of Heb. 2. abundantly after § 2 Secondly we answer That it is the Kingdome of God his Father because Christ reignes over it as in unspeakable union with the God-head That though he be but one person yet he hath two natures So that the sense is the Kingdome of my Father that is the Kingdom of God as it is in the Syriac 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is it iâ— the Kingdome of a God-Christ or a God-man Christ For Father is ascribed in Scripture to the God-head usually in relation to Christ incarnate So that because the two natures are joyned as Collegues in one person over this Empire therefore it is called the Kingdome of CHRIST and of GOD. And such a phrase and upon such an occasion as cleerly relates to the Kingdome whereof we speak doth the Apostle use Eph. 5.5 The words are these This know that no whoremonger nor unclean person nor covetous man c. hath any INHERITANCE in the Kingdome of CHRIST and of GOD. The Heathens never imagined that vicious persons should enter into their heavenly Elysian-fields or the blissfull immortality of soules And Inheritance more suits to Earth then Heaven And lastly after the ultimate day of judgement Christ hath no Kingdome 1 Cor. 15.28 Therefore this place of Ephes 5.5 relates to the Great Restitution as plainlier appears by paralelling another place which fully answers to that of Ephes 5.5 viz. Rev. 22.11.15 The words are these He that is filthy let him be filthy still WITHOUT are 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. the dogs the whoremongers c. when is this viz. in the time when the Throne of GOD and of the LAMB shall be and appeare glorious in the Holy City the New Jerusalem verf. 1 2 3. twice expressed There is also the like phrase of calling it the Kingdome of God and of Christ in effect Rev. 12.9.10 And the great Dragon was cast out that old Serpent called the Devill and Satan c. And I heard a loud voyce saying in Heaven Now is salvation and strength and the KINGDOME OF OUR GOD and the POWER OF HIS CHRIST So that Christ as MAN joyntly with GOD doth reigne in this Millenary Kingdome And therefore Christ speakes of new Wine New in the Kingdome of his Father before the ultimate â—ay of judgement For after that day Christ hath no KINGDOME nor POWER but layes downe all as wee have oft â—epeated it out of 1 Cor. 15.28 God the Father is then to be all in all And therefore that expression so frequent in Rev. 20. The Saints hall reigne with Christ a thousand yeers cannot be meant of supernall eternall glory after the last judgement because that place but now quoted of 1 Cor. 15.28 affirmes that then Christ himselfe is said NOT TO REIGNE but to lay down all and to be subject unto him that put all things under him that God may be all in all so that then Christ only injoys glory with his Saints not reigne as Christ in glory SECT VI. Of the sixth Scripture for Christs Personall appearance at the great restauration of the Church 2 Tim. 4.1 I charge thee before God and the Lord Jesus Christ who shall judge the quicke and the dead at his appearing and his Kingdome § 1 THe Kingdome of Christ here mentioned cannot be referred to his past Government of the Church for it is expresse in the future tense now so long since his Ascention that he shall judge the quick and dead at his appearance and his Kingdom § 2 Nor can this Kingdome of Christ here spoken of signifie any Kingdome of Christ after the ultimate judgement for then Christ hath no Kingdome as but now and oft before was touched from 1 Cor. 15.28 § 3 But when Christ appeares next to judge the quicke and dead Saints to reward them and to destroy the then living incurable and incorrigible wicked by a particular day of Judgement at the beginning of the thousand yeares which is the Preface to the ultimate Judgement Christ all that while being busied in executing that first Sentence of Judicature Matth. 25. Come ye blessed of my Father inherite a kingdome provided for you according to Revel 11.15 17 18. of which much after compare Revel 19. three last verses I say when Christ shall then appeare hee shall have a Kingdome § 4 The word appearance is the same in the Greeke as that 2 Thes 2.8 so that Christ must appeare to the inhabitants of the earth where this his Kingdome is For the present as it is said Luk. 19.11 12. by Christ himselfe Christ is gone into a farre Country viz. into Heaven to take to him a Kingdom that is in the Metropolis Heaven he is to be crowned King of this his Kingdome he is to have on earth but he is to returne and then to take account of his servants in this his Kingdome and to dignifie the well-doers Christ must be the fifth Monarch Dan. 2.45 Dan. 7.13 14. I say Christ is to be the fifth Monarch The Jewes now have no King but in the last dayes they shall have David that is Christ the Sonne of David to be their King Hos 3. ver 4 5. And Christ in Acts 1. ver 3. having for forty dayes spoken of the things pertaining to the Kingdome of God and thereupon being asked by the Disciples ver 6 of his restoring the Kingdome to Israel he doth not deny the thing but only refuseth then to tell them the Time when it should be done But after he tells us by John in the Revelation as we shall see abundantly after SECT VII Of the seventh Scripture for the Personall appearance of Christ at the great restauration of the Church Acts 3.19 20 21. Repent yee therefore and be converted that your sins may be blotted out when the times of refreshing shall come from the presence of the Lord. And he shall send Jesus Christ which was before preached unto you whom the Heaven must receive untill the times of restitution of all things which God hath spoken by the mouth of all his holy Prophets since the world began § 1 THis place of Scripture is the more considerable in that it is urged by some that looke upon things only with a cursory eye against Christs glorious Kingdome yet to come on earth which if well weighed speakes most strongly for it § 2 For 1. Time and especially times twice mentioned in the Plurall cannot so well relate to a state after the last Judgement when time shal be no more Rev. 10.6 7. And the Angels sware by him that liveth for ever that there should be
he that shall endure to the END the same shall be saved Of the other signes he said they did not signifie that the END was immediately at hand vers 6. These signs shall be saith Christ BUT the END is not YET But now hee comes to speake of the signe of the End of the world viz. that this Gospel of the KINGDOME shall be preached in all the world 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 published as by an Herauld And THIS Gospel of THE KINGDOME as pointing at this particular of the good newes of the Gospel that Christ should after all these darke clouds of the reigne of wickednesse have a Kingdome on earth And then saith Christ shall the END come which must of necessity import one of these ENDS and one of these wayes must be signified by the publishing of the Gospel in all the world That either the Gospel should be published in all the world to Jews and Gentiles as a signe immediately before the End of THIS present world that is before the thousand yeers of the great Restauration Or that the full and effectuall manifestation of the Gospel should be in the time of that Restauration in those thousand yeers which Paul calls Heb. 2.5 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 That inhabited world that is to come of which place much after as a fore-running signe of the ultimate generall end of the whole world Let the Reader take which he pleaseth For either of them concludes for us that after this signe according as we interpret the sequel shall be the beginning or ending of Christs visible appearance to us on earth As it follows vers 29. Then shall appear the signe of the Sonne of man not for a meer short sentence of judgement but to gather his elect from the foure quarters of the earth Of which place much in Sect. 3. of this 2 Book § 4 To gather all into an apparent argument the summe and signes of all is this If Christ in shewing the signes of his coming the second time doth clearly distinguish between his next coming and visible appearing and the end of the world and for that end gives distinct signes of both then Christ must come before the end of the world and visibly appeare But so doth Christ clearly distinguish and distinctly signifie those two as we have shewed Therefore there is yet a time wherein Christ will come and visibly appeare before the end of the world At first we know by the Gospels he came in a state of humility for salvation to sinners that should believe The next time he comes in glory to reigne visibly to the comfort of them that doe beleeve Rev. 20. first six verses Third and last time for terrour to the wicked vers 12. Of that second coming the thing now under consideration Christ having given signes as hath been shewed he concludes in verse 30. They shall see the Sonne of man in the Clouds of heaven with great power and glory which cannot be meant of the finall sentence of the ultimate judgement because of that in the 34 verse bound with an asseveration and attestation before and behinde Verily I say unto you this generation shall not passe till all these things be fulfilled Heaven and earth shall passe away but my words shall not passe away Of which 34. vers much afterward SECT X. Of the tenth Scripture for Christs visible appearance at the great restauration of the Church Luke 19. ver 11. to 28. He added and spake a Parable because he was nigh to Jerusalem and because they thought that the KINGDOME OF GOD should immediately APPEARE A certaine noble-man went into a farre Country to RECEIVE FOR HIMSELFE A KINGDOME and TO RETURNE and he called his ten Servants and delivered to them ten pounds and said unto them occupy till I come But his Citizens hated him and sent a Message after him saying we will not have this man to reigne over us And it came to passe when he was returned HAVING RECEIVED THE KINGDOME then he commanded these servants to be called unto him to whom he gave the mony c. Then came the first saying Lord thy pound hath gained ten pounds And he said unto him well thou good servant because thou hast been faithfull in a little have thou authority over ten Cities and so proportionable to the rest But those mine enemies that would not have me reigne over them bring them hither and slay them before me § 1 THis Parable was spoken a little before Christs suffering as appeares by the order of the Story here and in Mat. 25. It is pend by Luke who wrote the Acts where he carefully reports Christs coming againe just as they saw him ascend in relation to the restoring of the Kingdome of which Christ spake and the Disciples enquired after Act. 1.3 4 5 6 c. to 12. only saith Luke Acts 3.21 The heavens must receive him for a time and then he shall come from heaven and cause the restitution of all things as hath been opened § 2 The Preface to this Parable is a golden key to open the curious Cabinet of the meaning of this Parable that we may not relye upon a meere Allegory Christ spake this Parable because he was night to Jerusalem and because they thought that the Kingdome of God should IMMEDIATELY APPEARE It doth not deny the appearing of the Kingdom Christ is for it only he is against the immediate 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the suddaine appearance of it he must afore that as is the maine sence of the Parable goe away into a farre country viz. to Heaven and leave talents in trust with his servants giving them time to imploy them and to be so long absent that his enemies grow so bold as to send after him with this high affront they would not have him to reigne over them that is according to the direct sence Some seemingly professours by his long absence should grow quite carelesse of improving the talents or gifts of endowments to his honour and others by his delay as they counted it should become professed enemies against him § 3 But whatever these mistakers dreamed the truth was that as the diligent Talenters expected and accordingly acted Christ went away to Heaven not to returne no more but went thither to take to himselfe a Kingdome which phrase viz. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 must signifie a Kingdome peculiar to himselfe as he is Christ else how doth he take it or receive it to himselfe And being installed into it he is to returne He had his Kingdome of grace before he went away as he oft mentioneth it in his Parables and Sermons adding that that his Kingdome was not of this world And he had the Kingdome of glory as his triumph over his Kingdome of grace having finished his conquest on the Crosse So hee needed not to returne to receive either of these Kingdomes It remains therefore that it is the Kingdome we speak of that he returnes to receive He went to Heaven
to the last place afore handled out of the New Testament this vision much enlightening that Parable in ver 26 27. the close expounding that Parable as the Preface ver 11 12. explaines that it concernes the time following upon the ruine of the foure Monarchies § 2 In the eleventh and twelfth verses the foure Beasts that is the foure Monarchies are slaine as it is expounded after verse 17. The foure great Beasts are foure Kings instead of them Daniel sees in a vision ver 13 14. One like the Sonne of Man come WITH THE CLOVDES of Heaven and came to the Ancient of dayes and they brought him neere before him which notably agrees with that place last spoken of Luke 19.11 c. where it is said Christ went into a farre Country to receive to himselfe a Kingdome and returne And that visibly saith this of Daniel with the Clouds or in the Clouds as Rev. 1.7 in way of Preface to this his Kingdome Rev. 11. Rev. 20. And saith Daniel ver 14. There was given to him that was like the Son of Man DOMINION and glory and a KINGDOME that all People Nations and Languages should serve him Just as Luke 19.15 according to the Greek he returned receiving the kingdom When he visibly returned he received a Kingdome here below else why did he returne Adde that here below he exercised visible destruction upon his enemies for it is not said as of the unworthy Talenter he cast them into utter darknesse but he caused them to be slaine afore his face SECT II. Of the second place of Scripture out of the Old Testament for Christs visible appearance at the great restauration of the Church Jer. 25.5.6 Behold the dayes come saith the Lord that I will raise unto David a righteous branch and a King shall reigne and PROSPER and shall execute JUDGEMENT AND JUSTICE in THE EARTH In his dayes Judah shal be saved and ISRAEL SHALL DWELL safely and this is his name whereby hee shal bee called THE LORD OVR RIGHTEOVSNESSE § 1 FIrst it is evident by the last clause that the Lord Christ is the person here meant it being his incommunicable name Act. 4.12 2 Cor 5. last § 2 Nextly It is as apparent by the whole Series of Jeremiahs Prophesie that this relateth to the times after Judahs Captivity in Babilon Israel having been carried away captive long afore § 3 Lastly It is beyond all objection that Christ did yet never so reigne upon earth as this Text holds forth as may be made appeare with few words in these particulars 1. Christ must reigne and prosper That is must be every way glorious and successefull so that Judah and Israel shall owne him for their King and call him the Lord their righteousnesse 2 He shall execute justice and judgement in the earth it is not said he shall preach justice or judgement or execute it in heavenly places but he shall execute it upon or in the earth 3. In his dayes JUDAH shal be saved and ISRAEL shal dwell safely viz. being gathered out of all Countries ver 3. But the Lord Christ did yet never thus reigne Instead of reigning and prospering in the eyes of Israel and Iudah he was as a branch blasted a thing accursed Isa 53. ver 3 4 c. so that the Iewes for the generall dis-owned him proceeding against him as a Malefactor guilty of many of the highest Crimes and for matters of Iustice and Iudgement in the earth he refused to meddle with the smallest matters as to give his opinion touching the Adulteresse or to divide the inheritance Nor then nor yet ever did Israel returne from Captivity and dwell safely if wee might say Iudah did at Christs first coming in the flesh as we may not because they were then under the Heathen Roman power as conquered and tributaries Luke 3.1 § 4 Nor may any put this off with Christs Spirituall reigning for so he did alwayes from the Creation but this is in the future tense hee shal reigne to signifie his reigning so as never before SECT III. Of the third Scripture â—â—t of the Old Testament for Christs visible appearance at the great restauration of the Church Zach. 2.10 11 12. compared with Zach. 14. ver 4 5 6 7 8 9. Sing and rejoyce O daughter of Jerusalem for loe I come and will DWELL in the midst of thee saith the Lord. And many NATIONS shall be joyned to the Lord in that day and shall be my people and I will DWELL in the midst of thee and the Lord shall INHERIT Judah his portion in the holy Land and shall CHOOSE JERVSALEM AGAINE And his feet shall stand in that day upon the Mount of Olives and the Lord shall bee King over ALL THE EARTH In that day there shall be one LORD and his name one ZEchary Prophesied after their returne out of Captivity in Babilon see Zech. 1.1 compared with 2 Chron. 36.22 Ezra chap. 1. ver 1. c. to the end Therefore this was not fulfilled in their return for it is spoken of a future time to come And Spiritually God did alwayes dwell among his people and therefore nor can that be the full meaning of this place And when Christ came and was incarnated this Text was not fulfilled for then many Nations were not joyned to the Lord to be his people nor so much as the generality of any one Nation the Heathen Romans then inherited the portion of Judah and filled all Countries with their persons or powers and instead of Christ then choosing Jerusalem againe he pronounced woe against it and gave it up to desolation which accordingly about forty yeares after Christs Passion was fulfilled Mat. 23. three last and Matth. 24.1 2 c. Nor was the Lord King over all the earth more then he had been before Christs Incarnation Instead of one Lord over all there were many SECT IIII. The fourth place in the Old Testament for Christs personall appearance Micha 4. vers 1 c. to 8. In the last dayes it shall come to passe that the Mountaine of the House of the Lord shall be established in the top of the Mountaine and MANY NATIONS SHALL COME AND SAY Come let us goe up to the Mountaine of the LORD and HEE shall JUDGE AMONG MANY PEOPLE and rebuke the NATIONS afarre off and they shall BEAT THEIR SWORDS INTO PLOW-SHARES NATION SHALL NOT LIFT UP A SWORD AGAINST NATION neither shall they learne warre any more but they shall sit every man under his Vine and under his Fig-tree and NONE SHALL MAKE THEM AFRAID In that day I will assemble her that halteth and will gather her that was driven out and her that I have afflicted and I will make her that was cast off a STRONG NATION and the Lord shal REIGN OVER THEM IN MOVNT ZION FROM HENCE-FORTH and FOR EVER NOw when was ever this since the Creation much lesse was it performed at Christs Incarnation when the Jewes were under the Roman power obstinate
are inconsistent with glory in the highest Heaven In like manner the residue of this one and twentieth Chapter shewes that the meaning is not of supernall eternall glory according to former common opinion of divines as ver 9 10. An Angel shewes John the Bride the Lambes wife viz. the great City holy Jerusalem descending out of Heaven from God which cannot possibly be meant of a state in the highest Heaven no Angel need tell John or he us that the Church shall bee seen in that Heaven when there it shall be seen without shewing by all the inhabitants there Nor is this a direct but a crosse phrase to expresse the state of the Church ascended by its descending out of heaven from God The soules of the elect must descend to be united to their bodies on earth there for a time to inherit all things as said afore before their ultimate glory And for that description of New Hierusalem by measures c. from ver 11.22 can it meane the spanning of Heaven or the measures of the place of ultimate glory The parts and particulars are all too short and to no purpose wee beleeve more then all in this Text without this Text doubtlesse this Geometricall and Architectonicall Iconiâ—me or description is taken out of Ezekiel from Chap. 39. to the end of the Book in all the Prophet importing thus much that Gog the enemy of Israel shall be destroyed and they themselves shall bee gathered from their captivity and measures out to them their New Testament estate that it shall be more goodly and glorious then all their Old Testament state and therefore when John hath this given to him in Rev. 21. as an exposition of Ezech. 39.40 41 42 c. Chapters it would be but a darke dreame to apply it to supernall eternall glory which many circumstances forbid for if it be meant of that glory why ver 14. are only the names of the twelve Apostles to be inserted in the twelve foundations and not the names also of the twelve Patriarchs of the twelve Tribes What need was there to tell us ver 11. that the place spoken of here hath in it the glory of God and a light like a Iasper cleare as Chrystall or to minde us ver 17. that the cubits were according to the measure of a man or to warn us ver 22. that John saw there no Temple and for that in ver 23 24. That God and the Lambe are the light of New Hierusalem â—nd they that are sazed shal walke in it and Kings shal bring their glory and honour unto it I aske any ingenuous man whether he can keeping his reason with him apply these things to ultimate happinesse in the highest Heaven Is there a walking or conversation of life in spirituall light Is it not a quiet injoying and beholding the unspeakeable manifestation of Gods speciall presence Doe Kings and Princes there goe and come and bring their honour and glory to heaven Or doe they bring as ver 26. the glory and honour of Nations unto it Thus take altogether quarrell not peecely with this or that fragment but take the whole entirely and then tell me ingenuously whether this one and twentieth Chapter can meane any thing but a glorious state on earth before the ultimate Judgement at which time is rather a destruction then an extruction or building and therefore this Chapter clearly containes the admirable state of the Church of Jewes and Gentiles for the space of that thousand yeares in the twentieth Chapter the exposition whereof is the work now in hand to which we returne § 5 The third passage in this twentieth Chapter of Revelations is that the Saints reigne with Christ a thousand yeares or the thousand yeares This number of yeares is expressed six times in the first seven verses twice 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and foure times with an emphaticall Article 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Can any judicious man take this meerly Allegorically and not Historically and litterally Can he upon good grounds make it to signifie lesse then a thousand yeares It is true a thousand yeares in Gods account 2 Pet. 3. in regard of his present knowledge of all things or knowledge of all things as present and his eternall entity before and beyond all things are but as one day but still a thousand yeares are a thousand yeares in themselves how ever they be as nothing in comparison of God But can man make a long time and a short time all one Are a thousand yeares to him but as one naturall day or to the Saints here reigning surely then the Saints priviledge of reigning or the binding of Satan for their sakes will amount to a very small matter Then on the morrow Gog and Magog shall rise against the Saints for at the end of the thousand yeares they shall rise against them Or can any considering man make these thousand yeares to signifie more then a thousand yeares viz. eternity the Scriptures have no such phrase that I know And divers of the Fathers afore the Floud though in a worse life-cherishing state lived within a few yeares of a thousand Is there not a notorious eminent punctum or point of the beginning and period of the ending of these thousand yeares They begin with the fall of Antichrist the destruction of his Army Rev. 19.19 20. and the wonderfull binding of Satan chap. 20. ver 2. And they end with the loosing of Satan and the warre with Gog-Magog Is it possible now that any should referre this to the eternity of supreame glory therefore as ver 4. it must needs be meant of reigning with Christ on earth at least a thousand yeares properly understood as it is expounded Revel 5.10 for all the Saints that are found on earth at Christs next coming never reigned with Christ in heaven and after the last Judgement Christ doth not reigne as Christ but layes downe all 1 Cor. 15.28 § 6 Let us in the next place take some maine particulars of this twentieth Chapter and compare the mystery of the things with the history of times Johns science with our experience and see whether we can make these all hold together unlesse wee understand them of a glorious Kingdome of Christ on earth before the ultimate day of judgement We will cull out but three particulars 1 The resurrection of the Saints vers 4 5. They must so live as the dead wicked that while did not live But the dead wicked did live that while in soule therefore the Saints must live more then so viz. must live that while in soule and body too Againe the Saints must so live at this first resurrection as the dead wicked shall at the second resurrection But the dead wicked shall live in soule and body at the second resurrection therefore the Saints at this first resurrection live in soule and body Let the Reader piercingly weigh the Text and he shall finde these syllogismes little lesse then demonstrations As for the difference
a glorious state of all things Gen. 1.26 And God said Let us make man in our Image after our likenesse and let them have dominion over the fish of the Sea and over the fowle of the Aire and over the Cattell and over all the earth and over every creeping thing that creepeth on the earth 27. So God created man in his owne Image c. 28. And God blessed them and God said unto them be fruitfull and multiply and replenish the earth and SVBDVE IT and have DOMINION over the fish of the sea and over the fowle of the aire and over EVERY LIVING THING that moveth on the earth Psal 8.1 O LORD our LORD how excellent is thy name IN ALL THE EARTH who hast set thy glory above the heavens 2. Out of the mouth of babes and sucklings thou hast ordained strength because of thine enemies that thou mightest still the enemy ard the avenger 3. When I consider thy Heavens the worke of thy fingers the Moone and the Stars which thou hast ordained 4. What is man that thou art mindfull of him and the Sonne of Man that thou visitest him 5. For thou hast made him a little lower then the Angels and hast crowned him with glory and honour 6. Thou madest him to have DOMINION OVER THE WORKES OF THY HANDS thou hast put ALL THINGS UNDER HIS FEET c. Heb. 2.5 For unto the Angels he hath not put in subjection the WORLD TO COME whereof we speake 6. But one in a certaine place testified saying what is man that thou art mindfull of him or the sonne of man that thou visitest him 7. Thou madest him a little lower then the Angels thou crownest him with glory and honour and didst set him OVER the workes of thy hands 8. Thou hast put ALL THINGS in subjection UNDER HIS FEET for in that hee hath put ALL in subjection under him he left NOTHING that is not put under him 9. But now WEE SEE NOT YET ALL THINGS put under him but we see Jesus who was made a little lower then the Angels for the suffering of death crowned with glory and honour that he by the grace of God should taste of death for every man § 1 AS Saint Iohn fetcheth in the Notions of the terrestriall Paradise to describe New Hierusalem of which Revel 21. or which is all one the glorious state of the Church that it shal have on earth before the last Judgement Revel 22. or else we shall make John to speake impertinently for in supreame glory is no need of a river of water or of streets or of a tree of Life or of twelve sorts of fruit one for each month or of leaves to heale the Nations or to make him speake untruly if any would turne it to an Allegory of a fountaine of Doctrine or of more and fresh effusions of the Spirit or of Christ to beare any further fruit he there laying downe all 1 Cor. 15.28 even so the Prophet David falls upon a divine meditation of the estate of Adam in innocency to compose a Propheticall Psalme of praise for what God would doe for his people on earth before the ultimate end of the world as the Apostle Paul expounds him in the place aforesaid § 2 Should seem that though some things by Adams fall were irrecoverably lost in specie in their proper kind though not vertually and equivalently as mans freedome from corporall death yet other things as this dominion of man over all things was not so forfeited but that in Christ first or last it is recovered And therefore though David knew full well Adams fall as appeares by Psal 51.5 yet looking upon the SONNE OF MAN Christ in this Psalme he holds up his head and heart and sings out shrilly this praise in this Psalme of hope that this dominion shall be made good to man on earth to the utmost § 3 For surely there is no imagining of this state to be of Saints in the highest Heavens that there they should have dominion over the Beasts Fishes and Fowls or over wicked men properly that are then in the infernal Lake wholly under the sole power of the Prince of Darknesse and this was not performed on earth unto Davids time who from his youth to his end was ever and anon in danger of Beasts or beastiall men of the Lion and the Beare of Goliah of Saul of Absolom of forreigne enemies c. Nor was it ever since fulfilled but that the Saints the Members of the SONNE OF MAN have been at the same passe for the generall with David or worse as we have and shall heare abundantly § 4 Yet this must be fulfilled visibly on earth as saith the Psalmist in this eighth Psalme so as the enemy and avenger among men must bee stilled ver 2. And all the Creatures subdued as it is in the rest of the Psalme and both so as that the Saints mouthes may be full of praise according to the forme of this Psalme and this must be fulfilled too visibly on earth saith the Apostle in the said second of Hebrewes Unto the Angels saith he ver 5. God hath not subjected THE WORLD TO COME of which WE SPEAKE No for they are charged to be in subjection to Christ chap. 1. ver 6. Nor hath God said to any of the Angels sit thou at my right hand * Mat. 24.14 Luke 2.1 Luke 4.5 Luk. 21.26 Acts 11.28 Act. 17.6 Act. 17.31 Act. 19.27 Act. 24.5 Rom. 10.18 Hebr. 1.6 Heb. 2.5 Rev. 3.10 Rev. 12.9 Rev. 16.14 untill I make thine enemies thy footstool ver 13. but this must be fulfilled on earth to men in Christ through him For the Apostles first phrase in that fifth verse of the second Chapter 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is spoken with great emphasis with a double emphaticall Article sounding as we speake in English THAT SAME world even THAT that is TO COME and yet still meaning a state on earth for the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 rendered world in propriety of signification signifies the inhabited world as men inhabite their dwelling houses 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 an house being of the Kindred of the world and in common use it is put to signifie the world on earth yea so used by the Holy Ghost in the New Testament at least fifteen times * The Greek is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. The word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 being the first Aor of subj mood as I conceive hath the signification of a suture Of this place of Scripture see more in this third Book chap. 2. Sect. 10. and sometimes in those places earth is adjoyned for plainer expression yea used so to signifie the world on earth in most of the said places as thereby to meane the Roman Monarchy the Romans then ruling the whole earth when the Apostles wrote as in two of those places viz. Luke 2.1 Act. 11.28 the Roman Emperour is expressed by name Yea lastly so constantly used in the New Testament
we see him for the suffering of death crowned with glory and honour which is not a subjection of the INHABITABLE WORLD TO COME unto him much lesse of ALL THINGS therein The Angels are in Heaven as well as he and so in place they as well as hee are above the things below But Christ must have the inhabited world and All things so subject to him and ' under him as they shall not be to Angels So that if we heed the Text and that which followes the Apostle tells us that in one way and sense Christ is exalted above all viz. in his possession of the highest Heaven through sufferings But withall this is in another place then the inhabited world to come viz. the world on earth yet to succeed and upon another account then the precise formall dominion over it viz. to taste of death for every man And it was in prosecution of a designe verse 10. viz. to bring many sonnes to glory not a perfecting of a thing finished viz. of the atchievement and attainment of his absolute dominion on earth over Turkes Jewes Papists and Heathens c. But this must be Christ and his members must have absolute dominion over the world below in that estate of it that is yet to come 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the habitation of the world is not to be subjected to the Angels Heb. 2. v. 5. They are but the Churches servants It is an estate that is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 to come after Pauls time though Christ had before ascended But it must be subject to MAN and the SONNE OF MAN v. 6. God 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 made him a little lower and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 for a little time Christ or Christians were not lower at all then Angels in nature or spirituall condition but onely in outward dominion and state of life Phil. 2. Heb. 2. and that but for a little time till the time of that world to come on earth which must be before the last day of judgement for then is not any subjection of any thing to Saints or Christ but he and so they to lay down all dominion 1 Cor. 15.28 SECT V. Wherein the Promises God made to Abraham Gen. 12.1 2 3. Gen. 15.4 5 6. Gen. 17.1 2 3 4 5 6 7. Gen. 18.18 Gen. 22.18 paralleled with other promises to his posterity Gen. 26.4 Gen. 48.19 v. 26. and with the Apostles explications and applications of those Promises Rom. 4. v. 3. to v. 25. Gal. 3. v. 6. to 17. Heb. 11. v. 8. to 17. are discussed for the cleering of the said generall Position Gen. 12. v. 1. Now the Lord had said unto Abram Get thee out of thy Country c. Verse 2. And I will make of thee a great Nation and I will blesse thee and make thy name great and thou shalt be a blessing Verse 3. And I will blesse them that blesse thee and curse him that curseth thee and in thee all families of the earth shall be blessed Gen. 15. v. 4. Behold the word of the Lord came to Abram saying This shall not be thine heire but he that shall come forth out of thine owne bowels shall be thine heire And he brought him forth abroad and said Look now toward heaven and tell the Starres if thou be able to number them And he said unto him so shall thy seed be Vers 6 And he beleeved in the Lord and he counted it to him for righteousnesse Gen. 17. v. 1. The Lord appeared to Abram and said unto him I am the Almighty God c. Verse 2. And I will make my Covenant between me and thee and will multiply thee exceedingly Verse 3. And God talked with Abram saying Verse 4. As for me behold my Covenant is with thee and thou shalt be a Father of many Nations * In the Heb. it is both in the 4. v. 5. vers 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is A Father of a MULTITUDE of Nations Neither shall thy name be called any more Abram but thy name shall be Abraham for a Father of many Nations have I made thee * Verse 6. And I will make thee exceeding fruitfull and I will make Nations of thee and KINGS shall come of thee V. 7. And I will establish my Covenant between mee and thee and thy seed after thee in their Generations for an everlasting Covenant Verse 8. And I will give unto thee and thy seed after thee the land wherein thou art a stranger all the land of Canaan for an EVERLASTING possession and I will bee THEIR GOD. Gen 18.18 Abraham shall surely become a great and a mighty Nation and all the Nations of the earth shall be blessed in him Gen. 22. v. 15 16. The Angel of the Lord called to Abraham c. by my selfe have I sworne that in blessing I will blesse thee and in multiplying I will multiply thy seed as the starres of Heaven and as the sand which is upon the Sea-shore and thy seed shall possesse the gates of his enemies ver 18. In thy seed all the Nations of the earth shal be blessed Gen. 26.4 The Lord appeared to Isaac and said I wil make thy seed to multiply as the Stars of Heaven and wil give unto thy seed all these Countries and in thy seed shal all the Nations of the earth bee blessed Gen. 48. ver 19. And his father Jacob refused and said I know it my Sonne I know it that Manasseh is the first borne he also shal become a People and he also shall be great but truly his younger brother Ephraim shall be greater then he and his seed shal become a MVLTITUDE of NATIONS * Heb. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is THE FVLNESSE OF THE GENTILES whence the Apostles phrase Rom. 11.25 The fulnesse of the Gentiles shall come ver 20. And he blessed them in that day saying In thee shal Israel blesse saying God make thee as Ephraim and as Manasseh and he set Ephraim before Manasseh Gen. 49. ver 26. The blessings of thy Father have prevailed above the blessings of my Progenitors unto the utmost bounds of the everlasting hills they shal be on the head of Joseph and upon the crowne of the head c. Rom. 4. ver 11. And Abraham received the signe of Circumcision a seale of the righteousnesse of the faith which he had yet being uncircumcised that he might be the Father of all them that beleeve though they be not circumcised ver 13. For the promise that hee should be the Heire of the world was not to Abraham and his seed through the Law but through the righteousnesse of faith ver 16. Therefore it is of faith that it might be by grace to the end the Promise might be sure to all the the seed not to that only which is of the Law but to that also which is of the faith of Abraham who is the FATHER OF US ALL. ver 17. As it is written I have made thee a father of many
Nations of the earth shal be blessed is that they that bee of faith shal be blessed with faithful Abraham That the blessing of Abraham shal come upon the Gentiles That the promise to Abraham that he should be THE HEIRE OF THE WORLD was not to Abraham and his seed through the Law but through the righteousnesse of faith that it might be by Grace to the end the Promise might be sure TO ALL THE SEED not to that only which is of the Law but to that also which is of the faith of Abraham WHO IS THE FATHER OF US ALL. ¶ 4. For the sealing of all these three likewise in the New Testament Christ as incarnated is called the Mystery or Sacrament as some Translate of godlinesse 1 Tim. 3.16 because in his flesh is the glorious representation of God Heb. 1.2 and the effectual communication of the excellencies of God to us by union with him and us Joh. 17.2 Joh. 1.16 Christ as testified unto from Heaven Mat. 3.17 Mat. 17.5 is the sealed one or the sealing to us Ioh. 6 27. viz. That he is the only name under Heaven whereby we must be saved Acts 4.12 and he as the meaning of all types Joh. 1.17 is the impletion or fulfilling of all the Promises to us take him and take all 2 Cor. 1.20 And to the end that we might be more sure of all these he hath change of names as a seale interpreted to that sence Matth. 1. Immanuel that is God with us which the Apostle notably applyes to our Salvation Rom. 8.31 and Jesus ibid. Mat. 1. for he shal save his people from their sins And thus Christ is a seale of our Salvation 2 ¶ Againe as Christ the true or Antitypicall Abraham or Isaac is the everlasting Father of all to be saved Isa 9.6 tooke our nature on him Heb. 2. suffered and ascended Mat. Chap. 27. Chap. 28. so he is a seale interest or assurance that there shall be a multiplication of them that shall be saved by him 1. By his FATHER-HOOD PATERNITY or Father-ship Isa 53. ver 10. He shal see his SEED ver 11. he shall see the TRAVELL of his soule He shal justifie many Heb. 2.11 c. He that sanctifieth and they that are sanctified are ALL ONE Behold I and the CHILDREN which God hath given me the Children partaking of flesh and bloud he partook of the same that through death he might destroy him that had the power of death that is the Devil ver 16. For he took not upon him the nature of Angels but the seed of Abraham for it behooved him in all things to be made like unto his brethren that he might be a mercifull and faithfull High-priest to make reconciliation for the sinnes of the people verse 10. For it became him FOR WHOM ARE ALL THINGS and BY WHOM ARE ALL THINGS in bringing MANY SONNES unto glory to make the Captaine of their salvation perfect through SUFFERING And that we might know that Christ is the seale or interest by his taking our nature not onely to save the Jews as in this second to the Hebrews but also the Gentiles the Apostle discusseth that his taking our nature in another root universall to all mankinde viz. Adam called the second Adam 1 Cor. 15. and mightily extends it as wide as the ruine that came by Adam Rom. 5. v. 15. If through the offence of one MANY be dead much more the grace of God and the gift by grace by one man Jesus Christ hath abounded to MANY verse 18. As by the offence of ONE judgement came upon ALL MEN to condemnation even so by the righteousnesse of ONE the free gift came upon ALL MEN unto justification of life 2 He is a seale or interest of the multiplication of beleevers by his suffering Heo 2.9 We see Jesus made a little lower then Angels for or by as it is in the margine the suffering of death crowned with glory and honour that he by the grace of God should taste death FOR EVERY MAN And Joh. 12.32 33. And I if I be lifted up from the earth will draw ALL MEN unto me this he said signifying what death he should dye 3 By his ascention Act. 1.11 compared with Act. 3 21. This same Jesus which is taken up from you into Heaven shall so come in like manner as ye have seen him goe into Heaven whom the Heavens must receive UNTILL the TIMES of restitution of ALL THINGS c. 3 ¶ Christ by reason of relation and union is the seale or assurance of the possession Rom. 8. Coheires with him Eph. 2.6 Set in heavenly places with him 4 ¶ As Christ is the seale or sealed one of all those three so also the Holy Spirit Baptisme and the Lords Supper are seals of all those The Spirit Eph. 1.13 14. first in generall is a seale of all the promises therefore called there the Spirit of promise saying ye were sealed with the Spirit of promise For as the promise promiseth the Spirit so the Spirit dictated to the Penmen of the Scriptures to leave us those promises and the Spirit brings home and applyes those promises to every mans particular heart 2 Cor. 3.3 1 Thess 1.5 Secondly In particular 1 The Spirit is a seale of salvation in the same Ephes 1.13 14. After ye heard the word of truth the Gospel of your SALVATION after ye beleeved ye were sealed with the holy Spirit of promise 2 A seale of multiplication of Believers For in that respect it is also there called as we hinted but now the Spirit of promise in that it is promised And how Thus that it shall be Joel 2.28 poured upon all flesh A large promise of innumerable effusions 3 A seale of the possession So in the same Ephes 1.13 14. ye were sealed with the holy spirit of promise which is the earnest of your INHERITANCE untill the redemption of the purchased possession The redemption of the soules of the Ephesians was past already therefore the redemption of the body of which the Apostle speaks Rom. 8.22 23. saying That all the creation as well as all beleevers groan after it must be meant The Apostle calls it in the Greek 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The redemption of much businesse which more sounds of a state on earth then in the highest Heavens And that our Coheirship with Christ Rom. 8. the Apostle Paul there saith verse 21 22 23. it must begin on earth And the Apostle John saith We must reigne with Christ on earth Rev. 5.10 a thousand yeers Rev. 20.4 Till Satan be there let loose and Gog and Magog thereupon make opposition verse 7.8 9. Next Baptisme is a seale as of salvation as all know so of the possession which that innumerable company of Jewes and Gentiles Exod. 12.37 38. passing through the Red sea Exod. 14. should have if there baptized beleeved 1 Cor. 10.1 c. wherein God sealed to them among other things that his power should be Omnipotent and his mercy
indure for ever Psal 136. v. 4. v. 13 14 15 in bringing them to the land of promise Lastly The Lords Supper doth not onely in the elements typifie our spiritual nourishment and cherishment by Christ but in the posture of sitting signifies our reigning and judging with Christ the whole earth as ruling and judging is oft expressed in Scripture by sitting Mat. 19.28 Rev. 4.4 Rev. 20.4 even as in Luke 22.29 30. Eating and drinking at a table with Christ is put as a signe of a Kingdome and sitting on seats or thrones a signe of judicature § 6 The summe of this Section is that there shall come so many out of the loynes of Abraham both of Jewes and Gentiles to whom God will be their God and blesse them over the face of the whole earth in the seed of Abraham making them partakers of the righteousnesse of faith c. as is afore more largely enumerated that the generality of the whole world shall become beleevers and be the governou of the entire universe All which must be fulfilled as sure as God cannot lie § 7 But these things in all those promises aforesaid have never yet been fulfilled The ten Tribes carried away by Salmanazar remaine still scattered among the Heathen not having received if ever they heard of the word of faith the Gospel of Christ And the two Tribes of Juda and Benjamin do not to this day acknowledge the New Testament The Turkes Arabians Hagarens Tartarians Persians Indians c. have no acquaintance with Christ and salvation We see not yet all Nations under the Stars numerous as the sands of the sea blessed in the seed of Abraham viz. in Christ converted to the faith Some inhabitants of a few spots of ground are called Christians but the most and mightiest Imperialties or dominions know not Christ Wee see not yet Ephraims posterity according to Gen. 48.19 afore quoted to become 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the fulnesse of the Gentiles or to come in as the fulnesse of the Gentiles which phrase the Apostle exactly keeping Rom. 11.25 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 untill the fulnesse of the Gentiles come in and so all Israel to be saved interprets it of the conversion of the world of Iewes and Gentiles to faith in Christ But alas for the posterity of Ephraim they are not delivered from their captivity temporall or spiritual to this day Nor is one Kingdome of ten over the whole world converted unto the faith Nor is Iosephs posterity blessed according to Gen. 49.26 to the utmost bounds of the everlasting Hils that is saith learned Ainsworth over the face of the whole earth Nor have the Hebrews since the Apostle wrote to them that Epistle so named attained any Country or City that is heavenly or built by God being not converted to this day as fit for any better condition on earth or in heaven And they must be in a better spiritual condition on Earth according to the tenour of all the Scriptures afore they can be received into Heaven Of which more after especially when we come to discusse the 4. Chap. of this Epistle to the Hebrews § 8 Nor can these things be fulfilled at the last general judgement being every way inconsistent with that time being no time then of conversion or dominion of men but of confusion of the wicked and the subjection of all the good yea of Christ himselfe as Christ to God who then is to be all in all as we have oft minded out of 1. Cor. 15.28 SECT VI. Wherein the Prophesie in Numb 24.16 to 25 is discussed as proof of the generall Position Numb 24. v. 16. He hath said or he assuredly saith which heard the words or oracles of God and knew the knowledge of the most High which saw the vision of the Almighty falling into a trance but having his eyes open Verse 17. I shall see him but not now I shall behold him but not nigh There shall come a STAR out of lacob and a Scepter shall arise out of Israel and shall smite or smite thorow the corners or Princes of Moab and shall destroy Heb. * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 shall unwall all the children of Sheth Verse 18. And Edom shall be a possession Seir also shall be a possession for his enemies and Israel shall doe valiantly Verse 19. Out of Iacob shal come he that shall have dominion and shall destroy him that remaineth of the City Verse 20. And when he looked on Amalek he took up his parable and said Amalek was the first of the Nations †That is the first of the Nation warred against Israel Exod. 17. but his latter end shall be that hee perish for ever Verse 21. And he looked on the Kenites and tooke up his parable and said Strong is thy dwelling place and thou puttest thy nest in a rock Verse 22. Neverthelesse the Kenite Heb. Kain * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 shall be wasted untill Ashur shall carry thee away captive Verse 23. And he took up his parable and said Alas who shall live when God doth this ** The Geneva Notes say Some read Oh who shall not perish when the encâ—â—y that is ANTICHRIST shall set himself up as God Verse 24. And ships shall come from the coasts of Chitim and shal afflict Ashur and shall afflict Eber and he shall perish for ever § 1 IT will be a faire Preface to what we are to infer from these words to our purpose if in the first place wee give you the exposition of the Verses above quoted in the words of the Hebrews Targum Talmud and Rabbins and of the Greek Septuagint The man that spake this was Balaam but set downe by Moses as a most sure Prophesie and therefore shews us what a full manifestation he had from God of this Prophesie verse 16. It is not unusuall with God sometimes for extraordinary ends to reveale some particular Prophesies to some men at some certaine juncture of time for a present occasion whiles such men are unregenerate So to Caiphas Joh. 11.49 50 51. So to the Sibyls of whom afore in the first Book in the large quotations of Lactantius I say not that God gives them the spirit of Prophesie but that God dictated to them some particular Prophesies as of this Balaam it is said the Lord met him and gave him a charge what he should say and so he was enforced by the power of divine providence to blesse instead of cursing And of this Prophesie we have some touches and phrases repeated in the New Testament 2 Pet. 1.19 Until the day-star arise Rev. 22.16 I Jesus c. am the root of David c. and the bright and morning star yea and some of this Prophesie is punctually fulfilled in the Old Testament so long since as Davids time as wee shall see after § 2 The matter of the Prophesie is very considerable to our businesse if we understand it aright wherein the Hebrews admirably assist for of them
did put to death Christ and persecute the Apostles the Apostles thereupon convert the second Psalme with a part of the eighth Psalme for I suppose there is recorded but the summe into a prayer and doe turne the bent of that their prayer both upon Jews and Gentiles They lift up their voyce to God with one accord and said Lord thou art God which hast made Heaven and Earth and the Sea and all that in them is c. as it is Ps 8. who by the mouth of thy servant David hast said Psal 2. v. 1. c. why did the HEATHEN rage and the PEOPLE imagine vaine things The Kings of the earth stood up and the Rulers were gathered together against the Lord and against his Christ For of a truth against thy holy childe Jesus both HEROD and PONTIUS PILATE with the GENTILES and people of ISRAEL were gathered together for to do c. And now Lord behold their threatnings c. Both which Psalmes are prophetical of our point The eighth Psalme we opened afore and now we shall the second out of both which Psalmes though Luke records the story but briefly onely giving a touch upon the beginning of both the Apostles no doubt urged in their prayer whatsoever was in them pertinent to their desire of the advancing Christ there being farre apter pertinences to that in the sequel of those Psalmes then in the beginnings The summe of their desire is that God according to his promise in Psal 2. Psal 8. would set up the power and glory of Christ unto a predominancy over Jews and Gentiles notwithstanding all their fierce opposition at present And for a testimony that God did allow their application of those Psalms as right and did accept of their prayer grounded thereon hee fils them with the Spirit and shakes the place where they prayed Now this second Psalme is not yet fulfilled not the Apostles prayer upon it fully answered It is true that about forty yeers after Christs death came to passe that great destruction upon the Jewes their Temple City and Country too prophesied by Christ Matth. 24.1 c. And within fewer yeers Herod came to a miserable untimely end Act. 12. as also did Pilate and after him successively two and thirty Roman Emperours as the Ecclesiastical story shews us * M. Fox in his Martyr And about three hundred yeers after the incarnation of Christ Constantine the Great and many of his souldiers being converted unto Christianisme overthrew in battel his Antichristian Colleagues and their Armies that opposed it But Prophesies and Prayers as streams run on in a current still growing greater and greater in accomplishment till they rest in the maine Ocean the fulfilling of the full design of God according to the entire Plat-form God drew forth in the expresse termes of his Promises This Psalm therefore according to that rule was not fully accomplished when the Apostles turned it into a Prayer notwithstanding all the great things that Christ and his Apostles did towards the convincing of Jewes and Romans and converting many For what needed the Apostles to pray for a further fulfilling of that second Psalme if then it had been fulfilled No nor is that Psalme in any full measure fulfilled to this day the Heathen unregenerate Gentiles and the obstinate Jewish people are of the same temper still and tamper the same oppositions against Christ And God hath not hitherto so spoken to them in his wrath and vext them in his sore displeasure as to make them know that he hath set HIS KING upon his holy hill of Sion nor hath he given unto Christ the HEATHEN for his inheritance and the UTMOST PARTS OF THE EARTH for his possession to breake them that are incorrigible with a rod of Iron and to dash them in peeces like a Potters vessell to the making of the Kings and Judges of the earth wise to serve the Lord in feare c. Most Kingdomes are yet meere Heathens and the most of Kingdomes named Christians are Hereticall or disobedient unto Christ and Sion it selfe where Christ will mainly manifest his Kinglinesse is under the Turkish Mahometan Blasphemers as it was under the bloudy Heathen Romans all the time of Christ and his Apostles and the Jewes that are a maine part of his Kingdom are to this day unconverted There must yet come a time when Christs anger must be but kindled and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 but as a little and yet then must ALL they be happy that trust in Christ Marke accurately There must be a time when Christs anger must be but kindled in comparison of the last Judgement and but as a little time * So the Hebr. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is oft applied to time is for degree â—is in kindle in respect of the speedy event of making All them that trust in Christ to be happy Now if you apply this to the time past since the Apostles made their prayer upon this Psalme it is neare one thousand six hundred and twenty years which you cannot call a little time much lesse can you call it a little time from Davids penning of it to this time And if you look forward to the ultimate Iudgement then Christs anger is not only kindled but it is totally on a flame and for ever the fire never goes out So that the fulfilling of this Psalme must be in a time between our present Age and the last Iudgement It must be at a time when Christs anger hath but a little time to be kindled and anon the Trusters in Christ to be blessed which must be when the generation or succession of the wicked opposers of Christ are perished who perishing are not said to be at their journies end at the ultimate end of the world but in the way in some notable way or race they ran in their Generation in opposing Christ as Revel 19. the three last verses These wicked ones must perish and the trusters in Christ be blessed at some notable time of eminent manifestation of Christ as he is Christ and King of Sion which must be before his laying downe of his Mediatorship and power at the end of all I say at some notable time of eminent manifestation of Christ For this phrase in this Psalme THIS DAY HAVE I BEGOTTEN THEE is alwayes applied to such eminent manifestations of Christ the latter still being greater then the former As first in this second Psalme at the declaring the decree and proclaiming Christ to be King conversively of his Church and coercively over all the world of enemies Secondly at Christs resurrection Acts 13.23 and 33. Thirdly in relation to Christs appearance ere long to all the world to set up his visible Kingdome on earth of which we speake 2 ¶ For saith the Apostle Hebr. 1.5 6. unto which of the Angels said he at any time Thou art my SONNE THIS DAY HAVE I BEGOTTEN THEE And againe I will be to him a Father
the whole of Christs passion as it is plaine First by the Title which is of the Canonical Hebrew Text. A Psalme * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 concerning A jieleth Shahar that is the hind of the morning Christ being shut in the grave escaped away in the morning rising from death Secondly by the application of severall passages to Christs passion by the Evangelist Matth. 27. As that of the DESERTION My God My God why hast thou forsaken me v. 1. That of DERISION ' He trusted in the Lord that he would deliver him let him deliver him v. 8. That of PIERCING They pierced my hands and my feet v. 16. That of division of his garments They parted my garments among them and upon my vesture cast lots v. 18. Now this Psalme touching Christ though in the first Scene sets forth Christs humiliation yet in the second holds forth his exaltation vers 22. I will declare thy name unto my brethren which the Apostle applies Heb. 2.9 10 11 12. to Christs manifestation of his samenesse of nature with the sonnes of men even as in that nature he tasted death for every man and at last would declare that salvation to all the world which clearly tends to our point And v. 27 28 29. we have the effect of his declaring Gods name to the world viz. ALL THE ENDS OF THE WORLD shall remember and turne unto the Lord and ALL THE KINDREDS OF THE Nations or GENTILES * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 shall worship before him For the Kingdome is the Lords and he is the Governour among the Nations or GENTILES All they that be fat upon the earth shall eat and worship In all which we see the effect effectuall conversion The Generality and Universality in many ALL 's The time in generall viz. It is to be after Christs suffering upon the crosse The characters eat and worship which cannot be understood of the highest heavens And it hath not been fulfilled on earth according to that effect universality and character from Christs passion to this day Therefore it is yet to be fulfilled on earth 5 ¶ According to Psalme 86.9 ALL NATIONS whom thou hast made shall come and worship before thee O Lord and glorifie thy name A place mightily considerable So that so great a promise and prophesie as this by so great a Prophet as this with such a shrill emphasis in the ALL and in the Act worship and in the degree of the effect to glorifie his name must not bee ended with flams of humane glosses but must be really and truly and fully accomplished though as yet it was never compleatly fulfilled as it will be too late to think of those things at the ultimate judgement when Christ comes not for conversion but destruction Therefore yet before that finall Day of Doome this ALL must bee brought to ALL THAT of Worshipping and Glorifying Gods Name 6 ¶ Just as we have it in that little Psalme the 117. but greatly Prophetical Praise yee the Lord ALL NATIONS praise him ALL YEE PEOPLES * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 How shall all these do this unlesse Christ convert all them but those refractory ones whom he confounds Surely therfore this is a Prophesie that God will in time before the ultimate day of judgement convert generally all Nations as Paul extends it Rom. 11.10 11 c. to the coming in of the fulnesse of Jewes and Gentiles rejoycing together as one Church Therefore according to Paul David had a most comprehensive and extensive sense when he spake these things and therefore shall be fulfilled according to its true latitude and elevation without the mincing distinctions of mens braine For a seale of assurance whereof the close of the Psalme hath three weighty clauses First That the MERCIFULL KINDNESSE of Jehovah to the sonnes of men is great Secondly The TRUTH of the same Jehovah is for ever 3 That by faith and hope in that mercy and truth to see these things fulfilled we should PRAISE that JEHOVAH with Hallelujah which is the word of praise all along the Revelation § 2 Having done with the first head contained in the Psalmes touching the universal power Christ shall have over the whole world afore the last judgement though most yet rebell against him Next wee come to the second head viz. The just time when Christ shall attaine this 1 ¶ That place Psal 97.7 Worship him all yee gods the Apostle tells us Heb. 1.6 shall be fulfilled When God shall bring again his Son Christ into the world which place though our Translators render it And again when he bringeth c. as if it were meerly a new proof of Christs superiority above Angels is most truly rendred according to our reading afore set downe againe and againe with reasons to justifie it so that in words and sense it is an Antithesis and Auxesis to the fifth verse thus He saith not to any Angel thou art my Sonne this day I have begotten theee but instead thereof he speakes a thing that doth much lessen the dignity of Angels and more dignifie Christ above them Let all the Angels of God worship him so that the first And must be turned into But proper to the Greek 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as there placed and that same Againe is not to signifie another proofe of Christs superiority above Angels but to signifie the time when that of ALL the Elohim Angels and Potentates whether of the Spirits in Heaven or men on earth both Angels and Elohim signifying both worshipping of Christ shall be fulfilled For this hath not yet beene fulfilled as to the ALL of the Magnificents and Great-ones of the earth who contrariwise for the generall have despised if not opposed Christ even as it will bee too late and an unseasonable time for them to do it at the ultimate judgement when no adoration or worship is then received from Christs enemies but sentence is given by him upon and against them The time therefore when this shall bee fulfilled is saith the Apostle in this first to Heb. penned after Christs ascension When God shall bring his first-begotten Sonne AGAINE into the INHABITED WORLD When he brought him into the world the first time by incarnation ALL the Potentates and Angels of men The Scribes and Pharisees Herod and Pontius Pilate the Roman Emperours and Senate of Rome did not worship him but refused him and persecuted him and his members most bloodily for neer three hundred yeers after whom the Arians and next to them the Papacy took their turnes to maintaine that stream of blood running downe to our times But when he shall bring his first-begotten Sonne againe into the world in his visible royal exaltation then they all shall worship him I say as the Text sayes ALL but they that are ruined for their refractorinesse The phrase When he bringeth againe if the Greek word were not of a future sense imports a future thing as the Hebrew imperative Psal 97.7 Worship ye
be changed in a moment in the twinckling of an eye at the lad Trumpet for it shall sound both the dead shal be raised incorruptible and we shal be changed * So according to the best Greek Copies howbeit the common translation holds forth effectually what we intend Saint John in the Revelation tels us that the last Trumpet is the seventh Trumpet according to the many instances wherein God delights in the number of seven so that six as it is exprest in the Revelation sounded afore this and saith That the last end of all is not till the last Trumpet But there is a great intervall and space within the time of the last Trumpet many things being to be done within that compasse so that at the first beginning of the last Trumpet the enemy so falls that the Kingdomes of THIS world become the Kingdomes of the Lord and of his Christ that is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of the Lord his Christ in spight of all enemies and their anger the dead Saints are raised and a reward given to them Revel chap. 11. ver 15 16 17 18. which is a summary preface or a prefaciatory sum to the Catastrophe or upshot of the Revelation to follow unto the end as touching the Saints And in Revel 20. first seven verses is expressed how long this visible Kingdome of Christ on earth shall be and consequently so long is the space of the last Trumpet viz. a thousand yeares But the last end of all the ultimate period shall not be till the last end of the last Trumpet Revel 20. vers 12 c. Now let the Reader compare and consider all that Paul hath spoken in this quotation of and upon the one hundred and tenth Psalme touching the subduing of all things to Christ and the five notes of the time when it must be together with Johns explication and confirmation of Pauls last Trumpet and then let him tell me 1 Whether these things must not of necessity be fulfilled upon the earth 2 Whether these things are not yet to come yet to be fulfilled 3 Whether they must not be fulfilled afore the ultimate end of all when Christ resignes up his Kingdome to the Father 7 ¶ But there is yet one quotation more of this hundred and tenth Psalme insisted upon by the Apostle which gives us further light in Heb. 10. ver 11 12 13. Every Priest saith he standeth daily in ministring and offering oftentimes the same sacrifice which can never take away sin but this man after he had offered one sacrifice for sinnes SATE DOWNE ON THE RIGHT HAND OF GOD FROM HENCE-FORTH EXPECTING TILL HIS ENEMIES BE MADE HIS FOOT-STOOL c. Two things are here at first sight evident before our eyes viz. 1. That the Apostle quotes the words of the one hundred and tenth Psalme And 2. That the Apostle applyes them to explaine the eminency of Christs Priesthood above the Leviticall in that the Leviticall Priests offered daily Christ but once they oftentimes the same Sacrifice he only once they tooke not away sinnes he did they stood as Servants he sate downe as Lord according to Psal 110. ver 1. Now observe how this suits to our purpose For it is expresse here that Christ did effectually attaine to reigne spiritually in overcoming Sinne and Satan witnessed in making perfect attonement for the sinnes of all that are sanctified and his overcoming death the wages of sinne And the Divel the Gaoler of death by his Resurrection Ascension and Assession at the right hand of God whereby in regard of the place he got above all his enemies And yet for all this to that very houre that the Apostle wrote this Christs enemies were not made his footstoole But saith he still there he sits from THENCEFORTH EXPECTING TIL his enemies be made his footstool as he doth to this day Plainly signifying that Christ must have another-gates Regiment and Government another manner or degree of subduing his enemies then that Which can be no other then a sensible visible subduing of them Which as we on earth expect so he in heaven saith the Apostle sits continually expecting the same For his enemies on earth continuing his enemies under that notion so to be subdued are never subject to him spiritually And further as the Apostle minds us Christ expects that further subduing of his enemies upon his Fathers promise made to him Psa 110. Now at the ultimate day of judgment there is no more subduing of any thing to Christ seeing then Christ layes down all and he the same himself is subject 1 Cor. 15. Therfore this being yet unfulfilled must be performed afore that day and according to the sense of the 110 Psalm of which all this while we have spoken but upon the first verse There are divers other passages more in this Psalme that much concurre to and explaine our point 8 ¶ Verse 2. The Lord shall send the rod of thy STRENGTH out of Zion Rule thou in the MIDST OF THINE ENEMIES Mr. Ainsworth and our New Annotationists parallel this with Psal 2. And withall assert that the Jewish Expositors generally doe acknowledge the second Psalme to be concerning the Messias and infer if that then there is as much reason for this Now as in Psal 2. it is said Christ shall rule his enemies with a ROD OF IRON and breake them incorrigible as a Potters vessel even so in this Psalme it is said the Rod of Christs STRENGTH * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 not of authority or power which I should wonder if any dare to restraine to meer spirituall efficacy especially if we heedfully observe that which follows Rule thou as with that Rod * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in the middest of thine enemies Now tell me how doth Christ rule spiritually in the middest of his enemies And if you grant with us that a sensible corporal rule must be here admitted then cast about and consider that Christ hath no rule at the ultimate day of judgement 1. Cor. 15. And before that to this day Christ hath not so ruled amidst his enemies in most Nations Therefore it is yet to come afore the ultimate day of judgement Verse 3. Thy people shall be willing or Voluntaries in the day of thy power or Armie as Ainsworth asserts Now Peter assures us that the great day of Christ is a thousand yeers 2 Pet. 3. And wee must of necessity yeeld that this day of power must signifie a distinct determinated time and then to be measured out when Christs power shall most eminently appeare above any former appearance Now whether we take this in a spiritual sense of acting grace after conversion or in an Ecclesiastical as our Annotationists that Christs people shall be assembled unto his Church whose increase shall be as it follows so abundant and wonderful as the drops of the dew falling from the womb of the morning or in a corporal sense that men shall bee willing to pull downe Christs
without consideration of Gods hand in it and should manage the rod with insolent cruelty to the Jewes that God will bring destruction upon the Assyrian for deliverance of the Jewes The confirmation of this deliverance as is the manner of God in the Prophets hath its foundation laid in the sending of Christ Chapter 11. The promise whereof and description of whose person we have set forth and characterised in the first five verses There shall come forth a rod out of the stem of Jesse c. and the Spirit of the Lord shall rest upon him the Spirit of wisdome c. and he shall not judge after the sight of his eyes but with righteousnesse shall he judge c. So that although in Hezekiahs time wherein Isaiah prophesied the host of the Assyrians were destroyed to the number of one hundred eighty five thousand by the Angel of the Lord 2 Kings 19.35 And againe in the time of Judahs captivity in Babylon they were overthrown with a mighty destruction by the Medes and Persians Dan. 5.30 yet these are not the ALL of the Threat of this Prophesie against Assyria for the Threat is carried on still in Zach. 1.15 to the end of the Chapter though at that time Judah was returned And to keep to this our Text of Isa according to the length of the foundation of this Prophesie must the superstructure be extended viz. to the comming of Christ which coming of him being not restrictively determined to his first coming in his incarnation must be left at large to reach to his second coming at the great Restauration as the Text doth seem to require in mentioning his judging v. 3. his smiting the earth v. 4. c. For we must know to give you Mr. Medes notion Alicubi as neare as I can That the old Prophets for the most part spake of the coming of Christ INDEFINITLY and in GENERALL without that distinction of first and second coming which we have more cleerly learned in the Gospel For this reason those Prophets except Daniel who distinguisheth those comings and the Gospel out of him speake of the things which should be at the coming of Christ indefinitely and altogether which we who are now more fully informed by the Revelation of his Gospel of this distinction of a twofold coming must apply each of them to its proper time Those things which befit the state of his first coming unto it and such things as befit the state of his second coming unto his second And that which befits both alike may be applied to both Which notion of Mr. Mede is the more to be acknowledged in that it may appeare by many instances from the Creation hitherto that the grand promises of great deliverances have their successive and graduall fulfilling from their first promulgation unto the end of this world as daily experience produceth fresh testimonies Calvin on Isa The context saith Isa 10.24 c. Thus saith the Lord O my people that dwellest in Zion be not affraid of the ASSYRIAN Hee shall smite thee with a rod and shall lift up his staffe against thee after the manner of EGYPT For yet a very little while and the indignation shall cease and mine anger IN THEIR DESTRUCTION c. And in that day his burden shall be taken away from thy shoulder c. Now in Hezekiahs time the Assyrian did not smite the Inhabitants of Zion but were smitten by the Angel of the Lord as afore mentioned Nor was the burden of the Assyrian taken away from off the shoulder of the dwellers at Zion at their returne from Babylon by a destruction on them under whom they were then in captivity For the Lord stirred up the spirit of Cyrus their King voluntarily to let them return as we well know the story in the second of Chron. Chapter last and Ezra Chap. 1. And further the Apostles do bring downe many passages of this eleventh of Isaiah unto the Transactions of their times and downwards applying them to the coming of Christ yea to the coming of Christ after his ascention For example ¶ 1. First that in verse 1. There shall come forth a rod out of the stem of Jesse c. is applied by the Apostle Act. 13. v. 22. c. to v. 42. to Christ as the eminent seed of David of the seed of Jesse conjoyning a quotation out of Psal 2. Thou art my Sonne this day have I begotten thee which with other passages in that Psalme as hath been demonstrated signifies Christs visible Kingdome on earth yet to come And a quotation out of Isaiah 55.3 Touching the sure mercies of David And one other quotation out of Ps 16. That his holy one saw no corruption of purpose to prove that though David himselfe be dead yet Christ lives to be the sure mercies of David and to keep off his seed from seeing corruption that in him the ever-living seed of David may reigne to the end of this world and that in some peculiar way priviledge and relation and proportion to David or else the dint and vigor of Isaiahs and the Psalmists Text and the Apostles Commentary is made to languish Which priviledge peculiarity relation and analogy to David what can it bee but a visible Reigning or Kingdome of Christ For Christs Kingdom purely spirituall by his Word and Spirit what doth it more relate to David then to other Christian Kings and Princes of the Gentiles converted from Heathenisme or how more over Davids people or Kingdome more then over all Indians and Heathens where the Gospel is spread and received ¶ 2 Again that in verse the tenth of this eleventh of Isaiah There shall be a root of Jesse which shall stand for an ensign of the people to it shall the GENTILES seek the Apostle Rom. 15.12 draws down to Christ then ascended and gives us this sense of the Prophet That Christ is not onely the OBJECT of faith to the Gentiles but that the Gentiles shall be his SUBJECTS he reigning over them How reigning over them Marke curiously the Apostles words and you may perceive something Againe saith the Apostle There shall be a root of Iesse and he that shall RISE to REIGNE over the Gentiles in him shall the Gentiles trust His reigning as in relation to David doth not commence from his Incarnation but he shall RISE to reigne spoken by the Apostle after Christs Resurrection and Ascention and rendred as you heare by our Translators under a future notion He shall rise to reigne Yea follow the words yet closer even home to the very doores of the Original and you will see I thinke yet more 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. There shall be a root of Iesse and he shall RISE AGAINE to reigne over the Gentiles or stand up AGAINE to reigne over them Christ had before the Apostle penned that risen the first time viz. from the grave of the earth But now that he hath ascended long since up into heaven and there as it
and Hezekiah reigned five or six Kings over Judah And the Ten Tribes were not carried away captive into Assyria till the sixth yeare of the reigne of Hezekiah 2 King 18.9.10 And therefore it seems that Isaiah prophesied the Prophesie of this eleventh Chapter when Hezekiah was not come to the Crown nor were any of all the twelve Tribes in captivity in Assyria the first time and therefore could not be supposed to be delivered thence the first time But before this Text can be fulfilled they must be in Captivity in Assyria the first time and be delivered the first time as it is hinted in the Text they had been in Egypt the first time and been delivered thence the first time Now they were in Captivity in Assyria the first time as we touched afore in the ten Tribes in the reign of Hoshea King of Israel 2 Kin. 18. And in the two Tribes in the Reign of Zedekiah King of Judah 2 Chro. 36. So here is the totall Captivity of all the twelve Tribes in Assyria the first time And their deliverance out of that Captivity the first time the first that we can possibly reckon is set down in the book of Ezra Cha. 1. and Chap. 2. c. where for the generall the two tribes of Judah and Benjamin returned to Jerusalem as is plain by their Genealogies they were of the two Tribes excepting some others that went up that could not shew their Genealogies So that if wee make the most of the first recovery or deliverance we can put the emphasis no where but upon the returne of the two Tribes Nor can we finde where at the soonest to pitch this great emphasis of Gods recovering his people the second time but upon that time when hee shall bring back the rest of the Tribes viz. The ten Tribes which were and still are in Assyria from thence and from Pathros and from Cush and from Elam and from Shinar and from Hamath and from the Isles of the Gentiles Thus for the least and soonest Second time wee can possibly finde out of their deliverance out of Assyria and the parts afore-mentioned which is not fulfilled to this day But a greater Second and of the same length too is this This same Again the Second time c. may import two considerations First Two parts of the recovery or deliverance of the All of the twelve Tribes from Assyria the first time of the two Tribes the second of the ten Tribes of which we have spoken afore Secondly Two distinct times of deliverance of the twelve Tribes both the two and of some of the ten but especially of the Two Object The conceit of some that the Second out of Assyria answers to the first out of Egypt is in my opinion but weak Because they must be delivered according to this Text the Second time out of Egypt as well as out of Assyria Sol. And therefore these are co-eve co-etanean of the same age and not successive I say Second doth import as appears by history both divine and humane abetted with experience a Second deliverance of the twelve Tribes more or lesse from Assyria as well as from Egypt but specially this Second time centers upon the two Tribes called by the name of Jewes of whom Christ came as the ten were called Israel Which as briefly as we can we open thus That whereas God brought up the two Tribes from Assyria to Jerusalem by Ezra as his book makes large mention the Jews there continued for about three hundred threescore and ten yeers pretty quiet till that Antiochus Epiphanes comes up into Judea enters the City spoyles the Temple robs the City and kills a many of the Citizens as the learned Chronologers quote out of Macchab 1.1 In which Macchabean wars the Jews were much wasted and scattered Yet after that act of Antiochus the generality of the two Tribes that were left and the sprinklings of the ten Tribes as is supposed Ezra 2.62 as many as came up with them under Cyrus by Ezra abode there about a hundred sixty and six yeers more with much trouble in the ensuing Macchabean wars and the Roman invasions and domination succeeding them till Christ should bee borne at Bethlehem in Judea that the Scripture might be fulfilled touching that place of his birth But they crucifying Christ affronting his Gospel with sacrificing and persecuting his members and with all divine justice therein most righteously recompencing them rebelling against the Romans their Governours God and men conspired in a further prosecution of this second scattering on foot by the Antiochian Macchabean and Roman warres Titus the Roman Emperour some forty yeers after Christs ascention destroying their Temple and after him Adrian destroying the City of Jerusalem After whom Constantine the Great scattered them from Mamre and then God himselfe scattered them being about to re-build the Temple by the encouragement of Julian the Apostata by fire from heaven and wonders on earth After all which the Saracens Arabians and Turkes invaded their land and miserably scattered them and so they continue excepting a few Jewes in and about Jerusalem to this day dispersed in the Isles of the Sea or of the Gentiles viz. in the West-Indies Italy Poland Spaine Portugal Low-Countries Media Persia Assyria c. as we shall see presently and in most Countries in the world as the Rabbins in their books plainly confesse So that Gods setting his hand THE SECOND TIME to recover his people out of ASSYRIA c. cannot be streightned to the returne of the two Tribes under the conduct of Zerubbabel and Joshua with Ezra for this was but the first time They are again scattered And the Ten Tribes as well as the Two are his people and the promise is Rom. 11. of saving all ISRAEL Therefore the whole work of restoring all the twelve Tribes now lyes on Gods hands to recover them from Assyria the second time in this sense also And he must do it universally including the generality of all his people that are scattered and from all places as saith our Text from ASSYRIA the common name of the Empire at their first captivity there Of which there is abundant mention in the books of Kings Chronicles and Ezra And there were of the Jews there in the time of Jeremiah the Prophet Jer. 44.1 And from EGYPT Which likely afterwards was added in part or whole to that Empire as severall times in the reigne of severall Kings of Israel and Juda many Jews were carried thither Of whose scattering there unto the Apostles time see Act. 2.10 And from PATHROS There was Pathros sometime belonging to the Territories of Egypt there being mention of the Country of the Inhabitants called Pathrusim Gen. 10.14 whose place or land of habitation may very fitly be called Pathros and was a Province of Egypt Jer. 44.1 The word of the Lord that came to Jeremiah concerning all the Jews which dwell in the land of Egypt c. Then v. 15 All the men
intend to leave out the most of the Jewes viz. ten for two to whom those Strangers were to joyne Nor was this done at the return of the two Tribes from Babylon Then Strangers of the Gentiles joyned not with them Nor was it done at the joyning of the two handfuls the one of Jews the other of Gentiles in the history of the Acts of the Apostles For they could no way answer to Jacob and Israel and Strangers indefinitly spoken without limitation ☜ I have often admonished that the grand prophesied promises touching Christs Kingdome have their gradual successive progressive impletions Redux Juda Juda returning from Babylon was a Type The conversion of an handfull of them in the Apostles time was but the first-fruits Rom. 11. But the fulnesse of Gentiles and Jews is yet behind Thirdly we never yet saw that in the second vers fulfilled That Christians have been servants and handmaids to the Jews in a right religious harmony and complyance For that must be the sense and good news of this promise or else Christians shall have losse and that in things concerning salvation Fourthly nor did we ever see that also in the second verse fulfilled that the Captive Jewes shall take them captive whose Captives they were and rule over their oppressours For neither in their return from Babylon did the Jewes take captive their Captivators but returned by voluntary consent of King Cyrus nor at Christs coming did they take any captive but rather were captives under Augustus and Tyberius Emperours of Rome and of Babylon too as subdued by those Romans the universal Monarchs then of the whole world If any should be of so ayery a phantasie as to evaporate this into a figure that at Christs coming the Jews took their Captivators captive in a spirituall sense of conversion let such remember themselves that Converts are the greatest Free-men Joh. 8.32 And that for the Jews then alas for them the vaile was on them 2 Cor. 3. So that they were generally in a spirituall Captivity themselves like Sampson when his eyes were put out And that Dan. c. 12. intimates that the Iews Conquest over their enemies should be corporall Neither of which Conquests do we yet see that the Jews either corporally or spiritually have subdued them that captivated them Fifthly neither was that in the second verse ever yet fulfilled That the PEOPLES or Gentiles should take the Iewes and bring them to their place c. Calvin on this place grants thus much That this was not done after the Iewes coming out of Babylon giving this reason That the Gentiles were so far from being the conduct and assistance to the Iews in their returne and settlement and to contribute their service to them therein that they did not only trouble the Iews but destroyed them from off the earth quoting Ezra 4.4 Adding that therefore this must be fulfilled in through and by Christ Thus far Calvin But when was this yet ever done by Christ Surely those seeds in Christ and the Apostles time could not be the Harvest here meant whole Iacob and Israel were not then in the land of the Lord. Nor are they to this day But are for the generall under the dominion of Turks Romans Indians and Countries in every Nation almost under heaven rather serving the Gentiles then being served of the Gentiles And therefore this cannot be done till as Dan. 2. that the little stone Christ cut out of the mountain without hands breaks to peeces the fourfold-mettaled image of all the foure Monarchies of the earth Whereas yet the Roman Monarchy in great part stands to this day Sixtly The twelve Tribes of Iacob and Israel are not yet as it is v. 3. delivered from their sorrow and fear and bondage They are in bondage being scattered amongst all Nations They are in sorrow for that scattering from their own Country And are there in fear being forced to pay tribute for their own freedome Nor were they freed from that bondage in Christs time being then Captives under the Romans Nor from their fear but for fear of the Romans if they should owne Christ they crucified him and put him to death Therefore when this deliverance is fulfilled to purpose it is done as it follows in the seventh clause and consideration v. 4 5 6 7 That the Jews shall take up this Proverb How hath the OPPRESSOUR ceased The Lord hath broken the SCEPTER of the RULERS and the staffe of the WICKED so that the WHOLE EARTH is at REST and QUIET that they break forth into SINGING But nor Scripture nor Histories nor Experience shew us that ever these things were fulfilled to this day And at the ultimate day of judgement will be no meet time for such work as every mans own reason will easily prompt Therefore it is yet to be done afore the ultimate day of judgement SECT XV. THe fifth place in Isaiah is Chapter 24. verse 23. Then the Moon shall be confounded and the Sun ashamed when the Lord of Hosts shall reigne in Mount Zion and in Jerusalem and before his Ancients gloriously * R. Kimchi upon this Chapter hath these words 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 This parasha or Section is to be fulfilled hereafter 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 In the destruction of Edom 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Afterward he shall remember the salvation of ISRAEL To understand what he means by Edome he bids us upon v. 16. Look 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 upon the destruction of ROME mentioned in the who le book of God To these few words I shall need to speak but few THEN relating to that afore in verse 22 23. fetcheth its sense from thence In that day say the 22 and 23. verses It shall come to passe that the Lord shall punish the host of the High ones that are on high and the Kings of the earth upon the earth meaning plainly as the last clause evidenceth the Gentile-Potentates and powers And they those Gentiles shall be gathered together as prisoners are gathered in the pit and shall be shut up in the prison And after many dayes THEY the Jews saith Calvin giving a strong reason * Quum igitur haec ad sustinendos FIDELES pertinerent non dubium quin IUDAEIS dicerentur apud quos potissimum fides crat aut potius nusquam apud alios apparebat shall be visited To which sense touching the Iews the subsequent words also in the next verse the Text wee are now upon do mightily concur The Moon shall be confounded c. when the Lord shall reigne before his Ancients The originall and rise of which then you now see That upon the great destruction of the impenitent Gentile-Potentates and Powers the Iewes and if you will include the penitent Gentiles it shall not grieve us shall be visited in mercy And the Moon shall be confounded c. that is the glory of the Church shall be such as the light of the Moon and
expresse in v. 4 5 6. shall be forced to let Jacob and Israel goe free The Lord will as it is v. 19. do a NEW THING which must properly signifie a thing never done afore to make way for their returne and liberty as it is expresse v. 19. c. before set downe at large Which wanton wits may endeavour to elude with Allegories and Phantasmes of their owne hatching which neither can convince a rationall Christian nor deliver the Jewes according to the intent of the Prophet Who though afore that their deliverance as in v. 22. c. they should not call upon God as they ought but should be weary of the Lord and should weary the Lord with their iniquities and therefore they are given up to the curse and to the reproach yet after these things as it followes in the 44. Chapter and first seven verses as an Antithesis to their said evill condition the Lord promiseth and the Prophet prophesieth it that they should have a glorious condition saying Yet now heare O Jacob my servant and ISRAEL whom I have chosen Thus saith the Lord that made thee c. Fear not O Jacob and thou Jesurun the name also of the twelve Tribes Deut. 32. I will poure water upon him that is thirsty and flouds upon the dry ground I will POUR MY SPIRIT upon thy seed and my blessing upon thine off-spring And they shall spring up among the grasse as willows by the water-courses One shall say I am the Lords and another shall call himselfe by the name of Jacob and another shall subscribe with his hand unto the Lord and surname himselfe by the name of Israel Thus saith the Lord the KING of Israel I am the first and I am the last Who as I shall CALL and declare it and SET IT IN ORDER for me since I appointed the ancient people and the things that ARE COMMING and SHALL COME § 5 Thus you see the present state of the Jewes as in the latter end of the former Chapter viz. sinfull and dolefull you see their names viz. Jacob Israel and Jesurun all names of the twelve Tribes you see what is meant by pouring water upon the thirsty viz. pouring out of the spirit you see what is meant by growing as willows by the water-courses viz. by the effusion of the Spirit multitudes shall own the Lord you see what Titles Christ hath of KING of ISRAEL and of FIRST and LAST which are his Titles when he prophesies of his visible Kingdome to be on earth repeated several times in the Revelation Now then deal ingeniously and compare the expressions with the Jewes condition for above these one thousand six hundred and fifty yeers to this very day and see then whether you can indeed and bonâ fide imagine that these Prophesies have been ever yet fulfilled or that it is proper or feisable that they should be fulfilled at the ultimate day of Doom SECT XIX THe tenth place in Isaiah is Chapter 45. v. 14. * Touching v. 14. to v. 22. I will onely insert Mr. Medes Notes in the margin because it came not timely enough to bee put into the Text Esaiae vaticinium cap. 45. a versu 14. deinceps in eodem Adventu secundo Christi implendum restatur Apostolus ad Rom. c. 14. v. 11. omnes enim inquit stabimus ante Tribunal Christi scriptum est enim nempe in hoc Esaiae vaticinio vivo ego dicit Dominus quoniam mihi flectetur omne genu omnis lingua confitebitur Deo Quod si haec Prophetiae pars in secundo Christi adventu in die nimirum Judicii adimplenda restet etiam reliqua eodem pertinere necesse est Est autem Prophetiae initium hujusmodi Sic dicit Dominus labor Aegypti negotiatio Cush Sabaeorum VIRORUM MENSURAE i. e. MERCATORUM 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 sic Targum quod mensuris utantur non MEN OF STATUR ad te O tu captiva vel O civitas mea transibunt tui erunt post te ambulabunt in compedibus ad te incurvabunt se te deprecabuntur dicentes Tantum in te Deus est non est alius praeter ipsum Deus In Hebraeo enim omnia haec pronomina sunt generis faeminini quare ad Cyrum referri nequeunt sed ad Jerusalem captivam de qua in versu praecedenti mentionem habuit quemque ad majorem rei evidentiam sic verterem ego suscitavi Cyrum in justitia omnes vias ejus dâ—â—gam Ipse aedificabit civitatem meam captivam meam 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 DIMITTET idque fine pretio muncre dicit Dominus exercitum Tunc sequuntur verba quae paulo ante recitavi Sic dicit Dominus labor Aegypti c. q. d. parum est quod reaedificaberis â—emitteris Imo vero magna re O captiva mea O civitas mea manet olim faelicitas Observandum est enim Dominum inde a fine versus undecimi espondere quasi interrogationi de Fatis filiorum fuorum juxra quod praemisit ventura interrogate me de filiis meis de operibus mamanuum earum praecipite mihi nempe ut narrem vobis quae futura sunt Thus far Mr. Mede By which it is most plaine that he thinks and shews for it great strength of reason that this place of Isa is to be understood of a glorious state of the Church to be on earth at Christs second coming to the end of the Chapter but specially verse 22 23 24 25. viz. verse 22. Looke unto me and be yee saved all the ends of the earth for I am God and there is none else 23. I have sworne by my selfe the word is gone out of my mouth in righteousnesse and shall not returne that unto me every knee shall bow every tongue shall swear 24. Surely shall one say in the Lord have I righteousnesse Heb. righteousnesses and strength even to him shall men come and all that are incensed against him shall be ASHAMED 25. In the Lord shall the seed of Israel bee justified and shall glory § 1 For those foure last verses of the Chapter this is that I have to say The Prophet having spoken to JACOB and ISRAEL v. 17 18 19. Israel shall be saved in the Lord with an everlasting salvation and shall not be ASHAMED nor confounded world without end for thus saith the Lord that created the Heavens and formed the earth hee hath created it not in vaine he formed it to be INHABITED which phrases Not ashamed c. and to be inhabited extend that everlasting salvation to comprehend a blessed salvation on earth too I have not spoken in secret in a darke place of the earth I said not to the seed of JACOB seek ye me in vaine I say the Prophet having spoken to Jacob and Israel names comprehending all twelve Tribes next he extends his speech more generally with them to all the Nations of the world v.
20 21. Assemble your selves and come draw neer together yee that are ESCAPED of the Nations Tell ye and bring them neer Look unto me and be saved all the ends of the earth c. as it follows in the words above described at large So that by the connexion it is evident that the words above quoted concerne both Jews and Gentiles § 2 The words are not onely a prescript and precept to all the ends of the earth which must needs include Jewes and Gentiles but also a Prophesie and Promise that all the ends of the earth shall look to the Lord for salvation expresse in saying Be ye saved And in the 23 verse I have sworne by my selfe unto me every knee shall bow and every tongue shall vow surely shall each one say in the Lord have I righteousnesse c. which is the plaine language of a promise and is confirmed in manner of a promise with that great confirmation Gods oath § 3 First for the two former verses viz. the 22 and 23 of looking to God and bowing the knee to him the Apostle applies them twice in the New Testament to that future submission and subjection that all the world shall yeeld to Jesus Christ long after his ascention 1 ¶ The first time is in Rom. 14. v. 8 9 10 11. Verse 8. Whether we live we live to the Lord and whether we dye we dye unto the Lord whether we live therefore or dye we are the Lords 9. For to this end Christ both dyed and rose and revived that he might be Lord both of the dead and living 10. But why dost thou judge thy brother c. wee shall all stand before the judgement seat of Christ For it is written as I live saith the Lord every knee shall bow to me and every tongue shall confesse to God In which words 1 It is plainly held forth that the Apostle proves Christs Lordship or Kingly-hood over ALL both dead and living by this place of Isa That every knee shall bow to the Lord. And that as God made Christ a Priest by an oath Psal 110. emphatically urged by the Apostle Heb. 7.20 c. so he makes him Lord and King by an oath in this place of Isaiah and so applied by our â—postle in this 14 of Rom. to signifie the certainty of the thing 2 That being delivered in the future tense it must signifie more then Christs spirituall Kingdome which he then had when Isaiah prophesied 3 That the Apostles mentioning after Christs ascention his Lordship over the dead and our standing at his judgement seat must signifie a state now after Christ is in heaven yet to come For he is not God of the dead but as they are living in soule in order to a resurrection as Christ himselfe expounds in the Evangelist 4 That this must be a state on earth before the ultimate Doom in that the Apostle out of the Prophet asserteth that all must bow to him either sincerely or at least seemingly which cannot be so cleerly understood to be feisable at the ultimate day of judgement which is the finall destruction of all not sincere to Christ and the time of Christs Resignation of all his power 1 Cor. 15. For the wicked to submit and perish in the same houre were little honour to Christ and a short time for all the world to confesse to him 5 That this is a kind of day of judgement that is the beginning or preface to the great and ultimate day of judgement at the beginning of the thousand yeers when Christ destroyes all the open obstinate wicked and sets up the Church into a glorious estate Rev. 19. latter end And Rev. 20. first six verses compare v. 8.9 c. And at this beginning or preface do all believers stand at the judgement seat of Christ Revel 11. v. 15. v. 18. Rev. 20. first six verses where they receive honour and rewards of grace and favour For according to our Apostle this bowing c. must be at SOME day of judgement But it cannot be at the ultimate finall and therefore afore at the beginning of the day of judgement viz. at the beginning of the thousand yeers 2 ¶ The second time of the Apostles application of this of Isaiah touching bowing to the submission of all unto Christ is Phil. 2 v. 8 9 10 11. Ver. 8. Being found in fashion as a man hee humbled himself and became obedient unto the death c. 9 Wherefore God also hath highly exalted him and given him a name which is above every name 10. That at the name of Jesus every knee should bow of things in heaven and things in EARTH and things under the Earth 11 And that every tongue should confesse that Jesus Christ is LORD to the glory of God the Father 1 By the quotation of the place out of Isaiah it is evident that the meaning of bowing the knee at the name of Jesus is to submit to the Lordly and Kingly power of Christ 2 Every knee both of things in heaven that is of Angels as they shall in speciall bee imployed in gathering the Church and setting up the glorious state thereof Rev. oft and in earth that is of all men and under the earth that is at Christs pleasure there shall bee no sea Rev. 21.1 must needs import a state on earth Which in the third particular is more confirmed That every tongue shall confesse that Jesus Christ is the LORD to the glory of God the Father § 4 Now this of Isaiah intended for salvation of Jews and Gentiles and as explained by the Apostle touching submission to and glorifying of Christ cannot comport with the ultimate doome As they were never yet fulfilled but rather most knees and tongues as of Turks Papists Heathens Socinians and all prophane persons whatsoever are against Christ to this day And therefore these things must have a time on earth before the ultimate judgement to bee fairely and effectually fulfilled § 5 As for the two last Verses of this 45 of Isaiah Viz. v. 24 and 25. I need no more but aske the question was that ever fulfilled which is there spoken that every knee and tongue shall come and say for so is the connexion especially according to the Hebrew Text surely in the Lord have I righteousnesse and strength Or that fulfilled there also expressed That ALL that are incensed against the Lord shall bee ashamed Or that fulfilled which is the close of all That in the Lord all the seed of Israel shall be justified and shall glory I say when ever were these fulfilled You have seen that the persons spoken of are Israel and Jacob comprehending all the seed of the twelve Tribes and all the ends of the earth of Gentiles and that the Apostle expounds The Lord by the Lord Christ Therefore I may boldly aske when ever were these fulfilled Surely to our sorrow that are Beleevers wee see the contrary of all these in the generality of all men Turks
Pagans Papists Atheists Hereticks and prophane persons And without multiplying words the very phrases will not admit of a referring these to the ultimate day of Doome And therefore must yet bee fulfilled on earth before that day SECT XX. § 1 THe eleventh place in Isaiah is Chap. 49. wholly But I shall need to touch only upon three or four places of the Chapter which will give light to all the rest In generall the chapter is of the bringing in of Jews and Gentiles into the Church The Jews are here named by the generall termes that comprehend at least the ten Tribes if not the whole twelve viz. by the names of Israel ver 3 5 6 7. and of Jacob ver 5. and of the Tribes of Jacob v. 6. and the preserved of Israel ibid. In way of distinction from whom the two Tribes are called Zion v. 14. So that all the twelve Tribes that came of Jacob are intended in this Chapter in the close whereof as a seal the Lord stiles himself Their Saviour their Redeemer the Mighty one of JACOB The Gentiles likewise are expressely named in v. 6. viz I will also give thee for a light to the Gentiles that thou mayest bee my salvation unto the ends of the earth quoted by the Apostle Act. 13.47 to prove the propagation of the Gospel for salvation to the Gentiles The concurrence of both Jews and Gentiles in coming in to Christ is expressed to the life ver 22 23. Thus saith the Lord God behold I will lift up my hand to the Gentiles and set up my standard to the people and they shall bring THY sons in their armes and thy daughters shall be carryed upon THEIR shoulders and KINGS shall be thy nursing Fathers and THEIR Queens shall be THY nursing Mothers c. Adde that the engagement of God that thus hee will call home both Jews and Gentiles v. 13.15 19 18 26. is great Sing O Heavens and be joyfull O Earth and break forth into singing O Mountains for God hath comforted his people and WILL have mercy on his afflicted Can a woman forget her sucking child that shee should not have compassion on the son of her womb c. Yet VVILL NOT I FORGET THEE Behold I have GRAVEN THEE upon the palmes of mine hands As I LIVE saith the Lord thou shalt surely cloathe thee with them all that oppose thee as with an ornament c. And ALL FLESH shall know that I the Lord am the Mighty one of Jacob. § 2 These being premised let us but only put the question upon some Verses whether ever they were yet fully fulfilled and that will be sufficient to ingenuous reason to confesse they must yet be fulfilled and that on earth § 3 VVhen was the seventeenth verse ever fulfilled viz. Thy children shall make hasle thy destroyers and they that made thee waste shall goe out of thee VVe read no such thing at their return from Babylon but that there were the crew of Sanballat Tobiah c. that opposed them Anon Alexander the Great the Grecian Monarch enters Jerusalem After him Antiochus Epiphanes alias Epimanes King of Syria wasteth it After these the Romans conquer it And now the Turks ever since possesse it § 4 And when ever yet was the nineteenth verse fulfilled viz. Thy waste and desolate places and the land of thy destruction shall even now be too narrow by reason of the Inhabitants and they that swallowed thee up shall be far away Surely since the carrying away captive of the ten Tribes the Kingdomes of Israel and Judah were never full of their owne Inhabitants We never read that ever the Assyrians Babylonians Cutheans c. which the King of Assyria sent into the Kingdome of Israel 2 Kings 17.24 were sent for home againe Nor that ever those CALDEANS that were sent to governe Judea intimated in 2 King 25. were recalled And for after times as we have hinted afore when the Greek went out the Syrian came in when the Syrian went out the Roman came in when the Roman went the Turke came in and there he is to this day These expulsing one another there hath been a constant succession of them that swallowed up the twelve Tribes Their wasters and destroyers have been changed but have not been sent forth far away from Israel and Judah § 5 Againe did the Gentiles and Peoples ever yet as v. 22. bring the sonnes and daughters of the Jewes in their armes and upon their shoulders If we should wave the litterall sense of setling the Jews in their owne Land and condescend to a spirituall sense of the generality of the Gentiles compliance with the generality of the Jewes in matters of Religion and union into the universall Church wee cannot tell when ever this was done to this day § 6 Nor can we say that ever the Kings of the Gentiles as it is v. 23. and their Queens have been nursing fathers and mothers to the Jewes and bowing downe to them Alas poore Jewes they have ever since the beginning of the Grecian Monarchy long before Christ downe to this very day been under the awing power of the Gentiles and mostly used hardly and in most places of the world instead of reverence have been and are much villified Therefore John in Revelation tels us that this is yet to come and to be fulfilled upon earth afore the ultimate day of judgement as the circumstances of things and the phrases of the Prophesie necessarily require Rev. 21. v. 24.26 And the Kings of the EARTH doe bring their glory and honour into New Jerusalem And they shall bring the glory and honour of the NATIONS into it And yet so as there shall in no wise enter into it any thing that defileth c. § 7 Wee are likewise utterly to seek when ever yet the 25. and 26. verses were fulfilled viz. The captives of the mighty shall be taken away and the prey of the terrible shall be delivered for I will contend with him that contendeth with thee and I will save thy children and will feed them that oppresse thee with their owne flesh and they shall be drunken with their owne blood Wee know not of any such thing since the captivity of the Jewes in Babylon in all Histories divine and humane that thus the Jewes were saved by such destruction of their enemies The Jews indeed soon after their captivity made some attempts 2 King 25. v. 25. After that they made some attempts in 1 Book of Macchab And after that they made severall attempts in the time of Titus and Adrian Roman Emperours And since that the Turk hath dominered over them the Kings of the Gentiles especially of England have made some attempts of warre on their enemies managed by the stocke counsell and aide of severall religious orders for that end as of the Templars Knights of the Rhodes or of John of Jerusalem and of the Knights of Malta alias Melita But all these attempts have not amounted to Isaiahs phrase
shall become the Lords and his Christs Rev. 11.15.18 ¶ 3. Further what prerogative and advancement had it been for the Kingdome of Christ SPIRITUAL to have broken down ☞ the Selcucidae and other Horns of the Greeke Empire as long as another Kingdome the Kingdom of the Romans succeeded in their place to beate downe the Church by the Heathen Emperors and Antichrist for longer space of time and with greater and more terrible persecution then ever before § 7 Contrarily I affirme that the legges feet and toes of the iron doe signifie the Roman Kingdome 1. Because it is represented by a distinct mettall coming after the Brazen belly and thighes which is the Grecian For no other distinct Monarchy came after the Grecian but this as History doth shew 2. Because t is stronger then all the rest and breaketh them in peeces Dan. 2.40 3. The Iron legs and feet are parallell with the Iron teeth of the fourth Beast which signifies the Roman Kingdome Dan. 7.7 4. The ten toes representing the ten Kings are accordingly a character of the Roman Kingdome Revel 12.3 and 13.1 and 17.12 5. T is such a Kingdome as must stand to be destroyed by the Kingdome of the Saints in the end of time and therefore can be no other ☜ then the Roman Kingdome yet continuing under Antichrist § 8 The Stone is the Kingdome of the Saints as it is interpreted Dan. 2.44.45 with chap. 7.26 27. ☜ And that is the Kingdome to be set up at the fall of Antichrist as it appeareth by these reasons 1. Because it shal be set up to destroy all adverse Kingdoms in the world which cannot be expected til about the time of the fal of Antichrist ☜ 2. It shall not rise till about the sounding of the seventh Trumpet which is the time of the fall of Antichrist Revel 11.15 16 17. 3. Then and not before it shall fill all the earth ver 34 35.44 45. that is all Kingdoms shall be subject unto it chap. 7.26 27. compare Rev. 11.15 Thus Mr. Parker to whom in the maine and generall of his matter I assent § 9 In the last place let us hear Mr. Archer speak in his fore-cited book p. 7. 8. And then I shall take my turne The fourth Monarchy saith he was that of the Romans which because it began farre lower then the rest viz. more Westward and yet rose as high Eastward as the highest of the former therefore it became a mightier Monarchy then all the three former This is expressed in this second of Daniel by legges of Iron because it was the strongest of all and subdued all under it But in processe of time the body of the world which it bore up being so great to which it was a leg it divided it selfe into two legges viz. the Easterne and Westerne Monarchy Which yet though divided was as strong as Iron and held all Nations under them But in processe of time fell into feet and toes The Eastern Monarchy was swallowed up by the Turke the Westerne fell into divers Kingdomes But among these sub-divided Kingdomes was strength and weaknesse the feet being part of iron and part of clay And much mingling there shall be amongst them to re-joyne the Kingdomes into one body some whereof are weak and some strong as iron and clay but never shall be as Iron cannot be mixed with clay The Spaniards and Austrians of Spaine and Germany and other Nations of Europe some of which are strong and some weake have sought by marriages and other covenants to mingle and re-joyne themselves into one Monarchy but it shall never bee as we cannot mingle iron and clay But in the period and up-shot of their Soveraignty and Monarchy they shall remaine distinct Kingdomes as Feete and Toes of Iron and Clay partly weake and partly strong § 10 Now in the dayes of this Roman Monarchy this fourth Western Monarchy there shall be a stone cut out without hands which shall ruine these Kingdomes smiting the Image on the feet of iron and clay and so swallow up the whole image all the fore-going Monarchies being brought under it and by it to nothing And it becomes a Monarchy over the whole earth where ever the former Monarchies had ruled ver 35. That is as it is explained ver 44 45. a Kingdome which that stone shall obtaine set up by the hand of the God of Heaven Whereas the other Kingdomes or Monarchies were erected by men on earth though permitted and ordered by God This Kingdome or Monarchy shall swallow up in it all fore-going Monarchies And this is a FIFT Monarchy which shall arise in the world after the former foure which is meant of a state of Christs Kingdome as appeares by severall reasons ¶ 1. Marke it is called a Stone as Christ is the cheife corner stone which the builders refused 1 Pet. 2. v. 3. c. to 8. ¶ 2. Againe it is a stone not in hand or cut out without hands Because God shall reare up this Kingdome As touching Mr. Archers words of Gods rearing up this Kingdome without hands of humane helpe I cannot insert or assent to while I stick at that place in Daniel chap. 12. ver 1. c. that when Michael shall stand up to deliver his people meaning the great and generall deliverance of the Jewes from temporall and spirituall captivity there shall be a great time of trouble such as there never was since it was a Nation even to that same time Insomuch that many of the Jewes afore as it were a sleep in the dust or as dead men in their forlorne hopelesse and helplesse condition shall now at Christs appearance awake and stand up for the cause of their deliverance yet some of them shall fall off to their everlasting shame According to which there is a double period of time relating to their deliverance mentioned in the eleventh and twelfth verses of that chapter as if it should begin at one thousand two hundred and ninety yeares after the ceasing of the daily sacrifice but they onely should be blessed that wait and come to the one thousand three hundred thirty and fifth year which is forty five years after But of the full meaning of this place to this sence and the demonstration thereof we shal hear after in our last place of Daniel This I confesse and I can freely conceive that whereas the Church of Christ is that stone that Kingdome of Christ as Mr. Mede Mr. Huet and Mr. Parker have afore well expressed or hinted so Christs call of the residue of the Church into the state of grace at the great and last bringing in of the Jewes shall be so immediately and suddenly done by Christ himselfe by his appearing in the clouds and such like extraordinary wayes as in the birth of a Nation at once as the Prophet describes their call that there shall not be used for ought I know the Ministry of mens preaching to that end ¶ 3. It s
duration saith Mr. Archer that it shall last for ever shewes that it is meant of Christs Kingdome We people saith he shall swallow it up as they have done all other Monarchies The Babylonian was left to the Medes and Persians and this to the Grecians and the Grecian to the Romans But this shall be left to none but shall be for ever Dan. 2.44 that is to the worlds end But the Kingdome at the Worlds end shall be Christs for at the last end of all he gives it up to the Father 1 Cor. 15.24 Therefore till then and at that time when ALL ENDS he hath the Kingdom Christs SPIRITUALL Kingdome and his PROVIDENTIALL were before this time Therefore that which is to begin when these Monarchies end must be Christs Monarchy wherefore from this prophesie we learne that Christ shall have a MONARCHICALL STATE ON EARTH and a VISIBLE KINGDOME as other Monarches had swallowing up or causing to vanish all other Monarchies as the latter Monarchies did the former Thus Mr. Archer to whom in the bulk and sum with the explanation afore I assent § 10 By this you have seen some of my good company in this point consenting with me upon the strong reasons they have produced how deduceable our position in the main is out of this Chapter I shall not need to adde any thing by way of argument but only a few words for further explanation of this prophesie ¶ 1. Note how aptly and appositely this fift Monarchy this Monarchy of Christ that is Christ the Monarch and the Christian Church the Saints his Monarchy is compared unto a Stone cut out of the Mountaine c. We know that Christ is often called or typified by a rocke or Stone Matth. 16.18 1 Cor. 10.4 quoted out of Moses Numb 20.8 And the Church is compared to an house built on or in a rocke Matth. 7. Matth. 16. and Zech. 3.7 seven eyes upon one stone is saith Junius the Church built on Christ ¶ 2. Some stone as the Adamant that cannot be filed is harder then iron and an huge stone of any sort falling from a Mountaine will breake the iron that is under it much more the iron that is mixed with clay So Christ and his Church shall make up a Monarchy that shall be too hard and weighty for the fourth the Roman Empire or Monarchy that brake the rest to beare Matth. 21.42 44. Did yee never read in the Scriptures The STONE which the builders rejected is become the head of the corner whosoever shall fall on this STONE Christ shall be broken but on whomsoever it shall FALL it will grind him to powder Zech. 12.3 And in that day I will make Jerusalem a BURDENSOME STONE for all peoples all that burthen themselves with it shall be CUT IN PEECES though all the people of the earth bee gathered together against it ¶ 3. T is said the Stone was CUT out of the mountaine WITHOUT HANDS but withall it is said It SMOTE as a STONE against the Image and as a STONE it brake the MATTER of the Iron and Clay Whence I cannot conceive otherwise but though Christ the Monarch was conceived without man by the Holy Ghost c. and his Church his Monarchy both Jewes and Gentiles is and shall be effectually called and regenerated by the same holy Spirit without humane help yet Christ and his Church shall by a visible hand of power dash in peeces the fourth Monarchy the Roman Pope and his Armies Territories and Powers and the Turke and his which sprang out of the Roman as is afore demonstrated I say shall dash it in peeces by a visible hand of power Dan. 12. Rev. 16. Rev. 19. ¶ 4. The meaning of the continuance of this Monarchy of Christ for ever doth not signifie as if it should never have any end as if Christ should never lay downe all his power of regiment for the contrary is expresse in 1 Cor. 15.24.28 but the meaning is this 1. That it shall never be DESTROYED verse 44. of this second of Daniel that is it shall not end with a devastation and desolation as the former Monarchies did 2. It shall not be LEFT TO OTHER PEOPLE ibid. ver 44. that is other people shall never succeed the Saints or Church of Christ to possesse this fift Monarchy as another people successively succeeded and possessed the other Monarchies by turnes the Medes and Persians took the Assyrio-Chaldean and so down-ward 3. That it shall STAND FOR EVER that is as is explained in that same 44. verse this shall continue when the other Monarchies shall be broken to peeces 4. That the end of this Monarchy of Christ so farre as it may have an end is onely formally of the power or mode of government by Christ he resigning his power to God himselfe 1 Cor. 15.24 28. not materially for the Saints shall continue for ever eternally happy under the wing of the beatificall vision of God himselfe ¶ 5. This visible Kingdome or Monarchy of Christ is to follow the rest in an immediate order and succession of naturall time and in the same physicall place of or upon the Earth as when and where the former having existed their terme were exterminated For if this Monarchy of Christ succeeded onely in eternity in the Empyrean highest Heaven It can bee said no more to succeed the said foure Monarchies as Daniel would by all meanes have it then it succeeded any other Empire or Kingdome on Earth especially those that were contemporary with these foure aforesaid Monarchies yet not subject to them as some such there were all the time of their duration * This last clause of some Kingdome extant in the time of the four Monarchies yet no subject to them is also asserted by Mr. Mede and t is confirmed by Hist and exper SECT XXXVI THE next place in Daniel for our Thesis is in chapter the seventh throughout From whence saith Mr. Mede †Viâ—e Mr. Mede Diatrib par 4. p. 420. as from the mother Text of Scripture the CHURCH OF THE JEWS grounded the name and expected the great Day of Judgement ** What he means by the great Day of Judgement see by and by at the 2 ☞ with the circumstances thereof and whereunto almost all the descriptions and expressions thereof in the New Testament have reference For in the Vision of this seventh of Daniel we have a SESSION OF JUDGEMENT when the fourth BEAST CAME to be DESTROYED Where we see the great ASSISES represented after the manner of the great SYNEDRION or CONSISTORIE OF ISRAEL Wherein the PATER JUDICII the Father of the Judicatory had his ASSESSORES his Assistants or Assessors sitting upon seates semi-circle-wise before him from his right hand to his left I BEHELD saith DANIEL verse 9. TILL THE THRONES OR SEATS WERE PITCHED DOWN * Vulg lat Donec Throni positi sunt LXX and Theodot 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The Chal. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 fic 〈◊〉
by David mentioned Isai 55. and Psal 16. is signified Christ Nor shall David return again till the Physical Corporal Resurrection of the Saints before which must precede the Metaphorical Resurrection that is the call of the Jews at least five and forty years afore as we have before proved upon Daniel chap. 12. So this returning of Israel here meant is not onely from captivity but from sin as is plain by that which follows They shall fear the Lord and his goodness Fear here as commonly throughout the Scriptures being put for all the inward graces and worship of God in the heart as to trust in him rejoyce in him love him c. and that for his goodness that is in through and for Christ who as he is called the wisdom of God 1 Cor. 1. And the Word of God Joh. 1. c. so he is the Goodness of God because God is not cannot in justice be communicative of his goodness unto the lapsed sons of Adam but in and through Christ Tit. 3.4 5 6. § 6 Which things being so they speak of themselves that they were never yet fulfilled according to the purport of the Text. For the generality of Israel and Judah too are to this day without a King without a Prince without a Priest without a Sacrifice that ceasing at least ever since three hundred sixty and six Nor have they instead of those Princes Priests and Sacrifices sought the Lord their God and David that is Christ their King to fear the Lord and his goodness as hath been afore expounded And for the last day of Judgement that is no time for Conversions of souls and reversions from captivity Therefore this prophesie in the main of it is yet to be fulfilled Thus of Hosea SECT XL. NExt we come to the Prophet Joel The first place in him is Chap. 2. v. 28 29 30 31 32 33. Verse 28. And it shall come to pass afterwards that I will pour out my spirit upon ALL FLESH and your sons and your daughters shall prophesie your old men shall dream dreams your young men shall see visions Verse 29. And also upon the servants and upon the handmaids in those days will I pour out my Spirit Verse 30. And I will shew wonders in Heaven and in Earth Blood and Fire and Pillars of smoak Verse 31. The Sun shall be turned into darkness and the Moon into blood before that great and terrible day of the Lord come Verse 32. And it shall come to pass that whosoever shall call upon the name of the Lord shall be delivered For in Mount Zion and in Jerusalem shall be deliverance as the Lord hath said and in the REMNANT WHOM THE LORD SHALL CALL § 1 Note first in general touching the ALL of this Text that though Saint Peter in Acts 2. doth truly apply part thereof to the wonderful effusion of the Spirit there yet is it not solely applicable to that nor is the intent and meaning of the whole or of any part thereof wholly fulfilled and terminated therein And that I may not be condemned of singularity herein let me tell you what others hint to the same effect though they will not speak out to my size That antient pious and most learned Oecolampadius Publick Reader of Divinity at Basil above an hundred years since saith upon Verse 28. ET ERIT ubi illa impleri coeperint ubi Christ us nimirum sanguine suo faedus nostrum confirmaverit ubi a mortu is resurrexerit i. e. The things onely BEGAN to be fulfilled presently after the resurrection of Christ c. And that learned and ingenuous Alapide upon the same Verse POST HAEC i. e. Post Christum doctorem ejusque mortem ascensum in coelum ego Deus effundam Spiritum Sanctum in Pentecoste ac DEINCEPS primo ecclesiae seculo visibiliter in Apostolos Christi discipulos SEQUENTIBUS vero SECULIS invisibiliter cundem effundam in OMNES c. That is God did promise to pour out his Spirit after the Ascension of Christ in the dayes of Pentecost and so afterwards on the first age of the Church visibly in the succeeding ages invisibly upon all So that both these confess upon this first clause That this effusion of the Spirit prophesied by our Prophet was not fully fulfilled in Acts 2. where the Apostles quotes it And for those other passages in Verse 30 c. I will shew wonders in Heaven and on Earth Calvin confesseth Prophetam comprehendere totum Christi Regnum ab initio usque ad finem c. That is The Prophet here comprehends the whole Kingdom of Christ from the beginning to the end thereof And this is usual enough And in other places of Scripture we have shewed that the Prophets commonly so speak or so speak in common When therefore they speak of the Kingdom of Christ sometimes they touch upon the beginning thereof sometimes also they speak of the end thereof But often within one graspe or comprehension they design the whole course race or process of Christs Kingdom from first to last And so the Prophet doth here Thus Calvin with much more to that purpose Alapide likewise on this thirtieth and one and thirtieth Verse deals very plainly and ingenuously with the Text and with us opposing those of his own Religion The Catholicks saith he think that these prodigious signs came to pass 1. At the Nativity of Christ when the star appeared to the wisemen and the Angels appeared to the Shepherds 2. At Christs passion when the Sun was eclipsed the Earth trembled the graves opened the beholders astonished 3. At Christs Resurrection in the appearance of the Angel astonishing the Soldier that kept the Sepulchre and comforted Mary Magdalen and her company 4. At the Pentecost in the cloven tongues of fire at which time the Spirit was poured out This Exposition saith Alapide is probable but incompleat Then indeed began these wonders but shall be compleated a little afore the day of Judgement as I shall declare by and by On the otherside Saint Jerom and Oecumenius saith Alapide hold That these prodigies were acted a little afore the destruction of Jerusalem by Titus But lastly and genuinly it is certain That here are handled the prodigious prognosticks that shall precede the day of judgement which appears from the beginning of the next Chapter Thus Alapide Adde one more Lyra saith Doctor Mayer averts that in this thirtieth Verse The Prophet passeth from the first coming of Christ to his second before which these signs shall be shewed Thus you see I am not singularly bold to assert that this Scripture was not totally and finally fulfilled in that story Acts 2. And Peter himself tacitly intimates as much in translating the Prophets 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 afterward by 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 In the last days which must not exclude One thousand six hundred and twenty years succeeding reckoning from Christs Ascension but to our time And our Prophet drops some passages which
to this day falls far shorter of the fulnesse of the Gentiles coming in and therefore shorter yet of the Saving all Israel as the Apostles phrases are Rom. 11 We have it from day to day before our eies that not one of ten Christians hardly is more then called a Christian and not one Jew of ten thousand bears the name of a Christian And therefore in this first branch this place of Ioel is not in the main yet fulfilled 2. This of this second of Ioel is not yet fulfilled That at the time the Prophet mainly means there must be such wonders in Heaven and in Earth as must be accompanied with blood and fire and pillars of smoake and such a darkning of the Sun and discolouring of the Moon c. As all these things must amount to the making up of a GREAT and TERRIBLE DAY OF THE LORD And that in relation to the destruction of them that believe not so as to call upon God in faith as the last verse intimateth Whosoever shall call upon the Name of the Lord shall be saved And the destruction shall be especially of those unbelievers that are enemies to the Jews as the same last verse of this second Chapter and the first and second verses of the third Chapter do evidently hint For in Mount Zion and in Jerusalem shall be deliverance as the Lord hath said and in the remnant whom the Lord shall call For behold in THOSE DAYES and in THAT TIME when I shall bring again the captivity of JUDAH and JERUSALEM I will also gather ALL NATIONS and will bring them down to the valley of Jehoshaphat and will PLEAD with them there for my people and for my heritage ISRAEL whom they have scattered For by the wonders at the passion of Christ Matth. 27. there was no destruction of any man At the effusion of the Spirit after his ascension Acts 2. There was nothing but consolation or at least admiration At the destruction of Jerusalem by Titus according to Matth. 24. there was the sad destruction of the Jews but of none of the Jews enemies 3. This of this prophesie of Joel is not yet fully fulfilled viz. In Mount Zion and in Jerusalem shall be deliverance AS THE LORD HATH SAID and in the remnant whom the Lord shall call For this was not compleated in the few Jews converted in the Acts or since as these Reasons induce me to think 1. The Apostle Peter in Acts the second quoting Joel makes not the least mention of this clause 2. Christs coming to Jerusalem as a Spiritual Deliverer in his publick ministration of the Gospel was before that of pouring out of the Spirit about five years as his disputing with the Doctors was two and twenty years before and his incarnation above four and thirty years afore But the deliverance mentioned according to the Apostles method yea and of the Prophets is after the pouring out of the Spirit And indeed follows after as naturally as the effect succeeds the cause This pouring out of the Spirit fitting instruments for the salvation of those ages 3. The Prophet addes as the Lord hath said viz. By his Prophets But they mainly spake of the Jews corporal deliverance as we have before opened in the discuss of many places For as for spiritual they then had it and there was no doubt but it should be continued in all ages else the Church would be extinct or Gods Covenant with Abraham and David would fail 4. The Deliverance must be not onely in Jerusalem but in the remnant whom the Lord shall call But Christ did not at his being on Earth save the generality of the remnant either corporally or spiritually The Two Tribes were then under the Roman captivity and they generally refused Christ John 1.11 Acts 13.46 47. and for the Ten Tribes they for the generality neither saw nor heard Christ but continued in their captivity in Assyria c. 1 Pet. 1.1 Jam. 1.1 They were not returned to Zion or Jerusalem and for the Gentiles if any will make them of the remnant which is hatsh being the greater part of the world they and the Jews were never yet incorporated in Religion as the copulative And promiseth viz. There shall be deliverance in those days and at that time in Jerusalem AND in the remnant whom the Lord shall call 5. The Prophet Joel speaks of such a deliverance of the Jews as shall be by bringing down their enemies to the valley of destruction to them though of salvation to the Jews as the next Chapter vers 1 2 c. shews But this hath not been yet fulfilled as was touched afore neither can it be fulfilled at the last judgement For that being once come there is no effectual salvation or invocation as the last verse of the second Chapter mentions SECT XLI THe second and last place we shall touch in this Prophet Joel is Chap. 3. v. 1 c. to the end of the Chapter For behold in § 1 those days and in that time when I shall bring again the captivity of Judah and Jerusalem 2. I will also gather all Nations and will bring them down into the valley of Jehoshaphat and will plead with them there for my people and for my heritage Israel whom they have scattered among the Nations and parted my Land 3. And they have cast lots for my people and have given a Boy for a Harlot and sold a Girle for Wine that they might drink 4. Yea and what have ye to do with me O Tyre and Zidon and all the coasts of Palestine will ye render me a recompence and if ye recompence me swiftly and speedily will I return your recompence upon your own head 5. Because ye have taken my silver and my gold and have carried into your Temples my goodly pleasant things 6. The children also of Judah and the children of Jerusalem have ye sold unto the Grecians that ye might remove them far from their border 7. Behold I will raise them â—ut of the place whither ye have sold them and will return your recompence upon your own head 8. And I will sell your sons and your daughters into the hand of the children of Judah and they shall sell them to the Sabeans to a people far off for the Lord hath spoken it 9. Proclaim ye this among the Gentiles prepare war wake up the mighty men let all the men of war draw near let them come up 10. Beat your plough-shares into swords and your pruning-hooks into spears let the weak say I am strong 11. Assemble your selves and come all ye heathen and gather your selves together round about Thither cause thy mighty ones to come down O Lord. 12. Let the Heathen be wakened and come up to the valley of Jehoshaphat for there will I sit to judge all the Heathen round about 13. Put ye in the sickle for the harvest is ripe Come get you down for the oress is full the fats overflow for the wickedness is great
14. Multitudes multitudes in the valley of decision for the day of the Lord is near in the valley of decision 15. The Sun and the Moon shall be darkned and the Stars shall withdraw their shining 16. The Lord shall roar out of Zion and utter his voice from Jerusalem and the Heavens and the Earth shall shake but the Lord will be the hope of his people and the strength of the children of Israel 17. So shall ye know that I am the Lord your God dwelling in Zion my holy Mountain then shall Jerusalem be holy and here shall no stranger pass thorough her any more 18. And it shall come â—o pass in that day that the mountains shall drop down new wine and the hills shall flow with milk and all the rivers of Judah shall flow with waters and a fountain shall come forth of the house of the Lord and shall water the valley of Shittim 19. Egypt shall be a desolation and Edom shall be a desolate wilderness for the violence against the children of Judah because they have shed innocent blood in their Land 20. But Judah shall dwell for ever and Jerusalem from generation to generation 21. For I will cleanse their blood that I have not cleansed for the Lord dwelleth in Zion This as it follows close at the heels of the former place so notwithstanding mens chapter-divisions hath it a great coherence with it Calvin upon this third Chapter verse 1 2. tell us in the general Confirmat his verb is Propheta quod prius docuit de Ecclesiae RESTITUTIONE i. e. The Prophet in these words confirms what before he had taught concerning the RESTITUTION of the Church More particularly let me tell you That the most if not the all of the former place in the second Chapter is again mentioned in this third Chapter and with four great emphases of connexion both sounding of confirmation and explanation of what had been said before 1. FOR Hebrew 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Chalde 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Septuagint 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 As if the Lord should say I bring this for a proof that I will do as I have said 2. BEHOLD Hebrew 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Chalde 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Septuagint 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 As much as to say There shall be some notable thing done some grand event as an eminent sign that I will be as good as my word 3. IN THOSE DAYES and AT THAT TIME with great emphasis of Pronouns and Articles both in Hebrew Chalde and Septuagint Hebrew 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Chalde 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Septuagint 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which sound to this effect That methodically and in a just order when I do the former things I will do these following also so that the plurality and magnificence of exploits shall force the eyes of men to see my truth and true performance of all that I have spoken 4. I will in pursuance of that deliverance of my people mentioned in the former Chapter Gather all Nations to the valley of Jehoshaphat and will plead with them there for my people which amounts justly to thus much for our present observation That the famous remarkable circumstances as before of time so here of place shall be undeniable witnesses of the substance of my true performance For as the great Philosopher saith Many common accidents concurring may amount to a proprium quarto modo to an infallible property and so to a demonstration And we know that circumstances of time and place c. beget in us great credence to a report That such a thing was done Thus for the coherence of this place with the former § 2 Next for the substance of this place in order to our point take notice in the entrance That the people that shall according to this prophesie be delivered are named in the first verse Judah and the Inhabitants of Jerusalem signifying the Two Tribes In the second verse and verse sixteen they are called his heritage Israel and the scattered among all Nations which most aptly set forth the Ten Tribes who of the Kingdome of Israel became the greatest dispersion among all Nations far beyond those of Iudah And the deliverance of both is so expressed in the Hebrew Chalde and Septuagint that the words may well be extended to a spiritual conversion of their souls from infidelity beside the corporal deliverance of their persons from captivity as many Translaters render it And for confirmation observe That whereas in Hosea chap. 1. the Lord calls them speaking of both the said Kingdoms of the Iews Lo-ammi NOT MY PEOPLE and Lo-ruhamah I WILL NOT HAVE MERCY viz. Whiles they are to be in captivity where for the general they lost their piety as well as their liberty in not receiving Christ and his Gospel from thence to this day Behold here in this Text of Joel the Lord speaking of their deliverance expresseth it in relation and to the effect of receiving them at their return as his people and to be his heritage v. 2. For surely if God did justly for their great wickedness carry them away captive he had little reason to receive them from thence if they were no better then when they went Put now all together and all plainly spells that this first clause of the deliverance of Judah and Israel hath not been fulfilled to this day according to the sence before demonstrated which will clearly appear by the rest that follows § 3 For in the next place we are to observe that this must not bee a meer still and tacit deliverance of the Jewes but withall a tumultuous destruction of their Enemies that formerly caused their bondage and with-held their deliverance ver 2. I will gather all Nations and being them down into the Valley of Jehosaphat and plead with them there or my people c. Which last clause the Chalde renders 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. And I will take vengeance on them there for my people which is much further amplified in ver 9 10 11 12. c. The valley of Jehosaphat is particularly named here as the place where God will avenge his people 1. Because there Jehosaphat overthrew the Ammonites and Moabites and their Confederates that rose up against the Jewes 2 Chron. 20.22 c. 2. Jehosaphat signifies pleading or judging viz. the thing that God will doe upon the incorrigible enemies that yet remaine ver 12. 3. Because this is also called the valley of Beracha that is the valley of blessing Because there Jehosaphat blessed and praised God first in hope of the said Victory Secondly for helpe in the said Victory 2 Chron. 20.22 compare ver 16. 4. Because this is called the valley of decision or threshing twice in this fourteenth verse of this third of Joel because there God threshed his Enemies as the chaffe from the wheat according to Isai 25.10 and thereby decided the controversie between the Jewes and their Enemies viz. that the Jewes should
have the mastery not their enemies But though the valley of Jehosaphat be here named by these names yet they are to be understood in intent and meaning appellatively in a larger sence as is most safe to signifie and typifie any eminent place or places where the Lord shall overthrow the incurable enemies of the beleeving Jewes For first Let any reasonable Hebrician looke into the original and he shall plainly perceive that the holy Ghost useth the name Jehosaphat onely as a Paranomasia I will bring them into the valley 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. As if we should say in English I will bring them down to the valley of Jehosaphat and there I will Jehosaphatize them that is overthrow them as Jehosaphat did his enemies Secondly Let any rational man judge whether Jehosaphat as a proper name of a place in Judea doth signifie that there and there onely God will judge the enemies of the beleeving Jewes when as their enemies are scated in every place where the Jews are scattered and those enemies shall oppose them and the beleeving Gentiles that shall help in their returne where-ever they stirre to that end Yet I contend not but that that very place may be one where of some notable overthrow of some cheife enemies of the Jewes as of the Arabians Saracens and Turkes that shall enter into the Holy Land to hinder the Jewes sitting downe and settling there Now this clause of the Prophet Joel in this third chapter was never yet fulfilled since the first Assyrio-Chaldean captivity of Israel or Iudah For the Prophet gives us a sign that this is to be done after the Jewes are sold to the Grecians The Hebrew 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in its first originall sence and use signifies to yeeld up and deliver up And so the Septuagint renders it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which most commonly as the composition of the word requires signifies to yeeld up or to deliver up into another mans jurisdiction and power And this transmitting of the Jews from their Native Country to Graecia seems to be charged upon several Nations who handed them from one to another vers 2 3 4 5. But the Greeks came not to any considerable repute power and jurisdiction till above two hundred years after the beginning of the Second viz. The Medo-Persian Monarchy Since which time the Jews were never delivered according to the character of the Text viz. By a destruction of their enemies and to such an effect and degrees as that no stranger should pass through Jerusalem any more verse 12 13 14 15 16 17. For we know the contrary by History Experience and sight of our own eyes in our travells § 4 The opening of this destruction of the Jews enemies at their deliverance and the collation of their happy condition when delivered will yet further demonstrate that this prophesie of Joel in this third Chapter is not yet in the main to this very day fulfilled ¶ 1. The destruction of their enemy must be very formidable v. 14 15 16 19. Multitudes multitudes in the valley of decision for the day of the Lord is near in the valley of decision the Sun and the Moon shall be darkned and the Stars shall withdraw their shining The Lord also shall roar out of Zion and utter his voice from Jerusalem and the Heavens and the Earth shall shake Egypt shall be a desolation and Edom shall be a desolate wilderness c. ¶ 2. On the otherside the happy condition of the Jews shall be as glorious as their enemies destruction shall be miserable which is interchangably enterwoven within the same verses the better to minde us that they both concur to the same time and in that method that the ruines of the enemy is the rise of the Jews Vers 16. But the Lord will be the hope of his people and the strength of the children of ISRAEL V. 17. So shall ye know that I am the Lord your God dwelling in Zion my holy Mountain then shall Jerusalem be HOLY and there SHALL NO STRANGERS PASS THROUGH HER ANY MORE V. 18. And it shall come to pass in that day that the Mountains shall drop down new Wine and the Hills shall flow with milk c. V. 20. Judah shall dwell FOR EVER and Jerusalem from GENERATION to GENERATION You see here in this Chapter a corporal destruction of all the Nations that irreconcileably oppose the Jews You see the happy condition of the Jews following thereupon to be expresly both temporal and spiritual and you see it set forth with most ample extension both for latitude and length Need I now upon things so plain spend six sentences to declare this was never yet fulfilled to the Jews since their first captivity in Babylon to this day Surely if the succeeding Monarchy punished the preceding they did withal keep the Jews under their subjection and so from Assyrians to Medes and Persians from them to the Grecians and thence to the Romans and so to the Saracens and Turks to this time the Jews have been more or less under forreign power and not a free people much less so happy or their enemies so miserable as hath been described Lastly If we mark some references of this third of Joel made § 5 by the Apostles themselves in the New Testament we shall beyond all dispute of them that believe the New Testament clear it That the prophesies of this Chapter are not yet fulfilled ¶ 1. Consider how exactly the thirteenth verse c. of this Chapter of Ioel is repeated and applied Rev. 14.15 16 17 18 19 20. to the ruine of Antichrist Put ye in saith Ioel in this third Chapter v. 13. the sickle for the Harvest is ripe come get you down for the press is full the fats overflow for their wickedness is great And then follows expresly the destruction of the enemies of the Jews as we before repeated Sutably Saint Iohn saith in the said place of the Revelation An Angel came out of the Temple crying with a loud voice to him that sate on the cloud thrust in thy sickle and reap for the time is come for thee to reap for the Harvest of the Earth is ripe And he that sate on the cloud thrust in his sickle on the Earth and the Earth was reaped And another Angel came out of the Temple which is in Heaven he also having a sharp sickle And another Angel came out from the Altar which had power over fire and cryed with a loud voice Cry to him that had the sharp sickle saying Thrust in thy sickle and gather the clusters of the Vine of the Earth for her grapes are fully ripe And the Angel thrust in his sickle into the Earth and gathered the Vine of the Earth and cast it into the great Wine-press of the wrath of God and the Wine-press was troden without the City and blood came out of the Wine-press even unto to the horse-bridles by the space
second coming as John Baptist was at his first For to the Jews alone is this Elias promised and not to the Gentiles and John Baptist wee know the Elias of his first coming preached to them alone It is well known that all the Fathers unlesse S. Hierome somewhat staggered were of this opinion and why we should so wholly reject it as we are wont to do I can see no sufficient reason For if the Fathers erred concerning the person and other circumstances of this Elias yet it follows not but the substance of their opinion might bee true As we know also they erred concerning the person quality and reign of Antichrist and yet for the substance the thing was true Our Saviour rejected not the tradition of the Scribes concerning the coming of this Elias when the Apostles objected it though it were mingled with some falshood but corrected it onely for they looked for Elias the Thisbite but our Saviour admits it only of Elias in Spirit not of Elias in person so yeelding it true for the substance though erring in circumstance so should we doe in the like case For hee that throwes away what he findes because t is foule and dirty may perchance sometimes cast away a Jewell or a peece of gold or silver so hee that wholly rejects an ancient Tenet because it hath some errour annexed to it may unawares cast away a Truth as this seemes to be of an Elias to be the Harbinger of Christs second comming And that for these reasons First Though the prophecy of Esaias The voice of one crying in the wildernesse prepare yee the way of the Lord make his paths straight alledged by all the four Evangelists and by John himselfe seems appliable onely to the first coming of Christ yet the other out of Malachi expresly quoted by St. Marke and by our Saviour Mat. 11 though elsewhere alluded unto seemes by Malachi himself to be applyed not onely to the first coming of Christ but also to his second coming to judgement For in his last chapter speaking of the coming of that day which shall burne like an oven wherein all the pround yea and all that doe wickedly shall be as stubble and it shall burne them up leaving neither root nor branch c. he addeth Behold saith the Lord I will send you Elijah the Prophet before the coming of that great and terrible day of the Lord and he shall turn or restore the heart of the fathers to their children and the heart of the children to their fathers lest I come and smite the earth with a curse If you wil not admit the day here described to be the day of judgement I know scarce any description of that day in the old Testament but we may elude For the phrase of turning or as I had rather translate it restoring as the LXX 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the heart of the fathers to the children and the heart of the children to their fathers the meaning is that this Elias should bring the refractary and unbeleeving posterity of the Jewish nation to have the same heart and mind their holy Fathers and Progenitors had who feared God and beleeved his promises that so their Fathers might as it were rejoyce in them and own them for their children that is he should convert them to the faith of that Christ whom their Fathers hoped in and looked for lest continuing obstinate in their unbeliefe till the great day of Christs second coming they might perish among the rest of the enemies of his kingdome Therefore the Son of Syrach in his praise of Elias the This bite paraphraseth this place after this manner who wa st ordained saith he an 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or type for so it may bee turned for the times to come to pacifie the wrath of the Lords judgement before it breake forth into fury and to turne the heart of the Father unto the Son and to restore the tribes of Israel Eccles 48.10 which explication also the Angel warranteth Luke 1.17 in his message to Zachary concerning his sonne He shall goe saith he before the Lord in the spirit and power of Elias to turne the hearts of the Fathers to the children and the disobedient to the wisdome of the just this is instead of reducing the hearts of the children to the Fathers to make ready a people prepared for the Lord. For the better understanding of this first reason we must know that the old Prophets for the most part spake of the coming of Christ indefinitely and in generall without that distinction of first and second coming which we have more clearly learned in the Gospel For this reason those Prophets except Daniel who distinguisheth those comings and the Gospel out of him that speake of the things which should be at the coming of Christ indefinitely and all together we who are now more fully informed by the revelation of his Gospel of this distinction of a two-fold coming must apply each of them to its proper time Those things which befit the state of his first coming unto it and such things as befit the state of his second coming unto his second And that which befits both alike as this of an Harbinger or Messenger may be applyed to both My second reason for the proofe hereof is from our Saviours own words in the Gospel Mat. 17.10 11. where his Disciples immediatly upon his transfiguration asking him saying Why then say the Scribes that Elias must first come Our Saviour answers Elias truly shall first come 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and shall restore all things These words our Saviour spake when John Baptist was now beheaded and yet speakes as of a thing future 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Elias shall come and shall restore all things How can this be spoken of John Baptist unlesse he be to come again Besides I cannot see how this restoring of all things can be verified of the ministery of John Baptist at the first coming of Christ which continued but a very short time and did no such thing as these words seeme to imply for the restoring of all things belongs not to the first but to the second coming of Christ if we will beleeve St. Peter in his first Sermon in the Temple after Christs ascension Acts 3.19 where he thus speakes unto the Jewes Repent saith he and bee converted for the blotting out of your sins that the times of refreshing may come from the presence of the Lord and that he may send Jesus Christ which before was preached unto you whom the heavens must receive untill the times of the restitution of all things which God hath spoken by the mouth of all his holy Prophets since the world began The word is the same 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 If the time of restoring all things be not til the second coming of Christ how could John Baptist restore all things as his first If the Master come not to restore all things at his first surely his harbinger
in opposition to both sorts of evils immediately afore recounted viz. not only to false Doctrines but to cruell persecutions and therefore a corporal as well as a spiritual salvation must be here meant and these to be performed on earth viz. in the inhabited world just where the Gospel preached converted them and where they endured to the end And unto which Christ doth gloriously appear FROM heaven ver 30 c. to make up the splendor of that state on earth we here speak of Now all these things cannot be fulfilled at the ultimate generall judgement nor are they hitherto fulfilled and therefore they remaine yet to be fulfilled which Mr. Mede solidly amplifies on Jer. 10. ver 11. thus Hitherto saith he we have spoken of the accomplishment of this prophecy for so much as is already past now let us see what that is which we expect as yet to come for though in regard of former times when Ethnicisme was so large and the worshipers of the living God so small a scantling the extent of the Church be now at this day a goodly and large portion of the world yet if we consider the number of Nations yet Pagans or not Christians it will seem too scant as yet to be the accomplishment of this and other prophecies concerning the largenesse of Christs Kingdome before the end of the world For one hath well observed that Christianity at this day is not above the sixth part of the knowne world whereas the Mahumetans have a fifth and all the rest are Ethnicks and Pagans So that if we divide the world into thirty parts Christianity is but as five in thirty Mahumetanism as six and Ethnicisme as nineteen and so is Christianity the least part of all and plain Heathenism hath far above the one half of the known world and the better part of the other is also Mahumetans And though Christianity hath been imbraced in former times where now it is not yet is it now spread in those places where in those times it was not And therefore all laid together we may account Christianity at this day as large I think as ever it was since the Apostles time But that this is not that universal Kingdome of Christ that flourishing and glorious estate of the Church which yet we expect hope for my reasons are these First These frequent places of Scripture which intimate that the Lord should subdue all People all Kingdoms all Nations and all the ends of the earth unto himselfe and that all these should one day worship and acknowledge him Psal 22.27 All the ends of the world shall turn unto the Lord and all the kindreds of the nations shall worship before him for the Kingdome is the Lords and he is governor among the Nations And Psal 47. Clap your hands all yee people for the Lord is a great King over all the earth he shall subdue the people under us and the nations under our feete And againe God is King of all the earth and reigneth over the Heathen Psal 66. Make a joyfull noise unto God all yee-lands through the greatness of thy power shall thine enemies submit themselves unto thee aâ— the earth shall worship thee and sing of thee they shall sing unto thy Name The whole Psal 67. which we read every day is as it were a prophecy and prayer for this great kingdome That the way of God may be knowne upon earth and his saving health among all the Nations let the people praise thee O God let all the people praise thee Then shall the earth yeeld her increase c. God shall blesse us and all the ends of the earth shall fear him And Psal 89. All nations whom thou hast made shall come and worship before thee O Lord and shall glorifie thy Name for thou art great and doest wondrous things thou art God alone And Isa 2. which is a prophecy of Christs Kingdome it is said That the Idols the Lord shall utterly abolish or as some read the Idols shall utterly passe away So Esay 54.5 speaking of the amplitude of the Church of the Gentiles Thy Redeemer saith the Prophet the holy one of Israel the God of the whole earth shall be called Certainly this constant stile of universality implies more then this scantling which yet is small being but one of the least parts of the whole earth Secondly The same conclusion may be gathered from 1 Cor. 15.25 26. compared with Heb. 2.8 Christ must reigne saith St. Paul in the first place quoted till he hath put all his enemies under his feet the last enemy which shall be destroyed is death Hence it followes that Christ shall subdue all his enemies whereof the Prince of this world is the cheife before the last rising of the dead for the subduing of death that is the rising of the dead shal not be afore the rest shall be done the vanquishing of death being the last act of Christs reigning which done he shall yeeld up the Kingdome unto his Father In the other place Heb. 2.8 the Apostle speaking of the same thing alleadgeth that of Psal 8. Thou hast put all things in subjection under his feet and then adds for in that he put all in subjection under him But now marke it we see not all things put under him If any say that the Apostle speakes here of the Kingdome of Glory in Heaven and not of the Kingdom of Grace on Earth I reply first out of the former place that he speaks of such a subjection whereof the rising of the dead shall be the last act of all and which shall be before he yeelds up the kingdome to his Father But neither of these can be affirmed of the kingdome of glory but the contrary viz. The rising of the dead is at the beginning and not at the end of the Kingdome of glory and so is also his yeelding up of his kingdom unto his Father Secondly I reply out of this place that the Apostle speaks of that kingdome and subjection of the earth or state of the earth which was to come For so he speaks v. 5. Unto the Angels he hath not put in subjection 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the earth or state of the earth which shal be 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of which we speak Here he affirms that 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is that of whose subjection he meaneth If then 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signâ—â—â—s onely the earth ' and the earths inhabitants and is no where in the Scripture otherwise used I cannot see how this place can well beare any other exposition First then to confirme this 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is the same which the Hebrews call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 for so the Septuagint renders it whose use of speaking I doubt not but the Apostle followes But 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 most constantly signifies the habitable earth or the earth with the things that live and dwell therein whence the Septuagint though they commonly render it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 yet sometimes they render it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the earth some-times 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that which is under heaven Therefore with the Septuagint 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the earth and that which is under the heavens If this suffice not we may yet consider that 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is a participle of the feminine gender and therefore understands 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 quasi 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the earth which is inhabited Lastly wheresoever elsewhere this word is found in the New Testament it is most expresly used of the earth and inhabitants thereof In the beginning of this Epistle we reade Thou Lord in the beginning hast laid the foundations of the earth 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and the heavens are the workes of thine hands Mat. 24.14 This Gospel of the kingdome shall be preached 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 over all the earth and then shall the end come Luke 2.3 Then went a decree from Augustus that all the world should be taxed 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The rest behinde are farre more expresse but I leave them to your owne leisure and will onely adde this one thing that our English rendring in this place of the Hebrewes 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the world to come makes it not only ambiguous but seeming to meane the Kingdome of glory But we shall finde that the world in that sense is alwayes 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 but no where in all the Bible 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 And so I leave this with submission to the judgement of others My next reason shall be from that we read in the Revelation where the Church by the conquest of Michael set free from the Dragons fury is said to escape into the wildernesse that is into a state though of safety peace and security yet of hardship misery and scarcity for it seemes to bee an allusion to the Israelites escaping the tyranny of Pharaoh by going into the wildernesse In this wildernesse or place of hardship scarcity misery and much affliction the Church must remaine saith St. John a time times and halfe a time or as he elsewhere speaketh 1260. daies that is a yeare yeares and halfe a yeare and when this time shall be expired that is as learned Divines thinke when so many years shall be ended as those dayes are taking the beginning of our reckoning from Michaels Trophee then saith our Apostle◠shall the kingdomes of the world become the kingdomes of our Lord and of his Christ and he shal reigne for ever and ever Rev. 11.15 Whereby it should seeme that the Church is yet in the Wildernesse and that the promised happinesse of the ample and flourishing glory thereof before the end of the world is yet to come My last reason shall bee from Rom. 11. where St. Paul speaking of the future restoring and calling of the Jewes saith it shall be when the fulnesse of the Gentiles is come in I would not saith he that yee should be ignorant of this Mysterie c. ver 25. Now because the Jewes are not yet called it followeth that the fulnesse of the Gentiles is yet to come and what should then this fulnesse be but the fulnesse of the Gospels extent over all the nations of the world which our Apostle ver 15. calls life from the dead for if the casting away of the Jewes be the reconciling of the world what shall the receiving of them be but life from the dead As if the Church of the Gentiles were as yet halfe dead if it be compared with that glorious vigour and accession which shall come unto it when the Jewes shall be againe received into favour In briefe the fulnesse here spoken of is either a fulnesse of grace a fulnesse of extent or a fulnesse of time A fulnesse of time onely it cannot be because our Apostle saith this fulnesse shal enter in namely shall enter into the Church of Christ but this I see not how it can be spoken of a period of time As for a fulnesse of grace and spirituall gifts that was greater when St. Paul spake then ever it was since and therefore if it be meant it must be yet to come And for the fulnesse of extent it was as large for the number of Nations in the Apostles times as it is now in ours for as for the American Christians they are onely so in name being forced only to seeme so by the Spaniards whatsoever fulnesse then the Apostle here meaneth is yet to come I will adde only one thing more and so end this point some thinke that St. Paul in this place hath reference unto that speech of Christ Luke 21.24 where he foretels That the Jewes should fall by the edge of the sword and be led captive into all nations and Jerusalem should be trodden downe of the Gentiles untill the times of the Gentiles should be fulfilled or accomplished But it seemes to me that the fulness of the Gentiles and the fulfilling or accomplishment of their times should not be the same howsoever they may be co-incident It should rather seeme that our Saviour hath reference as to a thing knowne unto the Prophecy of Daniel where the times of the Gentiles or the times wherein the Gentiles should have dominion with the misery and subjection of the Jewish Nation are set forth in the vision of a four-fold image and foure beasts which are the foure Monarchies the Babylonian Persian Greek and Roman The first began with the first captivity of the Jewish Nation and through the times of all the rest they should be in subjection or in a worser estate under them But when their times should be accomplished then saith Daniel The Saints of the most high God shall take the kingdome and possesse the kingdome for ever and ever that is there shall be no more kingdomes after it but it shall continue as long as the world shall endure Three of these Monarchies were past when our Saviour spake and the fourth was well entred If then by Saints there are meant the Jewes which we know are called the holy people in that sense their country is called the holy Land and their City in the Scripture the holy City viz. relatively then is it plaine enough what Daniels and our Saviours words import namely a glorious revocation and kingdome of the Iewes when the time of the fourth Monarchy which then remained should bee expired and accomplished But if here by the Saints of the most High are in generall meant the Church yet by co-incident of time the same will fall out on the Iewes behalfe because St. Paul saith that at the time when the fulness of the Gentiles shal come in the Iew shall be againe restored For a conclusion the last limbe of the fourth Monarchy is in Daniel The horne with eyes which spake proud things against the most High which should continue a time times and halfe a time
FACE of Christ but hereafter upon the appearance of Christ at the coming in of the fulnesse of the Gentiles and the call of the Jewes into one universall visible Church God will shine forth most gloriously through the WHOLE PERSON of Christ upon OVR WHOLE PERSONS so that we shall be like him in glory Phil. 3. 21. and we shall know as we are known 1 Cor. 13.12 we shall put off all corporall imperfections and shall apprehend him as well perfectly by our sences as by our graces as will appeare more by that which followes For ¶ 4. We shall behold him with open face or unvailed countenance or uncovered or unmasked persons as the Greeke comprehends all and this being spoken indefinitely and unlimitedly either to the beholder or thing beheld it is safest to take in both answerably opposing the two vailes afore so that 1. All we Jewes and Gentiles that shall partake of this glorious state on earth shall behold with uncovered sences with uncovered reason with uncovered graces Our eyes and mindes shall not be held as Luk 24. that our Phantasie should peirce no further then sence or that sence should apprehend extraordinary things in an ordinary notion And our reason shall not be covered nor cumbred with errour and mistakes and sensible desires and our graces shall not be blind-fold with inordinate carnall affections 2. Christ shall be beheld as altogether uncovered he shall not be covered as to be seene only in Aenigmaticall expressions as the Apostles phrase is in the Greek 1 Cor. 13. 12. or in typicall seales as in receiving the elements of the Holy Supper we are said to shew his death till he comes 1 Cor. 11.26 or in the heavens as now he is or in a personall state of humiliation as when he was on earth in afflictions and sufferings but he shall be wholly uncovered to be seene as he is in his great glory in that time of the Churches restauration on earth at his appearance as it is here said in the next particular ¶ 5. Beholding the glory of the Lord. At his first coming we beheld his ingloriousnesse Phil. 2. Isa 53. After at his transfiguration some two or three saw a glimps of a prelude of his glory After that a few saw at his ascension his entrance into supreame glory Acts 1. But here WEE ALL Jewes and Gentiles in generall whosoever and how many soever converted unto Christ shall behold 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 THAT SAME glory of the Lord. ¶ 6. And so behold as to be changed into the same image A wonderfull and efficacious beholding which shall transforme the Embryon of the new Creature conceived in the wombe of the Soule into the glorious Image of Christ by beholding him in his glory in this state on earth The divine Plants of God in this new Paradise on earth shall so see the Sun of righteousnesse that they shal blossome and flower and fructifie into like colours stripes an rayes as are in that Sun We must as the Greeke 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifies be Metamorphosed from our corrupt and inglorious image into the glorious Image of Christ So this text So againe the same Apostle hath it 1 Cor. 15.51 52. The introductory both of the discourse and of the thing leading to this change in verse fifty one begins at vers 22. which we have laboriously opened afore but in the seventh Section immediatly preceding To which adde this memorandum that Paul expresly treates there only of the resurrection of Beleevers as that at Christs next coming When saith the Apostle we shall not ALL sleep but we shall ALL be changed The dead shall be raised incorruptible and we shall be changed This corruptible must put on incorruption and this mortall must put on immortality then death is swallowed up And this change is said to be glorious vers 49. As we have borne the image of the earthly so we shall beare the image of the heavenly Adam viz. Christ Which suite to our present text in this 2 Cor. 3.18 That we shall so behold the glory of Christ that we shall be Metamorphosed transformed into the same image By which parallel ye perceive what the Apostle meanes by this transformation into the same glorious Image viz. to our glorious state on earth at the first resurrection of the Saints at Christs next coming At our first conversion we have some spirituall inward change Of this our Apostle made mention afore in this 2 Cor. 3. viz. vers 16. in that phrase of turning to the Lord. And vers 17. in those words where the Spirit of the Lord is there is liberty But in that clause in the last verse of Metamorphosing into the same Image some greater thing must be intended For ¶ 8. It followes we must be changed into the same Image from glory to glory which sounds of a future For from glory to glory must signifie more then a processe from one degree of grace to another as it is intended in Psal 84. from strength to strength and Rom. 1.17 from faith to faith for though that be the beginning and touched vers 16. 17. of this 2 Cor. 3. yet here the Apostle drives at the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the exaltation of a Saint to his height and must import that the former glory is suitable to the latter glory which is true of personall glory on earth at Christs next appearance that it is like to the latter viz. ultimate glory both glorifying the whole man whereas the glory of our imperfect sanctification doth glorifie only the inward man and that too but in part There is also a difference in the cause as it is in the last clause viz. ¶ 9. By the Lord the Spirit as we touched the Translation afore whereby it is plainly held forth that whereas our inward glory of Sanctification in all the processe thereof is from the inward power of the Spirit of the Lord our personall glory of soule and body at the said coming of Christ is from his personall presence transcendently and efficaciously radiating on our persons to a change and filling the earth with the beames of his glory Now weigh all together and see whether the whole minde of this text can be terminated in our conversion and sanctification or can be wholly extended to ultimate and supreamest glory Or can be fixt upon that unsuitable time of converting Israel at the day of the ultimate Judgement And if not then it is yet to come before the ultimate generall day of Doome SECT IX The Ninth place in the New Testament for the glorious state of all things on earth at Christs next appearance is Phil. 2.9 10 11. God hath highly exalted him Christ and given him a name above every name that at the name of Jesus every knee shall bow of things in heaven and things in the earth and thing under the earth and that every tongue should confesse that Jesus Christ is the Lord to the glory of God the
Father § 1 VVHat hath been said afore of this place for opening the Prophet Esa 45.14 and it selfe See pag. 113 114. and p. 215. l. 1. § 2 This a glorious time on earth expresse in the Text when it shall be fulfilled but this is not yet fulfilled For ¶ 1. All things on earth doe not submit to Christ which is the sence of bowing the knee But on the contrary an hundred for one are openly against Christ so that as the Apostle saith Heb. 2.8 We see not yet all things under him And Heb. 10.13 the Apostle saith long after his Ascension that he still sits in heaven expecting till his enemies be made his footstoole ¶ 2. All things under the earth viz the infernall Spirits doe not universally and actually subject to him that is they are yet permitted of God to act against Christs Kingdome but they must be made universally and actually to forbeare opposing Christs Kingdome Revel 16.17 The seventh Vial is poured out upon the aire that is upon the Prince of the aire the Devil and on his retinue How Why Christ shall binde him for a thousand yeares c. Revel 20.1 2 c. ¶ 3. Much lesse to this day doth every tongue or the generality of all tongues confesse that Jesus Christ is the Lord TO THE GLORY OF GOD THE FATHER when as most either doe not name him or name him prophanely or blaspheme him ¶ 4. Paul tels us in another place viz Rom. 14.10 11. discussed also afore touching the meaning * See pag. 214. but by mistake printed p. 116. vix t is in lib. 3. cha 2. Sect. 19. S. 2. P. 1. That this bowing to Christ is not fulfilled till Christ shall sit in Judicature on his Seate of Judgement but this begins not till the first Resurrection Rev. 20.4 c. compare it with Revel 11.15 16 17 18. meane while Turk and Pope and Heathens extreamly domineer § 3 This truth hath not been discovered from these two places of Rom. 14. and Phil. 2. as yesterday but judicious Calvin long since did assert from the collation of both places together that this genuflexion and submission to Christ is not fully fulfilled till Christs next coming § 4 Now this cannot be deferred to the ultimate generall Judgement for then is no time for confession and submission to the glory of God the Father but a silent bearing of Judgement by them that despised Christ and so Christ resignes his kingdome SECT X. The Tenth place in the New Testament of the glorious state of the Church yet to be on earth is in Revel 2.25 26 27 28. ver 25. Hold fast till I come Ver. 26. And he that over-cometh and keepeth my workes unto the end to him will I give power over the Nations Vers 27. And he shal rule them with a rod of Iron as the vessels of a Potter they shall be broken to shivers even as I have received of my Father Vers 28. And I will give him the morning Star § 1 ALthough in our last English Translation the former part of the twenty seventh verse be read with a Parenthesis yet not so in Stephanus his best Greek edition in Folio nor in Bezaes Greek or Latin nor in our former English Translation The continued speech in the third person throughout the twenty fift and twenty sixt verses and former part of the twenty seventh verse and the distinguishing turne to the first person in the latter part of the twenty seventh verse makes it plaine enough that these Promises are made to the Beleever that keeps Christs workes to the end even as Christ goes on in the twenty eighth verse promising him the said Beleever that he will give him the morning starre So that it is the said Beleever that shall under Christ by the donation and assistance of Christ have power over the Nations and rule them with a rod of Iron till they be broken as a Potters vessels to whom he will give the morning starre That which perhaps made our last Translators put in the said Parenthesis was the agreement of the words they included with those Psal 2.9 quoted by them in the margin spoken of Christ But it is a sure rule Subordinata non sunt contraria subordinate things are not contrary and that other Qui facit per alium facit per se That he who causeth others to doe a thing doth it himselfe If Christ by his Saints over-power the Nations and rules them with a rod of Iron Christ himselfe over-powers the Nations and rules them with a rod of Iron That which the Carpenter worketh with his tooles the Carpenter is accounted to worke or doe In this respect it is said in Dan. 7. ver 13.4 That the Kingdome which is to succeed the foure Monarchies is given to Christ And vers 22. 27. it is said to be given to the Saints § 2 The sence of these words are obvious and plaine especially if we minde what hath been given in by way of explication afore on Psal 2. * Pag. 158. 159. and on 2 Pet. 1.19 ** P. 360. P. 2 c. Suitably our new Annotations confesse That hold fast TILL I COME ver 25. signifies till Christs second coming GENERALL or SPECIALL Power over the Nations signifies to JOYNE WITH CHRIST IN JVDGING THE NATIONS c. And that giving the morning starre signifies Christs giving the FULL FRVITION OF HIMSELFE We shall further give the explication of this Scripture in the application thereof Which application is That this Scripture is not yet fulfilled as may appeare in the distinct consideration of each particular thereof ¶ 1. It is expresse in the twenty fifth verse Hold fast TILL I COME spoken by Christ neare an hundred yeares after his Incarnation But Christ never came since that ¶ 2. It is said in ver 26 27. That to them that hold fast till hee comes he will give POWER OVER THE NATIONS to rule them with A ROD OF IRON and to BREAKE THEM IN PEECES as a Potters vessels Which words import a Corporall breaking not a Spirituall as the Iron Scepter of force is distinguished from the golden Scepter of the Word Now this was never yet fulfilled in the generall but rather contrariwise hitherto the Nations breake the Saints and Churches as we have often given a large account from History and experience ¶ 3. That of Christs giving the morning starre what can it bee but the appearance of Christ againe especially to the Jewes according to 2 Pet. 1.19 before expounded For as the converted Gentiles Spiritually considered are said to be not in the night but in the day 1 Thes 5.5 The unconverted Jews are in the night and in the darke Rom. 11.25 Therefore this morning Starre the Sunne-rising mentioned to this very particular Malac. 4.2 must of necessity signifie Christs personall appearance which Christ hath not yet fulfilled to this day Therefore yet to come And this text must be fulfilled before the ultimate
there almost ruining the Church with all manner of calamities for four hundred yeers ye heard afore also of the Saracens invading Gallia Anno seven hundred and thirty after Christ and of their going into Judaea Anno 1009 yeers after Christ After which Warre continued with Christian Princes for divers hundreds of yeers not repelled as yet And as it was a good while after Constantine was Emperour ere he had stayed the bulke and rage of the tenth persecution many suffering almost in all Constantines time in several Kingdomes under the Roman Empire See Mr. Fox so after Constantines time downe all along the Doctors thousand yeers more or lesse in most Kingdomes under the Roman Empire See Mr. Fox or any Chronology which for avoyding tediousnesse we omit as to particulars So that from within the Doctors thousand yeers a long time The two Witnesses have Prophesied a great part of their one thousand two hundred and sixty yeers in sackcloth The Woman hath fled into the wildernesse The Beast hath power and the Dragon hath endeavoured the ruine of the Woman Rev. 11. Rev. 12. Rev. 13. And is not this universal persecution all the Doctors thousand yeers surely there were so many particulars as made up an universal To the Doctors last distinction That it was not continual but by turns or vicissitudes First we retort this upon the Doctor He saith that Satan was loosed before Constantine M. time Yet then the persecution was but by turnes witnesse the number of ten 2 After the time of Constantinus M. time which was about three hundred thirty six some say three hundred thirty one where or when was there any eminent stop for at least divers hundred yeers in the Roman Empire As all this while from the beginning of Constantines M. down those severall hundreds of yeers the persecution in Persia continued 3 In the Revel in the time of Satans being loosed yee shall finde it prophesied of some little interruption of the full tide of persecution yet then is Satan loosed To close our answer the Doctors whole Argument is not so proper and demonstrative but it may bee retorted Satans binding and Saints reigning concur But the Saints have not yet reigned no not in the pict thousand yeers of the Doctors but errours persecutions wars c. pressing downe the Churches as ye have heard have that time abounded by Arians Julian Goths and Vandals Saracens and Pope and Papists and Socinians and Turke and tyranical Kings and Princes to this day ergo this is not the thousand yeers of the binding of Satan And therefore if this the Doctors thousand yeers be past farewell they Carnall and low Saints seeing the sorrowfull preface wish and study to make them past Higher Saints seeing the joyful possession beleeve the plaine Scripture that they are yet to come The Saints must reign with Christ saith our Text Rev. 20.4 But in heaven Christ reignes not with them therefore upon earth Rev. 5.10 But they have not yet reigned For before that Antichrist must downe in the West the tenth part of the City must fall 2 The Jewes must be called 3 Satan bound that hee deceive no more till after the thousand yeers surely therefore the world must bee altered from that it is now afore that SECT II. The Doctors second Argument WHich he asserts he saith from those periods in which the event hath dictated to the more circumspect that Satan was loosed There are foure periods saith he more famous then the rest First in the yeer one thousand after the birth of Christ in the time of Pope Sylvester the second At which time the manifestation of Antichrist was promulgated in France preached at Paris divulged over the world and believed of many Second period is terminated by Pope Benedict the ninth whose time in and out and in the Papall chaire Reusner puts in the yeer Anno one thousand thirty two to one thousand forty six yeers or thereabout in which time all both Easterne and Westerne cry out Satan is loosed Third period takes its beginning in the destruction of Jerusalem in the time of Pope Hildebrand called Gregory the seventh and placed Anno one thousand seventy three by Reusner The life acts decrees of which Hildebrand seemed so mischievous and hellish to the Divines and Historians of that age that they were out of all doubt that the mystery of iniquity in the Revelation then attained its 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 highest increment and perfection of age and strength Fourth and last is terminated in Pope Boniface the 8. and is the beginning of the Ottoman family which time Reusner and Bucholcerus and Helvious put about Anno one thousand three hundred but draws its original begining from the government of Constantine the Great Of this Boniface the eighth it was common to say He entred in as a Fox lived as a Lion and dyed like a Dog So that from hence forward the Westerne Antichrist on one hand and the Easterne Mahumetan on the other rushing in with open robberies shew that Satan is loosed setting both of them on fire which ever since more or lesse burning as yet as wee feel are not extinguished All this is in Doctor Prideaux his major Proposition But saith he in the minor It is agreed among many as I have intimated afore in our first Argument and the events of things agree to it that the yeers of the binding of Satan did runne downe all the time of the said termes I have described of which this last is most conspicuous therefore this last opinion should at least out-weigh the rest viz. that Satan was all that time bound Wee answer first in general by denying the minor And as hee refers us to his former argument for proof so we refer you to our answer to it for refutation of it As hee urgeth the argument of many so we have and shall ballance against them the agreement of very many famous men on the contrary Howbeit we goe by divine rule and reason not by humane vote And as the Dr. argues so wee shall take up some passages in the Doctors argument to overthrow his argument and his distinction he gives by way of exposition to that his argument For in the close of this argument he fearing lest some viewing the said four periods should object as he expresseth that in these four terms appears rather the licentionsnesse of Satan then the binding of Satan distinguisheth thus We must saith he hold or keep in mind which before we inculcated That Satan invades the Church either with open butcheries by Tyrants raging with the sword or with occult hypocrisie under pretence of piety Now as Satan being bound the Papal Apollyon his Vicar was not wanting strenuously to supply his place so he being loosed afterwards the Turke in the Ottoman family came in to make up the band or legion Now I say to overthrow the minor and this his distinction we will take up some passages in his argument against him ¶ 1
thousand that is to the universal Church who are verse 14. but 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 comming or about to come out of tribulation not come out They were washed afore in the bloud of the Lamb ever since their beleeving but that was from sinne but they are not yet come out of great tribulation but that shall bee ere long So that that which follows to the end of the Chapter cannot now bee applyed to their persons viz. That they shall hunger no more nor the Sun light upon them any more And God shall wipe away all tears which are spoken in the future Tense as of things to come And it cannot be applied to their future state in heavenly glory For the Heathens that knew but the immortality of the soule never dreamed of hunger or thirst or feare to befall good men in the world to come Nor did the Philosophers thinke that the Sunne did shine above the highest of the orbs of the material heaven Therefore there is no probability in the least that this is a description of everlasting glory but of a state on earth where the Sunne hath smitten and there hath been hunger and thirst and have been tears So that still I minde you this Chapter is but a parenthesis of comfort put there by way of anticipation For it is put between the sixth and seventh Seal between which must be a methodical succession The sixth Seale is in chapter 6. which is most terrible obscuring heaven shaking the earth terrifying the sonnes of men And the seventh Seale is in Rev. 8. verse 1. In which eight Chapters whiles Christ intercedes over the prayers of the Church in regard of some slaine as it is in Chapter 6. The seven Trumpets appear in order to sound at their time Rev. 8.6 c. so that the calamities of the world goe on in the world upon earth and from hence forward till Antichrist be downe As for the 11 Chapter it is plaine that it is but the summary of all that which John prophesies of the more Ecclesiastical state of things in his ensuing Book of the Revelation as in the former he had prophesied of the more Political I say a summary For there is set down the more pure state of the Church v. 1. and more corrupt verse 2. And of the two witnesses in sackcloath one thousand two hundred and sixty yeers and their lying dead in the grave three yeers and a half as well as rising and ascending And there is Babylon falling viz. The tenth part of the City c. as well as Babylon trampling and triumphing over the Witnesses So that unlesse we will jumble all into a confusion this 11. Chapter is but the summary of what follow in the whole book of the Revelation And in the 12 Chapter there is as much for the loosing of Satan as for binding For the 13 Chapter it plainly sets out the time of Satans power 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 two and forty months or a thousand two hundred and sixty dayes viz. yeers which power he hath not when his master Satan is bound as we have and shall heare For the 14 and 15. Chapters the Churches triumphant songs of victory over the Beast are but in hope of a thing to come Another Parenthesis of comfort proleptically inserted For before and behinde their song in Chapter 15. is mention of the Angels having the seven last plagues to fulfill the wrath of God viz. The pouring out of the seven Vials as it follows Chapter 16. I need goe no further in my Antithesis to the Doctors instances ¶ 2 We answer to his Antecedent or first Proposition that if indeed as Doctor Prideaux would have it from the 6. Chap. of Rev. to the 20. Saints are in their reigning condition and Satan is bound according to St. Johns true intent Rev. 20. what means all that while all that adoe against the enemies of the Church of seven Seals Chapter 6. and 7. of seven Trumpets Chapter 8. of seven Vials Chapter 15. and 16. and in 17. is described the sin and the judgement of the Whore and in Chapter 18. the manner of her utter destruction and Chapter 19. the destruction it selfe And then and not till then in Chapter 20. S. John speaks of binding of Satan so as the Saints may be said to reigne indeed After which no Seals Trumpets or Vials onely there is a proleptic or anticipation of the ultimate day of judgement mentioned verse 11. of Chapter 20. because it is the period of the thousand yeers but the state of times in Satans binding and the Saints reigning is after described in Rev. 21. and 22. Chapters ¶ 3 We answer to his said Antecedent or first Proposition That by the Doctors tenet and proof that Satan is bound from Rev. 6. to Rev. 20. for he saith that the beginning was in Constantines time that the Saints began to reign And John tells us that the thousand yeeres doe end at the ultimate day of judgement Rev. 20. it will follow that from Constantine M. which the Doctor puts in three hundred yeers after Christ to the day of judgement is but a thousand yeers For the Doctor in his stating the question confesseth that the thousand yeers must be taken properly and precisely But wee and most Nations doe compute from three hundred yeers after Christ to this yeer one thousand three hundred fifty three and yet the day of the last judgement is not come No nor the War of Gog and Magog which precedes it No nor the fall of Antichrist and Babylon which precedes that c. Next we come to answer to the Argument or Consequent or last Proposition § 3 To the Proposition it self That therefore all this while the Saints reigned wee say that though they reigned over sinne which is no more priviledge then every Saint hath had since the beginning of the world yet they reigne not on earth over their corporall enemies as the fifth Monarchy or power which is the minde of the Scripture as we have before abundantly proved ¶ 2 To his first proof viz. So are they Kings as they be Priests But they are Priests spiritually Therefore c. We say to the major and minor ten Millinary yeers that they shal be Priests on earth therfore joyntly they shall be Kings on earth And they shall in body sensibly offer up sacrifices on earth of praises and Hallelujahs Rev. 11. Rev. 14. Therefore they shall in the body sensibly reigne on earth The notion is changed but the place and thing is the same Therefore it is said Rev. 5.10 He hath made us Kings and Priests unto our God AND we shall reigne on earth And Rev. 20.4 shall reigne with Christ a thousand yeers The time and place sheweth what reigning it shall bee even such as to whom Kings and Nations shall bring their honour Rev. 21. But in heaven the Saints enjoy but not reign with Christ because Christ as Christ doth not there reigne as we have
plaine text without sophistication or allegorising contrary to the scope of the pace as far as possible or light can lead us Thirdly That the consummation of the world doth gloriously begin at the beginning of these thousand yeers as wee have demonstrated out of severall texts and so it rather hastens then prorogues Fourthly turning to Cornelius Alapide on this 20. of Rev. according to the Doctors direction thinking to finde some great matter I found onely this of that businesse That he saith we approach very neer the end of the world First because we see the Gospel preached almost to all the world Secondly the Saint Vincent who dyed one thousand foure hundred and eighteen did confidently preach this and that by the command of Christ as it is in the History of his life Thirdly that it is a constant oracle among the Turks that Mahomets sect is to endure a thousand yeers which yeers are now neere expired Fourthly so is the Prophesie of St. Malachy A.B. of Hibernia whose life St. Bernard did write Thus you see what Cornelius Alapide saith and what stuffe it is Two arguments out of the Popish legend Another from the Turks Alcoran or Tradition The other intimates a Scripture viz. that Mat. 24.14 But there is no Almost I would the Jesuit said true that almost It is not yet preached to the vast Kingdomes and places of China of the Turke of the Indians of the Tartars c. We do indeed grant that the consummation of the world is neer and we said so but now But that we set it backward or forward beside Scripture neither the Doctor nor his Alapide hath proved it one jot Nor can it seem lesse then some kinde of contradiction for the Doctor to say we doe prorogare ultra mille adminimum annos indefinito auctario That we do prolong the time at least a thousand yeers with an indefinite argument For if it be for a thousand yeers how is it indefinite If indefinite how is it for a thousand yeers And Alapide confesseth it is uncertain when the world shall end Ibid. ¶ Third Inconvenience the Doctor urgeth is That this opinion in our point feigneth a state of the Church militant in or at the comming of the Lord in adventu Domini triumphant and tranquillous contrary to Luke 18.8 When the Son of man shall come shall he finde faith on earth Answer wee doe not say that the Church shall triumph at the very first appearance of Christ which is to call the Jews yea we have said the contrary on Dan. 12. that for five and forty yeers will be a time of trouble to the Jews after their call and afore the triumph comes But when Christ hath once appeared to destroy all the Churches enemies the Church shall triumph and bee tranquillous many yeers as we have seen innumerable places in O. T. and just a thousand yeers according to St. John in Rev. compared with Dan c. of which afore That place of Luke is evidently of the weak faith not of no faith of true beleevers at the sight of the great troubles that are the sad Antecedent to the joyful Comedian Catâ—strophe of the Churches deliverance as Dan. 12. and Rev. 11. to the end of 19. set it out But when Christ comes it is at a pinch to raise their faith and after to settle that their triumph on earth As he appeared in incarnate when the Saints faith was low as wee see in Nathanael And at the Resurrection as we see in the two Disciples Luke 24. and in Thomas John 20. But when manifest he raised them high So at his next coming ¶ Fourth Inconvenience is saith the Doctor it doth interpose at least a thousand yeers between the ruine of Antichrist and the dissolution of the world which Antichrist Paul foretold should be destroyed with the bright comming of our Saviour and by the breath of his mouth We answer first That if he means before the last dissolution at the last judgement even so doth St. John most emphatically interpose Compare Rev. 19. the two last verses with Ch. 20.4 compared with v. 12. And so methodically and exactly Antichrist shal be destroyed by the brightnes of Christs first coming His breath of his mouth viz. his Word and Spirit having made the Kings of the earth to hate the Whore Secondly we answer that at Christs appearance at the beginning of the thousand yeers there is a kinde of dissolution of the world 2 Peter 12.13 compared with Isaiah 65.17 ¶ Fifth Inconvenience is That this opinion as the Doctor affirms inventeth such an assumption of bodies as the Papists feigne of the blessed Virgins or brings downe from heaven soules to be united to bodies that perhaps they may get children possesse earthly things and be subject to other conditions of mortall men Wee answer first for the Drs. assumption of bodies feigned by the Papists the Dr. doth not tell us what he means and we cannot divine what the Papists may dream This arrow doth not appear ergo we need not hold up our buckler Secondly for the bringing soules downe from heaven to the body upon earth what wonder is this more then the returning of the soul of Lazarus and of those at Christs Passion and those in the Prophets to their bodies on earth especially seeing they that returne in the other world to their bodies upon the inhabitable world for that time of the thousand yeers Heb. 2.5 is to a glorious estate Indeed unlesse we can overthrow a world of places which we have urged this must be granted Thirdly For their begetting children at that time We doe not affirme it But if wee should I know not what grand Inconvenience would follow seeing Adam once might have done it without sinne or carnality of mind when his soule came new out of Gods hands which are more glorious then heaven and the Virgin Mary so conceived Christ And the Apostle Heb. 2. implies our state then shall be as innocent Adams was All earthly things that the Saints then shall enjoy shall but increase their happines not sin or carnality in the least That shall be fulfilled Matth. 19.29 If the full of happinesse in glory shall fill all the senses with joy and comfort sutable to that place why may not the Preface upon earth proportionally But the Doctor objects but with a fortasse perhaps Fourthly for their enjoyment of earthly things though the things bee earthly yet the Saints shall enjoy them in a spirituall manner under a spirituall notion and to a spirituall end as Adam in innocency For fifth of being subject to the condition of mortal men I doe not know that they that are Saints shall dye in that thousand yeers or any more seeing they that are alive shall only be changed ¶ 6 The sixth and last Inconvenience the Doctor urgeth is as hee saith that this opinion doth raise up againe Papisme at the end of the world viz. then for men to dye with the rest of
the enemies of the Church in the Gogican War which Papisme the 19. of the Revel concluded as extinct Wee answer to this objection that it is of no consequence whether it be granted or denyed We doe not raise Papisme nor do I know any that doe And though S. John concludes the utter down-fall of Antichrist Rev. 19. that he shall never reigne more yet Chapter 20.9 hee shews that secret hypocrisie of all Nations shall breake out and indeavour to beset the Church and then comes the ultimate day of judgement CHAP. II. Answering Doctor Pareus THus of your Dr. Prideaux his Arguments against our point in answer of whom with the same labour we have answered the maine Arguments of Pareus on Revelation 20. verse 4. For the Doctor did follow and take much out of Pareus Those wee have not spoken to that are most material that the Doctor did not touch upon them we will now touch SECT I. First Objection Rev. 20.5 THat that Resurrection is not a corporall Resurrection but a spirituall And that because it is called the First Resurrection For this cannot bee the first corporal Resurrection because before this there arose corporally the Sonne of the widow of Sarepta raised by the Prophet Elijah 1 King 17.22 The Sonne of the Sunamitish widow by Elisha 2 King 4.35 The Sonne of the widow of Naim raised by Christ Luke 7.11 12. c. The daughter of Jairus raised by Christ Luke 8.55 of Lazarus raised by Christ John 11.44 Those at Christs Passion Matth. 27. Tabitha by Peter Act. 9.41 Eâ—tichus by Paul Act. 20.10 Answer to this thus First by this argument Christ shall not bee the first-fruits of them that sleep Secondly by this argument the opinion of a spiritual Resurrection from Antichristianisme cannot bee here admitted because by the same reason that cannot bee called the First resurrection because many of them afore-mentioned were raised afore Antichristianisme was in being Thirdly that raising of them was no generall Resurrection of any sort of godly or ungodly But this in the Revelation is general of all Saints Fourthly the T. intends that risen they shall reigne and reigne a thousand yeers But the other mentioned by Pareus soon died and did not reigne in Johns sense Fifthly John had marked these out verse 3 that they had had a spirituall Resurrection already SECT II. Second Argument of Pareus TO the First Resurrection is opposed First death But the First death was spirituall viz. Sinne Rom. 5. therefore the first Resurrection meant here is spiritual Answer first spirituall death and life are sinne and grace But these not expressed here but first and second Resurrection living and dying againe The first death is when all dye corporally some naturally some violently as the godly by Antichrists persecution So in Rev. 6.9 the soules under the altar and the beheaded in this 20. Chapter verse 4. And wicked by Gods judgements Rev. 19. two last Now the first Resurrection is of Saints Rev. 20. is here in ver 4. Second of wicked in verse 12. which is their second death as S. John calls it verse 14. The rest of Pareus his objections to this point are upon a false supposition that onely the Martyrs shall rise therefore need no answer Beside we have given much in answer to him afore in the end of the first Book Thus of Pareus next of Mr. Bayly CHAP. III. MR. Bayly his Arguments come next for I put the best disputant first who being answered wee shall have lesse reason to spend time upon the weaker SECT I. Mr. Baylies first Argument HE that remaines in the Heaven unto the last judgement comes not downe to the earth a thousand yeers before the last judgement But Christ remaines in the Heavens unto the last judgement Therefore Christ comes not downe to the earth for a thousand yeers before the last judgement The major saith hee is unquestionable The minor is proved First from the Article of the Creed from that he sitteth at the right hand of God from thence hee shall come to judge the quick and the dead Secondly from Act. 3.21 Thirdly from John 14.2.3 We answer first to the major First we have not yet asserted that Christ shall come downe on the earth But we have shewed out of several texts a very great probability that Christ will at least appear in the clouds that men and especially the Jews may look upon him c. as Zac. 12.10 2 At the beginning of the 1000. yeers is the beginning of the last judgement as we shewed afore 2. To the minor where Mr. B. affirms that Christ shall remaine in the Heavens unto the last day of judgement We answer it is false For after hee was ascended up to the right hand of God he is so neer to Paul that he calls to him saying Paul Paul c. And Paul replies Who art thou Lord And Christ replies I am Jesus whom thou persecutest And Paul replies Lo what wilt thou have me to do And the Lord replies Arise go into the City and it shall be told thee Act. 9.4 5 6. And verse 10. Christ in a vision speaks to Ananias to goe to Paul Ananias objects and Christ replies At last hee goes and verse 17. speaks to Saul thus putting his hand upon him Brother Saul the Lord even Jesus that APPEARED unto thee in the way Greek 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 sâ—en of thee And 1 Cor. 15.5 6 7 8. As SEEN of Câ—phas and the twelve c. after the Resurrection so after the Ascension seen of Paul v. 8. Now by the same reason he may appeare againe to convert the Jews for that must be some sudden businesse Isa 66.8 as a Nation borne at once c. before the ultimate day of judgement And Pauls conversion by Christs appearance in the clouds was the first-fruits how Christ would convert the Jews as is Mr. Medes note on 1 Tim. 1.16 Read the place ¶ 1 To the first proof of the minor from that Article of the Creed First we say that Article doth not prove Mr. Baylies intent in that it doth not assert that there Christ shall fixedly sit for ever untill the last judgement but onely that thence he shall come to judge which he may doe if mean while he descends on weighty occasions which finished hee ascends againe and there hee abides till hee descends to the last judgement Secondly we have shewed afore that the day of judgement begins at this one thousand yeers and continues to the end The beginning is the morning of the day of judgement the end the evening of the day of judgement And all the same day of judgement as it is in Peter 2 Epist 3. Chap. And we have also shewed how in this time all the parts of a day of judgement are acted The last day of which thousand yeers wee all along have called it the ultimate day of judgement And how long this ultimate day may be this evening of the Millenary day wee cannot
Church which consists of particular Saints is thus perfected § 4 To the proof of his major There is not one place that concludes his major that That must be the continued condition of the Church whiles it is on earth We will give a touch upon each place ¶ 1 For mixedness Mat. 13 40.24.11 Luk. 18.8 First to that Mat. 13 40. the words are plain for us viz. As therefore the tares are gathered and burnt in the fire so shall it be at the end of this world It s not said the end of the world but of this world And not onely so but in Greek 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 This series of ages And more yet it is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the perfecting 3 As in Acts The restitution no word to properly signifie an end But it implyes an end the end of consummation not of consumption of perfection not of destruction And in opposition to this the Apostle Heb. 2 calls the state of the thousand yeers 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which must signifie a state on earth so that this of Matthew is fulfilled at the beginning of the thousand yeers when the wicked are so destroyed at the beginning of them Rev. 19. last Secondly To that Matth. 24.11 Many false Prophets shall arise and shall deceive many Iniquity shall abound c. We say it is most expresse there that these things are to be before the propagating of the Gospel to all the world So verse 13. and comes between that verse 11 12. and the end of the world verse 14. So that the thousand yeers is the fruit of the Gospel spread to all the world and so brings a cessation of seducement Rev. 20. Thirdly To that Luke 18.8 Neverthelesse shall he find faith We say here is no touch of the ultimate end of the world The coming of Christ is that his appearance in the thousand yeers which Mr. Baâ—ly and others being ignorant of they beg the contrary and lay it for a principle on which to build their argument and so they beg that That the Saints shall not have a time of all peace on earth The meaning of the place is for us viz. Christ will avenge his elect as in shorter captivities in Egypt and Babylon so in this longer But before that the times shall be so full of troubles that it shall be as Dan. 12. compared with Rev. 19. latter end As alwayes was before all deliverances by Christ As at Egypt At Babylon At Christs comming in flesh So that good mens faith shall be very low ¶ 2 For Troubles and Crosses Psal 34.20 Matth. 5 4. Act. 14.23 Rom 8.17.2 Tim. 3.12 To this we answer first That there is no mention here at all of all the times of the world to the ultimate end thereof Secondly All particular Saints do fulfill this in their lives Thirdly That this is that we say and mainly assert that because the Saints have been abused on earth therefore shall they be righted and honoured on earth according to Psal 37. to 11. and 29. and 34. and Matth. 5.5 And the state called Heaven in that Act. 14.23 is expounded of this thousand yeers Rev. 21. there is the beginning And our reigning with him in that Rom. 8.17 is expounded to begin in this thousand yeers Rev. 20.4 ¶ 3 For continuance of Ordinances Eph. 4.11 1 Cor. 11.26 It is easily fully answered That if that state in the thousand yeers prove a sinlesse condition the Saints being perfected as it is in that Eph. 4 verse 12. It can be no griefe to Mr. Baily or any else that Ministries of Repentance praying for wants Discipline for Delinquents shall cease And if then Christ COMES and appears as 1 Cor. 11. what matter is it if the Lords Supper shall cease But wee doe not hereby intimate all Ordinances shall cease Adam had some in Paradise and shall have some in glory viz. To sing Hallelujahs praises to Jehovah ¶ 4 To the need of Intercession First I say Mr. B. should have done well to have proved that any did deny the continuing of Christs Intercession till he layes downe all 1 Cor. 15.24 Secondly His places 1 Joh. 1.8 c. 2. v. 1. Heb. 9.24 is true while we have sin But 't would not bee a selfe-deceiving as S. John calls it for a soule to say in heaven above he is without sinne So nor upon earth in the thousand yeers if so Christ makes our condition And when we are without sin we need not Christs active Intercession for conversion or confirmation in regard of weaknesse of grace yet I know not but that Christs presential Intercession shal continue till all the Churches enemies be utterly cast into hell and the Saints attaine their highest happinesse in heaven But that it may cease as in regard of the sins of Saints at the thousand yeers I doubt not if that prove a sinlesse condition as that place quoted by Mr. Baily Heb. 9.24 to the end of the Chapter doth seem to mee clearly to affirme For verse 24.25 c. Christ entring heaven having dyed once in the last verse t is said he shall appear the second time without sinne unto salvation that is as not making attonement for sinne And this second comming is next after his Ascension and that is at the calling of the Jewes at the beginning of the thousand yeers as wee have before proved And this salvation must be a thing beyond the state of grace we are now in therefore most likely it shall bee our sin-lesse condition We shall be as Adam for inward perfection for or 〈◊〉 I know and the Apostle hints at it Heb. 2. verse 7. c. As we â—â—â—e shewed afore SECT VI. Mr. Bailyes sixth Argument § 1 THe Scripture makes the time of Christs second coming to be secret and hidden not onely to men but to the very Angels and to Christ himselfe as man Mark 13.32 But of that day and that houre knoweth no man no not the Angels neither the Sonne But this Doctrine makes that day openly knowne and tells the time of it punctually For they make the thousand yeers to begin with the one thousand six hundred and fiftyeth yeer or else with one thousand six hundred ninety five and the day of judgement to be at the end of the thousand yeers § 2 Ans First There is a difference between a day to an houre and between about such a yeer Secondly M. Baily cannot but know a difference between Christ on earth and Christ in heaven Christ had not Commission to send so much of the Spirit whiles hee was on earth as when he was in heaven So Eph. 4.8 compare Joh. 7.39 and Act. 2.1 c. In like manner if the Deity did not communicate to Christs man-hood whiles on earth the time for nescience is not a sin yet it s plaine the Deity did communicate it after Christ was in heaven Rev. 1.1 The Revelation of Jesus Christ which GOD GAVE UNTO HIM to shew unto his servants
And accordingly John shews it us Chapt. 11. Chapt. 12 Chapt. 13 Chap. 19. Chap. 20. Lastly Mr. Baily confutes himselfe as hee propounds his argument For hee saith our Doctrine makes the day openâ— when we say The day shall be either one thousand six hundred and fifty or one thousand six hundred ninety five Surely this is not to make the day so certaine or the yeer For saith the Philosopher qui indefinite c. He that answers indefinitely answers nothing Beside we cannot for our lives count so exactly but we may misse at least one yeer if we did absolutely pitch on any one account that were never so right in the footing For my part I shall affirme what is most probable about the account when I come to the seventh and last Book SECT VII Mr. Bailyes seventh Argument THe reward of the Martyrs is everlasting life in the heavens promised to them at Christs comming to judge the just and unjust therefore it is not temporall in an earthly Kingdome of a thousand yeers The Antecedent is proved Matth. 5.10 2 Tim. 4.6 2 Thess 1.6 7 8 9 10. which without doubt is not before the last judgement else the Martyrs would be in a worse case then the soules of other Saints continuing in heaven injoying the Trinity yea a punishment to them being brought downe to the earth to returnâ— to a body not like to the glorious body of Christ nor yet unto these incorruptible immortall spirituall bodies which yet are promised to the least of the faithfull at their resurrection 1 Cor. 15. But unto such a body that eats drinks sleeps fights delights in fleshly pleasures and converseth with beasts and earthly creatures in such a Paradise whereof the Turkish Alcoran and the Jewish Talmud doth speak much But to a godly soule is very tastelesse and to a soul that hath been in heaven exceeding burthensome Answ first We deny the consequence of the Argument For Gods rewarding his people on earth doth not anticipate heaven nor the reward in heaven cut off the rewards on earth See Mat. 19.29 shall receive an hundred fold and shall also inherit eternall life And this in 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in the New Creation as the word signifies And when they sit on Thrones according to Dan. 7.22 which is according to our Text of Rev. 20.4 Secondly we say that those places Mr. B. brings for the proof of his Antecedent doe prove our assertion viz. of an happinesse of the Saints on earth as well as in heaven As that in 1 Tim. 4.6 7 8. For verse 8. it is said At that day and particularly at Christs appearing To understand which see verse 1. And remember our arguing upon those words Shall judge the quicke and the dead at his appearing and his Kingdome Compare Rev. 19. latter end with Rev. 20.3 4. Likewise that which Mr. Baily urgeth out of 2 Thess 1.6 7 8 9.10 plainly proves a reward on earth as well as in heaven It is a RIGHTEOUS thing c. It is mercy to the Saints but righteousnesse chiefly appears upon the wicked that are punished And this appears more to all the world being done on earth To you that are troubled REST WITH US The Apostle aims at a Rest first on earth compare Heb. 2.5 and Chapter 4. verse 9. Rest when the Lord Jesus shall be revealed from HEAVEN Not in Heaven And the flames of fire are expresse Rev. 17 16. and Chapter 18. verse 8 and 9. and Chapter 19 two last Lastly It is said in that 2 Thess 1.9 They shall be punished from the presence of the Lord and from the glory of his power But Christ hath no power in heaven at the ultimate day of judgement but then layes downe all 1 Cor. 15.24 As for Matth. 5.10 there is no mention of the place but in the word Heaven not expressing which of the three heavens as Paul distinguisheth Now St. John calls the â—â—te of the thousand yeers Heaven Rev. 21.1 And in this place of Matth. 5.10 The adjoyning the word KINGDOME to Heaven clearly imports a state on earth For in heaven above nor Saints nor Christ have any Kingdome at the ultimate day of judgement Yee see now how truely Mr. B. saith without doubt the reward in these places is not till the last day of judgement As for M. B. words The Martyrs would be in worse case c. They are grounded on a mistake For all the Saints both the deceased and living shall then share in the same glory on earth For those words It would bee a punishment c. These all flow from ignorance of what the Scripture hath said in this point viz. that their bodies shall in the thousand yeers bee immortall and glorious and conformable to Christs body as we have shewed afore For that Mr. Baily concludes of fighting in the thousand yeers c. let him affirm it when he can without contradicting himself he affirming it a time of all corporall pleasures and when we affirme it And for Turkish Alcoran and Jewish Talmud we have nothing to do with any thing but what we are convinced is according to Scripture But it is the Scottish manner to dispute by branding with reproaches But sure their contrary opinion tends to Familisme SECT VIII Mr. Baylies eighth Argument § 1 THe opinion of the Millenaries supposeth the restauration of Jerusalem and of the Jewish Kingdome after their destruction by the Romans But the Scriptures deny this Ezek. 16.53.55 When I shall bring againe the captivity of Sodome and of Samaria and her daughters then will I bring again the captivity of thy Captives c. The Jews saith Mr. Baily are never to be restored to their ancient outward estate much lesse to a greater and more glorious Kingdome Jerusalem was to be re-builded and the spirituall glory of the second Temple was to be greater then the first And in the end of the same Chapter the restitution of the Jews after the Babylonish Captivity by vertue of the New Covenant is promised But the outward estate of that people was never to be restored to its ancient lustre more then Samaria or Sodome As Amos speakes of Samaria Chap. 5. 2. The Virgin of Israel is fallen and shall no more rise And Isa saith of Jerusalem The transgression thereof shall be heavy and it shall fall and not rise againe According to the prophesie of Jacob Gen. 49.10 The Scepter shall not depart from Judah till Shiloh come Importing saith Mr. Baily that the Tribe of Judah should ever have some outward visible rule till the comming of Christ in the flesh but thereafter the Scepter and Power of the Church shall be onely spirituall in the hand of Shiloh the Messias He was the substance and body of all these types the restauration of Jerusalem and the erecting of the Monarchy in Judah § 2 Answ The Scripture doth not deny the restauration of Jerusalem but affirme it and that most strongly as we have shewed in many
to restraine 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 seem not so fully to answer the Apostles scope and intention which seems to be a general consolation to all that dye in the faith viz. a fruition of Christ then may we give it the largest sense and yet say that it is not needful that the Resurrection of those which dyed in Christ should be all at once or altogether but the Martyrs first in the first resurrection Then after an appointed time the rest of the dead in the last resurrection Afterward when the resurrection shall be thus compleat those which remaine alive at Christs comming shall together with those which are risen be caught into the clouds to meet the Lord in the aire and from thenceforth be eternally with him And so the reason why those which Christ found alive at his coming were not instantly translated should be in part that they might not prevent the dead but bee consummate with them 3 Both these interpretations suppose the rapture of the Saints into the clouds to be for their present translation into heaven But suppose that be not the meaning of it for the words if we weigh them well seem to imply it to be for another end namely to do honour unto their Lord and King at his returne and to attend upon him when he comes to judge the world Those saith the Text which sleep in Jesus will God bring with him He saith not carry away with him Again they and those which are alive shall be caught up together in the Clouds to meet the Lord in the air to meet the Lords coming hither to judgement not to follow him returning hence the judgement being finished Besides it is to be noted that although in the Hebrew notion the air be comprehended under the name of heaven yet would not the Apostle here use the word heaven but the word aire as it were to avoid the ambiguity lest we might interpret it of our translation into heaven If this be the meaning then are those words we shall ever be with the Lord. thus to be interpreted after this our gathering together * In T. More sc his coming c. or gathering unto Christ at his comming so the Apostle calls this rapture 2 Thess 2.1 wee shall from henceforth never lose his presence but alwayes enjoy it partly on earth during his reigne of the thousand yeers and partly in heaven when we shall bee translated thither For it cannot be concluded because the Text saith the Saints after their rapture on high should thenceforth be ever with the Lord Therefore they shall from thenceforth be in heaven for no heaven is here mentioned If they must needs be with Christ there where they are to meet him it would rather follow they should be ever with him in the aire then in heaven which I suppose none will admit And otherwise the Text will afford no more for heaven then it will for earth nay the words he shall bring them with him make most for the latter 4 I will adde this more namely what may be conceived to be the cause of this rapture of the Saints on high to meet the Lord in the clouds rather then to wait his comming to the earth What if it bee that they may be preserved during the conflagration of the earth and the works thereof 2 Pet. 3.10 That as Noah and his family were preserved from the deluge by being lift up above the waters in the Ark so should the Saints at the conflagration bee lift up in the clouds unto their Ark Christ to be preserved there from the Deluge of fire wherein the wicked shall be consumed There is a tradition of the Jews sounding this way which they ascribe unto Elias a Jewish Doctor whose is that Tradition of the duration of the world and well knowne among Divines Duo millia Inane duo millia Lex duo millia dies Messiae viz. Sex mille annos duraturus est mundus He lived under the second Temple about the first times of the Greek Monarchy so that it is no devise of any later Rabbies but a Tradition anciently received amongst them whilst they were yet the Church of God I will transcribe it because it hath something remarkable concerning the thousand yeers It sounds thus Traditio domus Eliae Justi quos resuscitabit Deus non redigentur iterum in pulverem He means of the first and particular resurrection before the general which the Jews acknowledge and talke much of See Wisdome Chapt. 3. ab initio ad finem verse 8. Si quaeras Mille annis ist is quibus Deus Sanctus Benedictus renovaturus est mundum suum de quibus dicitur Et exaltabitur Dominus solus in die illo Es 2.11 quid just is futurum sit sciendum quod Deus benedictus dabit illis alas quasi aquilarum ut volent super facie aquarum unde dicitur Psal 46.3 Propterea non timebimus cum * Psal 46.3 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 mutabitur i. e. changed though we there translate it movebitur i. e. moved mutabitur terra At forte inquies erit ipsis dolori seu afflictioni Sed occurrit illud Esa 40.31 Exspectantibus Dominum innovabunt vires efferentur alâ instar aquilarum The Hebrew words are in Gemara Sanhedrin c. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The Tradition of the house of Eliah The just whom God shall raise viz. in the first resurrection shall not returne to dust But if you aske what shall happen to the just in those thousand yeeres wherein the holy and blessed God shall renew this World whereof it is said Esa 2.11 And the Lord alone shall be exalted in that day you must know that God shall give them the wings as it were of Eagles to flye upon the face of the waters for it is said Psal 46.3 Therefore shall wee not feare when the earth shall bee changed But you will say Perhaps it will be to them a paine and trouble but we are otherwise taught by that in Esa 40.31 They that wait upon the Lord shall renew their strength they shall mount up with wings as Eagles c. CHAP. VI. § 1 SO much for answering Objections against our Point Next I should come to answer Objection against our Arguments And indeed all men are more busie to reply then to prove the contrary which argues that they are ignorant of our Point and cannot tell what the state of the Church shall bee or of the Jewes what it shall be § 2 Doctor Prideaux his exceptions besides those afore to his own Arguments discussed are first That the Revelation is not a representation of a continued story That computations are not demonstrative To which we answer First Either the Revelation is a continued History or else it is no Revelation as Rev. 1.1 and 4.1 and so we may make quidlibet ex quodlibet what we will of it Secondly It answers to Daniels Prophesie and that is a
continued History of future times And thirdly Doctor Prideaux himselfe makes it so in presuming to determine the binding of Satan to be past Fourthly Some anticipations there are in the Revelation as we have shewed but they doe no more overthrow the confirmation of the order of things then in Genesis or other Books of Scripture in which are many anticipations Fifthly Mark the order of continuation In 6 7 8 Chapters are the seven Seals then out of the seventh Seale seven Trumpets c. all which methodically carry on the continuation as Mr. Mede hath demonstrated And for the computations they are so noted in their beginnings and endings that we can with more certainty compute our conclusion then the Doctor doth the contrary § 3 Pareus his exceptions doe but idem saxum volvere tumble over againe the same stone That which wee have before laid downe will sufficiently refute him and Mr. Hain and other Replicants Finis Libri Quinti THE SIXTH BOOK Holding forth particularly WHAT this GLORIOUS State on Earth shall be of which we have treated all this while in the former five BOOKS THE INTRODUCTION Laying forth the generall Heads of this Book touching the WHAT of this Glorious Time § 1 HAving demonstrated the Quòd sit THAT there is A Glorious state of all things yet to bee on Earth afore the universal judgement of all the quicke and dead Next we are to declare the Quid sit WHAT the said glorious state shall be § 2 For which we have already made some way and preparation by a necessitated anticipation by reason that the proofs being Divine and interwoven with severall passages of both viz. of the That and What of this aforesaid state we could not pick the one from the other nor explaine and demonstrate the meaning of the former without a scruteny into some passages of the later where we found them so intermixt Howbeit we insisted upon them no further then to a proofe of the literall meaning of the place reserving the distinct and larger discusse for this Book In this WHAT are to be considered these five Heads § 3 I The Chaos Of the glorious state aforesaid yet to come and to be on earth afore the ultimate judgement II The Creation Of the glorious state aforesaid yet to come and to be on earth afore the ultimate judgement III The Dimensions Of the glorious state aforesaid yet to come and to be on earth afore the ultimate judgement IV The Qualifications Of the glorious state aforesaid yet to come and to be on earth afore the ultimate judgement V The Priviledges Of the glorious state aforesaid yet to come and to be on earth afore the ultimate judgement CHAP. I. Touching the Chaos § 1 BY the Chaos we mean the preparation to this estate or the manner of the beginning thereof That as in the old and first Creation the Chaos was the evening of the world with which it began as the Rabbins before quoted * Lib. 4. Chap. 4. use to speake so this second or New Creation as it is called Isa 65.17 2 Pet. 3.13 Rev. 21.1 begins with an evening And as after that as an Antitypicall memoriall of the finishing thereof celebrated on the Sabbaticall seventh day the Church of the Jews in all ages to Christs time began their Sabbath in the evening so this Sabbatisme of the glorious state of which we speak as it is called Heb. 4. afore largely explained shall begin and have its Ante-scene or Prelude in a kind of evening Now as the evening taken in that largeness as Gen. 1. in the first part hath some light and sometimes a glare of the Sun at its last withdrawing though the day hath been dusk and dim all afore and receives for a farewell a reflexion of the beams darted backward upon the clouds with a twy-light following it but in the latter part it is darke So in this evening in the first part thereof there shall be some manifestation of the Sonne of Righteousnesse the Lord Jesus Christ for the Call of the Jewes Zach. 12.10 Rev. 1.7 and the setting them on foot to contend for their liberty against the Turk and all Antichristian enemies But in the latter part of this evening after that Christ hath rowsed them up to that contest there shall be a darknesse of great troubles Da. 12.1 And these troubles it seems by the two last ver of that 12 of Dan. may last 45 yeers afore the Jews with the Gentiles come to their glorious enjoyments at the resurrection of all the Elect deceased and the change of the believers then alive But when that evening and night is passed over the Righteous shall have the DOMINION in the morning Psal 49. v. 14. which learned Junius interprets of the Saints happy estate in the morning of the resurrection which S. John Rev. 20.4 calls the first Resurrection as we have before demonstrated For at the last ultimate end when CHRIST layes downe all his rule and power 1 Cor. 15.24.28 we cannot imagine that Christians may be said to have Dominion § 2 Now as in the evening shutting in there is an end a setting in a cloud and a darkning of all the glory of the precedent day all glorious things are wrapt up in obscurity and all glorious persons their Masters Kings Princes and Potentates are couched and crouched downe as beasts in their dens and lye like dead men and none of all these things or persons survive but whom and what God will permit to escape fire or death c. So this glorious state shall begin as to the preface or preparation with a setting and dark eclipsing of all the worldly glory of former times things and persons viz. of the foure former Monarchies root and branch with all their impertinent appurtenances that stand in the way to hinder Christs glorious Kingdome on earth Dan. 7. Rev. 11.18 and 19. Chapters c. of which abundantly afore And we have seen it far more by experience since this subject was divers yeers by-past preached and asserted Wonder not therefore at the pullings downe of humane glories to this day and the many scuffles about them almost over the whole World The summe of worldly pompe is declining towards Sun-set the shadowes grow long it begins to be duske upon all Secular splendor The night comes on great stormes will arise but though they may be universall on the Jewes for the said five and forty yeers because universally they have for above five and forty scores of yeers refused the Messiah yet likely the tempest on the Gentiles that have owned Christ may but drive along by coasts falling here and there by succession they having suffered much already for Christs sake by Heathens Turks Papists and falsely named Protestants § 3 But as after the shutting down of the evening even in the dark night there is still a continued tendency towards the succeeding day and the glory thereof The Sunne is still hastening to rise again So
spirit shall be removed farre away from the Church Zach. 13 2. Thirdly For the rest of the dayes works of Creation as in them were created the dry-land the Plants the Fishes and Fowls and Animals c. So in this New creation there shall be a perfection of all those then in being for of a resurrection of irrationals I know nothing and they shall be freed and set at liberty from all danger and hardship Isa 11.6 7 8 9. Rom. 8.19 20 21 22. I speak now short to these things because I am not yet come to the qualifications of this future glorious estate into which this Head would sometimes faine draw me but I will not be anticipated ¶ 4 This future glorious estate on earth is a creation in regard of the end viz. that as man was created last of all most perfect in soule and body as the subordinate end next under God for which God made it viz. that man might have the possession and use of all and dominion over all Gen. 1.26 So in this New creation Christ restores all things to their perfection and every beleever to his to that end that all beleevers being raised or changed as afore described may joyntly and co-ordinately rule over the whole world and all things therein next under Christ their Head I say All and not apart onely as some unwarily publish And I say joyntly not one part of the Saints to usurp authority over the rest as many dream And co-ordinately All upon equall tearms not some Saints to rule by Deputies made of the rest of the Saints as the practise of men seem to interpret And all to be true Saints not seeming Thus we read in Dan. 7. verse 14. and 27. And Rev. 20.4 And Chap. 21. verse 24.26 Study the places well and you will easily picke it out CHAP. III. Measuring out the DIMENSIONS of this glorious estate to be on Earth afore the ultimate universal Judgement § 1 HAving done with the Creation of it we come next to the Dimensions Quantity or Extent of the glorious Kingdome of Christ on Earth yet expected viz. That as the other foure Monarchies did over spread all the inhabited world as it is said of Nebuchadnezzars Assyrto-Chaldean Monarchy Dan. 2.37 that he was King of Kings and that WHERESOEVER THE CHILDREN OF MEN DWEâ—T the Beasts of the field and fowles of the Heaven GOD HAD GIVEN INTO HIS HAND and had made him RULER OVER ALL and of Caesars Roman Monarchy Luke 2.1 That there went out a decree from him that ALL THE WORLD should bee taxed So this fifth Monarchy of the Saints reigning on earth under Christ must be as large as those Monarchies as large as the whole world for ample Dominion though not for sincere conversion That is the generality of men in the time of this Kingdome being converted into true Saints they shall rule over all the whole world of men swallowing up the other former Monarchies So that if there be remaining a secret seed of hypocrisie in â—ome which shall at last God so foretelling Rev. 20.8 breake out in the Gogican War at the end of our THOUSAND yeers shall yet mean while all men all the time of the thousand yeers shall be demurely subject to the Dominion of the Saints Touching the latitude and largenesse of this Holy-Kingdome read Dan. 2.34 35. The stone cut out without hands smote the Image on his feet that were of iron and of clay and brake them to peeces Then was the iron the clay the brasse the silver and the gold broken in peeces together and became like the chasse of the Summerthershing floore and the wind carried them away so that NO PLACE WAS FOUND FOR THEM and the stone that smote the Image became a great Mountaine and FILLED THE WHOLE EARTH Dan. 7.26 27 And the judgement shall sit and they shall take away his the preceding Monarchies Dominion c. And the Kingdome and Dominion and the greatnesse of the Kingdome UNDER THE WHOLE HEAVEN shall be given to the people of the Saints c. And Rev. 10.7 St. John having said In the dayes of the voyce of the seventh Angel when he shall BEGIN to sound the mystery of God shall be finished he goes on in the 11. Chapter verse 15. saying The seventh Angel sounded and there were great voyces in Heaven saying The KINGDOMES of this WORLD are become the Kingdomes of our Lord and of his Christ and he shall reigne for ever That is no Monarchy shall ever be on earth after his Adde Isa 2. In the second verse c. whereof yee have the propagation of the Gospel of Christs Kingdome and mens obedience to it In the 11 verse repeated againe verse 17. yee have the Lord Christ exalted and his overthrowing all worldly powers prostrate before him in these words The lofty lookes of man shall be humbled and the haughtinesse of men shall be bowed downe and the LORD ALONE shall be exalted Which words though covertly for feare of provoking worldly Monarchs are alleadged by the Jewes to the same end as you have heard afore at large To the same effect of the largenesse of Christs Kingdome is that notable place in Isa 24. verse 21 22 23. In that day it shall come to passe that the Lord shall punish the Host of the high ones that are on high and the Kings of the earth UPON EARTH and they shall be gathered together as prisoners are gathered in the pit and shall be shut up in the prison and after many dayes they shall be visited Then the Moon shall be confounded and the Sunne ashamed when the Lord of Hosts shall REIGNE IN MOUNT SION and in Jerusalem before his Ancients gloriously His Ancients are his ancient people the Jews And as the material Sunne and Moon shall be then nothing in comparison of the light of Gods presence as afore-shewed so the metaphorical Sunne and Moon for the same Scripture may have two subordinate senses Rev. 17.9 10. I say the metaphorical Sunne and Moon of higher and lower humane Majesties shall be confounded with shame So Jacob a Prince in those times and his wife are called by the name and interpreted to be the meaning of that name of the Sunne and Moon in Josephs dream Gen. 37.9 even as we had but now in that 24 of Isa both name and thing metaphor meaning expressed And by the same rule and proportion we may admit of others annexing a metaphorical sense to that Revelation 21. verse 23 24. that in Christs Kingdome to come upon earth there shall be no need of the Sunne or Moon i. e. of Emperial Royal or Princely Potentates to keep the peace as we have expounded it also in a litteral sense of the obscuring of the glory of all the Stars by the paramount glory of Gods presence For God and the Lambs presence shall be in stead of and more then the Sunne and Moon in both senses One both learned and godly doth likewise to the
happinesse then it must not be taken from them by the old misery of death If all the Elect dead and alive must reigne on earth a thousand yeers as we have proved then there must be no death to cut this time shorter They doe not reigne if subject in the thousand yeers to that great enemy Death Nor do any of them live a thousand yeers if by succession they dye in that thousand yeers If there shall be no more sorrow nor cries nor paines as wee heard afore how then can this Man-eater death continue If sinne be gone why should death remaine § 2 But to leave discourses and come to plaine places of Scripture which are divers ¶ 1 Isa 25.8 He i. e. the Lord mentioned in the former verses will swallow up death in victory and the Lord God will wipe away all tears from off all faces and the rebuke of his people c. Wee before demonstrated that this place belongs to the glorious time we speake of sc when the Jewes are called And you see how full it speaks to the thing of the removal of death Calvin confesseth that this is under Christs Kingdome and addes under Christs universal Kingdom And sure Christ as Christ hath no Kingdom in heaven after the ultimate judgement nor universal now ¶ 2 Another place is in Hos 13.14 I will ransome them from the power of the grave And I will redeem them from death O death I will be thy plagues O grave I wil be thy destruction Repentance shall be hid from mine eyes Which place is evidently spoken to Ephraim the ten Tribes verse 12. therefore this cannot relate to the return of the two Tribes from Babylon And it is as evident that more then a spiritual deliverance of a mans soul from death in sin is meant in that here is joyned deliverance from the grave with deliverance from death And twice a mention of grave But much adoe there is with some that would faine make this Text a continuation of the Prophets minatory speech in the former Chapter But the words are plaine words of mercy and a Prophesie of mercy quoted by Paul not onely that God can doe such a thing as in the Text but that he will do it Again how common is it for the Prophets in their preaching mifericordias cum minis mifcere to mingle mercies with minatories So that they may as well say almost that the 14. Chapter is a continuation of threatnings It is frequent in this Prophesie to make threats and comforts so take their turnes Chap. 1. Chap. 2. c. And to me it is plaine and evident that as it is noted in our English Translation at verse 9. begins a Sermon of mercy and so is continued to the end of the 14. verse It is said in verse 9. O Israel thou not I hast destroyed thy self Thou hast brought thy misery on thy selfe But I will be thy King where is any other to save thee in all thy Cities So plainly according to Heb. And for experience the Lord tells Ephraim that the King they desired and had could not save them And therefore God was their onely saving King and therefore was not pleased in giving them a King and in anger did he take away Kings from them because of their confidence in them but this taking them away would make way for their imbracing God for their King according to that which follows in the ensuing promises As for verse 12. The iniquity of Ephraim is bound up and hid Hiding as well sounds of justification and pardon of sin Psal 32.1 Rom. 4.7 as of punishment And for the 13. verse close to the Hebrew thus Sorrows of a woman in travel will come upon him viz. Ephraim He an unwise Sonne * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 If vid. Schindl if he shall stay long in the breaking forth of children i. e. in the straitnesse of the womb i. e. If by repentance he doe not help himselfe out of his sorrows But however verse 14. I sayes the Lord if Ephraim be unwise and helps not himselfe yet I the Lord will ransome them c. as aforesaid Sure enough these words are plaine for the point in hand even as both those two places aforesaid are severall times quoted in the New Testament and applied to a state that is to be afore the ultimate day of judgement ¶ 3 For 1. both places seem to mee to be touched in 1 Cor. 15.54 55. As our new notes on the Bible concur with mee For in the 54. verse seems to be quoted Isa 25.8 For the Apostles words are plainly the same with Isaiah Death is swallowed up in victory And in 55. verse seems a quotation of Hos 13.14 For the Apostles challenge is plainly according to Hosea O grave where is thy victory Secondly The Apostle makes application of the fulfilling of these Prophesies to be at the time we speak of sc of the visible glory of the Church on earth For which observe these particulars First The Apostle mentions our restitution to our state in the first Adam by Christ the second Adam v. 49. compared with Psal 8. As Psal 8. with Gen. 1.26 to which end the visible glorious state of the Church is set out by having a Fountain and Tree of life alluding to Paradise Rev. 22. All which import a state upon earth Secondly That the Apostle mentions the time to be at the sound of the last Trumpet importing other Trumpets to sound first so that the last Trumpet is the seventh as John numbers them not hid from Paul Now from the beginning of the sounding of the seventh Trumpet so many things follow as wee have several times demonstrated that there must of necessity be a state of the Churches visible glory before the ultimate day of judgement For when Rev. 11.15 the seventh Angel sounded then First There was an Earthquake v. ibid. Secondly A proclaiming that the Kingdomes of the earth are the Kingdomes of Christ v. 15. Christ shall reign for ages of ages till time be no more ibid. Fourthly Saints sing praise for it v. 16 17. Fifthly Christ takes to him his great power and now reigns v. 17. Sixthly Nations are angry at it v. 18. Seventhly The Saints are raised and rewarded v. 18. Eighthly A destroying of them that destroyed the earth and care is taken of the earth v. 18. Ninthly The Temple of God is opened and the Arke discovered v. 19. Tenthly Lightinings and thundrings and earthquakes and great haile v. 19. All these here beside that in Rev. 20. Rev. 21. Rev. 22. From the beginning of the seventh Trumpet to the end of it Now let any ingenuous man judge by these ten particulars whether they are consistent with heaven above and whether they must not necessarily import a state on earth So that the Apostle here in this 1 Cor. 15. mentioning the raising of the Saints the cloathing of them with incorruption and the changing of them that are alive quoting those two
is risen upon thee Darknesse on the earth and people thereof but the Lord shall rise upon thee and his glory shall be seen upon thee This shining is inward and outward For as the Church shall shine in her selfe with Gods beams So verse 3. The Gentiles shall come to thy light and Kings to the brightnesse of thy rising And verse 6. They from Sheba c. shall bring gold and incense and shall shew forth the praises of the Lord. Accordingly Rev. 21 as the Church is glorious in her selfe so from without verse 24. The Nations of them that are saved shal walke in the light of the Church which God shines on it and Kings shall bring their honor unto it As is the glory of the Sun in its ascending over every Horizon is the glory of the world In the inside in the life of all things In the outside in the light and lustre on all So shall it bee with the Church If in this time as Isa 30.26 At the day the Lord bindeth up the breach of his people the light of the Moon shall be as the light of the Sun c. So gloriously shall God manifest himselfe to the Church that all glory shall her condition be As New Jerusalem is new decked c. Rev. 21. So all her buildings walls streets gates c. according to Isa 54. verse 11. are compared to gold and all precious stones which comparison of glorious gold and precious stones c. import all manner of glory of the Church If our bodies shall bee conformed to Christs glorious body so every bodily thing shall have the highest perfection that it was created in And the best jewels and treasures shall not be appropriated to Heathens Atheists Popish Hypocrites or gracelesse Kings and Princes and Potentates But if it may adde to the Churches glory they shall be brought to the Church as right owner ¶ 2 Environed with peace and safety Christ the King and Prince of peace Heb. 7. Isa 9. Createth peace for all his subjects far and neer Isa 57.19 sc As inward peace So outward too Isa 65. last No preying on one another no destroying no hurting So Psal 72.3.7 See the Title sc A Psalme for Solomon sc Solomon the Great sc Christ The Mountaines shall bring peace to the people and little hils by righteousnesse In his dayes shall the righteous flourish and abundance of peace as long AS THE MOON INDURES See by this what Solomon is meant Mountains and Hils signifie that Emperours Princes Dukes Lords c. shall no longer as Mountaines shadow the Church by oppression or that men shall not make mountaines and hills holds and garrisons to subdue the Church Isa 11.6 There shall be peace between Man and all creatures between Children and Aspes the Wolfe and Lamb Cow and Bear of which say two learned Authors there is both a spiritual and litteral sense All men with their great power glory wits policies and potency shall be so tame as a childe may rule them and all creatures shall be restored as in the day of Creation Calvin upon this 11. of Isa 6. saith That the Prophet aimes at a further thing then we are aware of For it intimates saith he a restauration of all things as at the first creation and so goes on in many words See learned men consulâ—ò handling this question are lost in Allegories but when they are off of that question sincerely weighing the places of Scripture tending to it then it drops from them ere they are aware So Calvin here So Pareus on Rom. 8. is against Pareus on Rev. 20. ¶ 3 Enlarged with liberty It is the great yeer of Jubilee even in the opinion of the Jews As it is freedome from all evill as we have shewed so a freedome to injoy all good They shall have the waters of life the comforts of the Gospel free for their use Rev. 22.17 and enough for all And the Tree of life Christ free for all to injoy him fully Verse 2. And the Gates of the Church are alwayes open freely for all Saints to enter Rev. 21. They shall bee as free in all injoyments as in heaven for this is an Heaven ¶ 4 Perpetuated with stable equability Now they fully injoy him that is the first and last with an even continuance the heavens and earth must be as one as he pleaseth Isa 48.12 13. And this his Title of Alpha and Omega Christ makes his preface Rev. 1.17 to the glorious Catastrophe Rev. 20.4 c. to the end of the Bible Now the substance of all eternity is entred upon Christ the everlasting Father the eternall God the everlasting Spirit and Covenant c. must now appeare in a perpetuated stability of all perfect Church glory to all the Elect. Magog shall not interrupt but occasionally promote the Churches eternall blisse Therefore now let not our hearts be unstable in hope nor our affections unstable in love nor our judgements unstable in principles nor our practice unstable in duties and ordinances Remember the evill of the foolish Virgins Remember the good precepts and promises of Christ as a warning us afore his comming now at hand Rev. 22.7.11 12 13 14 15 16 17. v. 7. I come quickly blessed is he that keepeth these sayings of this Prophesie Verse 11. Let him that is righteous be righteous still 12. Behold I come quickly and my reward is with me I am Alpha and Omega sc I make no other end or beginning but happinesse in and with me 14. Blessed are they that keep his commandements that they may eat of the Tree of life and enter the Gates of the City of the Church Without shall be Dogs They that are found out of it shall goe for Dogs 16. I Jesus have sent my Angel to testifie these things to the CHURCHES 17. Hee that testifies these things saith Surely I come quickly then John concludes as I Come Lord Jesus come quickly SECT X. This state will have the face and character of Eternity IN the three last Qualities of this state of the Church sc First No more time Secondly A perfection of Qualities natural and spirituall in the Saints Thirdly A confluence of all comforts in the injoyer and the injoyment I say in regard of these three This state of the Church will have the face a semblance of Eternity the property and character of Eternity For the idiom and peculiar of Eternity is to give a man all parts and degrees of his comfort at once throughout every moment of Eternity In Time is succession where is the beginning middle and the end The embrion augment and the highest perfection that that comfort will amount to but in Eternity a man is as happy the first moment as ten thousand yeers after if there were any time in Eternity So here proportionably the Saints blisse after Christ hath begun the compleatnesse of this estate shall be as full at first as at last The difference from a state in Time is as
our Saviour also testifies to this Prognostick Matth. 24. After the signes to come to passe whiles the end was not yet but were onely the beginnings of sorrow verse 6. verse 8. Christ addes other signes that should more neerly precede and point at the end And amongst many direful signes he gives this INIQUITY SHALL ABOUND after which the Gospel being preached to all the world as a witnesse to them THEN SHALL THE END COME verse 9. to 15. To the same purpose Rev. 18. verse 2 3 4 5 6. Babylon the Great is fallen is fallen that is shall fall as certainly as if already fallen c. FOR HER SINNES HAVE REACHED UNTO HEAVEN § 2 Now whether the enemies wickednesse is not mounted up to the height and the Antichristian parties sinnes I mean all that oppose Christ by what names or titles soever by what way or means or manner soever are not come to the full I leave the well-principled sound sanctified spiritual soul to judge Turcisme and Papisme is now worse then ever by how much more they have of late prevailed and have sinned against greater light and are more encouraged by the enmities and impieties among Protestants The Arminian and Socinian party with their Articuli perpendendi Advancements of mans will Disputes against the Deity of Christ with some questionings of the Holy Ghost have struck in with the Antichristian party and joyning in effect at least their forces with them have greatly enlarged their Quarters The Lutherans still as obstinately as ever if not more obstinately since against more light shining in sundry disputes destroy the humanity of Christ by their doctrine of Consubstantiation The learned of the Jews poor soules are now more obstinate against Christ come in the flesh then ever And for Protestant Nations or Peoples I am utterly astonished in my thoughts and distressed for words to expresse their unparallelable Apostasies The revolt among Professours is generall Their blasphemous words against God Christ the Holy Ghost the Holy Scriptures and consequently against Salvation Heaven Hell the Immortality of the Soule and all Fundamentals are nefanda so wicked that they are not to be mentioned though I could distinctly lest I should leave some staine upon some pious soule that may read this Treatise Their many wicked practices are sutable Community of women swearing drinking c. And these practised by principle as the way to destroy the flesh By this meanes many Jesuits false Prophets false Teachers and damnable Seducers are encouraged as the mutter abroad is every where to creep in amongst them All Religious worship is decried as flesh and forme The wicked prophane are extreamly encouraged the commers on in Religion offended and beaten off And the very knees and hearts of true Saints are made feeble and ready to faint And all this account is brought in as the returne of all the marvells of mercies and miraculary deliverances that God hath given them Whiles Politicals have been recovered Religion hath been lost And whosoever will not be high in these enormities is scorned as low The Nations called Protestant minde conquest rather then conscience Hellish Heresies break out in Print from beyond and on this side the Seas The profession of most of those Countries is come to looke like dirt gain being their godlinesse Their words and promises but lyes and flatteries And selfe is now the great God that ruleth all And of all these I would I could not give so true an account as I can with admiration of Gods patience the meane while I have nor list nor cause maliciously to inveigh against Protestant Nations but out of griefe of soule and to prosecute the point in hand I have given these few hints SECT IV. The fourth Prognostick Wars and rumors of Wars c. THis Prognosticke our Saviour gives us Matth. 24.6 7. in answer to that question put to him by the Disciples verse 3. saying to him Tell us when shall these things be And what shal be the sign of thy comming and of the end of the world But withal he gives us this caution that these wars and rumors of wars are a remoter signe adding to this signe verse 6. That the end is not yet And verse 8. That they are but the beginnings of sorrow But Daniel brings this signe as it may comprehend all great and remarkable wars viz. those the Jewes shall have with their adversaries the Turke c. neerer to the end Dan. 11.44 45. compared with Dan. 12.1 viz. at that time of the Jews wars aforesaid Michael shall stand up to deliver his people though the worke of that deliverance in those wars will it seems by verse 12.13 collated take up the time of five and forty yeers Now I leave all knowing men to judge whether we have not Wars and rumors of Wars whiles most if not all Nations of the Gentiles viz. England Scotland Ireland France Spaine Italy Netherlands or Low-Countries Denmarke Portugal Sweadland Helvetia or Switzerland Poland Muscovy The huge Empire of the Turke The vast Indies c. are either in the practise or posture or preparations and expectations of War There is wanting but the driving and fall of this storme of the Gentiles Wars on the Romish Westerne Antichrist and next the Jews taking up armes against the Turkish Easterne Antichrist and then the Worke or thing signified of which those rumors of Wars are a signe will be doing at least in the Preface and preparation Which last Warre some thinke is not far off in regard of their great Mathematicians wonderfull words to that end their abundant pursing up of gold their writing letters to each other in severall Countries to that purpose their late change of their letter for concealment of their messages by writing The professed expectation of some of their Learned of the Messiah to come in the yeer 1656. or thereabouts SECT V. Giving a touch upon several other Prognosticks viz. THe more we shall see Monarchy to fall Dan. 2.34 35. the oftner there appears strange signes in the Heavens following the great tribulations upon earth Matth. 24.29.30 And the lowder is heard vox populi the voyce of the generality of Gods people in their discourses and prayers that Babylon is falling and the Lord Christ is about to reigne Rev. 19. first six verses the neerer wee may expect the approach of this Glorious state on earth How much of these things have or doe appear already I leave wise men to recall to minde and consider CHAP. III. Containing several Computations of time searching when this glorious state on Earth shall approach § 1 OF which in general I would admonish the Reader First That I shall not trouble my selfe with any Computation whose period is expired because experience hath sufficiently confuted it § 2 Secondly That I would not have him to be troubled at the Computers though he finde their numerary principles different and their Computations inconsistent one with the other but in such darke and difficult
by ascention to possesse the Kingdome of glory there to be installed into this on earth That being the originall of this or that being the Emperiality to which this the Tributary or Province Or Heaven being the Metropolis this below the Territories Sure enough expresse it is that he went away into a far Country which can be no other but heaven Christ having never travelled bodily out of his owne Country Secondly that though hee were before his going a Noble-man and had the Regiment or Government over a Royalty he had servants he had the command of imploying them as he listed And had the power of rewarding or punishing as he pleased so that the unprofitable servant that improved not his Talent he cast into utter darknesse where was weeping and gnashing of teeth Matth. 25.30 All which in that Matth. 25.14 c. is called the Kingdome of Heaven that is the Kingdome of Grace as appears in the former Parable of the Virgins the same in sence v. 1. c. Yet thirdly it is said this Noble-man went into a far Country to receive for himselfe another Kingdome and to returne vers 12. where as his receiving the Kingdome is put before his returning So on the other side it is said He returned receiving a Kingdome vers 15. * Gr. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which Arias renders in redire ipsum accipientem regâ—um where his returning is put before his receiving the Kingdome so that both Kingdomes must be here meant viz. Christ receiving the Kingdome of glory afore his returne and his Kingdome of visible power of reigning on earth after his returne For meerly his Kingdome of glory in Heaven cannot be here understood because touching his reigning there it was in vaine unpossible and altogether unlikely for his enemies to send an ambassage after him saying They would not have him to reigne over them And meerly his Kingdome of grace cannot bee here understood because that is otherwise expressed under the comparison of Talents compare Matth 25. And moreover it is here distinctly set downe that he is to goe into a far Country and then actually to receive another Kingdome partly before he returned and partly after he returned even as there is a diversity of actions In that Kingdome of Grace there is mentioned onely the neglect of improving the Talents but in this Kingdome of visible power received after his returne there is an high affront offered they send a message that they would not have him to reigne Again there is diversity of names The former are called Servants The latter are called Enemies Adde that there is a different dispensation of justice The unprofitable servant is put into a darke prison but the enemies must bee slaine AFORE HIM Therefore of necessity here must be hinted the Kingdome of Christs visible power That was it the Jewes expected yea and the best of them viz. the Disciples as we have heard afore and therefore to that Christ here speaks And for that Christ did not set up this at his coming in the flesh delivering them from the Romans therefore his Citizens his enemies hated him and sent a message after him They hated him as in relation of having him to be their visible King or King of visible Dominion when they cryed at his arraignment They had no King but Caesar And they sent an embassage after him when after his death in opposition to that kingly-hood they were angry with Pilate for writing in the Title set over him in Hebrew Greek and Latine THIS IS THE KING OF THE JEWES § 5 There are also severall other passages in this Parable for Christs visible appearance and setting up his visible Kingdome of power on earth yet before the ultimate day of judgement As first His giving to the improvers of their Talents to one the rule over ten Cities to another the rule over five Cities And the Talent of him that had improved nothing to him that had improved much all which compared with the preface of the Parable touching the appearing of the Kingdome cannot in any thing well relate to the state of meer supernall eternall glory in the highest Heavens 2 His causing his enemies to bee slaine afore his face suits not to Christs meer Kingdome of grace whose Dominion precisely considered is in the power of the Gospel Nor doth it comport and comply with the ultimate day of judgement when instead of slaying enemies there is a making them alive And instead of punishing them before Christs face there is a sending them away from the presence of the Lord into eternal judgement But these extremely well agree with Christs appearing to set up his visible Kingdome of power For then Christ shall destroy his Antichristian Jewish and Gentilish and mixt Turkish enemies with the brightnesse of his appearance as hath been opened upon 2 Thess 2. in Sect 4. of this second Book And shall slay them corporally Revelat. 19. latter end § 6 Indeed the whole Parable appears to them that can leave the commonr ode of Tradition and wishly minde and ingeniously weigh the passages and preface thereof to aime at Christs next coming to set up such a Kingdome as shall not onely perfect the spirituall deliverance of the Gentiles but also to performe the temporall deliverance of the Jewes from their dispersion and corporall miseries For the naturall current of the Parable runnes thus Christ being neer Hierusalem the Jewes thought the Kingdome of God would immediately appeare Doubtlesse it was far from their thoughts in the captive condition they were now in to expect the appearance of the Kingdome of glory in Heaven For the hundreds of promises of their deliverance from the corporall captivity were not fulfilled And for the Kingdome of grace these men little minded And the better sort viz. the Disciples and Beleevers had seen it appeare already therefore it is the other Kingdome of Christ viz. that of his visible power and rule to deliver them from their corporall enemies that they supposed would immediately appeare Now to this saith Christ It will not immediatly appeare but I must saith he first goe into a farre Country viz. into Heaven and there be instated and Crowned King and after that come againe and actually and visibly reigne the meane while you to whom I have given Talents that is have endowed with gifts must imploy them and at my return as a signe of my visible actuall power I will take account of you and cause mine enemies that oppose my visible reigning to bee slaine afore me § 7 Now at the ultimate day of Judgement Christ receives no Kingdome but resignes all his Kingdome Power and Dominion 1. Cor. 15.28 CHAP. III. Of five places out of the Old Testament to prove the visible appearance of Christ to the Church on earth at the time of her restauration SECT I. The first place is out of Dan. 7.11 to end of the Chapter § 1 THis place we put first because it doth give much light
tell One of our opposites said that it must be a long while that Christ judgeth as man and judgeth men as men and therefore the ultimate judgement must be a long time ¶ 2 To the second proof viz. out of Act. 3.21 wee have already largely shewed that that place is very full and home for our opinion See our second Book page 96. But because Mr. Bayly will undertake to urge some speciall particulars we will answer particularly to them First He urgeth That the time here understood is that when all things spoken by all the Prophets are performed But all things spoken by all the Prophets are not performed till the last day of judgement Hee backs this with Rom. 8.21 compared with verse 18. and 23. where saith he The restitution of the creatures to their desired liberty comes not before the redemption of our bodies and the glory to be revealed on the whole Church at the last day To which wee answer Mr. B. in most of these Propositions refers which in our English peremptorily to all things But the Greeks is plainly this 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. and is duely rendred thus Whom the heavens must receive untill the TIMES of restitution of all things WHICH TIMES God hath spoken c. And so the Arabecke Christ must be received of heaven unto THE TIMES which shall confirm the perfecting of all the speeches which times God hath spoken of c. And plain reason is most fair for this reading of referring which to times not to all things because all the Prophets of the Old Testament generally for the most part have spoken of the TIMES of restitution but have not spoken of all things that are to bee fulfilled witnesse many things in the New Testament which the Apostles tell us were hid in old time and St. Johns six first Seales Trumpets and Vials shew as much As also the binding of Satan And therefore that speech of Mr. B. That the time of the performing of all things which any of the Prophets have spoken cannot possibly exist before he last judgement is a false proposition because some of the Prophets whole Prophesies in the Old Testament for them Peter then must needs mean have been fulfilled already As the Prophesie of Jonah the utmost of which was the resurrection of Christ which was a time of restitution of our Head but not of all things by our Head Adde that it is said Here the TIMES of restitution of ALL THINGS which are distinguished from the ultimate day of judgement which is a time of dissolution and destruction of things To which RESTITUTIOâ— is quite opposite And TIMES are in the plurall as well as THINGS And therefore a precise ultimaâ—e day of judgement in Mr. B. sense is not particularly pointed out But that ALL THINGS MUST HAVE their TIMES to be restored As the Saints for a thousand yeers And restitution imports a state once had and lost not a state altogether new and different as that in heaven And therefore Psal 8. and Heb. 2. doe refer to such a state as Adam had For Rom. 8.18 to 24. which Mr. B. quotes for proof That the time of fulfilling all things which any of the Prophets have spoken cannot possibly exist before the last judgement I say his quoting this eighth of Rom. to confirme this Proposition Mr. Bayly taking the last judgement for the ultimate day of judgement overthrows himselfe For in these thousand yeers is revealed the glory IN US Rom. 8.18 Marke the phrase in us And in verse 19. Then is the manifestation viz. to all the world of the Sonnes of God which in heaven is hid from the world And verse 19.20 31 22. Then in those thousand yeers the creature IT SELFE and whole creation according to their groans shall be delivered from the vanity and travell and paine it is now in into the liberty of the Sons of God which cannot be at the ultimate day of judgement when comes the dissolution And then in that thousand yeers most properly is it said in verse 25 And not onely the CREATURES but OUR SELVES ALSO shall have the redemption of our bodies it being a condition proper in place and nature for bodies The second thing that Mr. Bayly urgeth out of this third of Act. 21. is That the time here spoken of is when the Jews to whom Peter spake were to be refreshed by the Lords presence But that shall not be before the generall Resurrection To which we answer This is a begging of the question wee have shewed that 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 from the face or appearance of Christ shall the Saints in this thousand yeers have a great refreshing especially here meant of the Jewes in generall who then must be called and so injoy this refreshing For at the ultimate judgement and generall Resurrection will bee too late a time to call them The third thing Mr. Bayly urgeth out of this Act. 3. is this The time when God doth solemnly before men and Angels declare the absolution and blotting out of the sins of all his people is not before the last day But this is the time whereof the Apostle Peter speaks in the present place as appears by verse 19. That your sins may be blotted out when the time of refreshing shall come from the presence of the Lord. To which we answer as to the minor Proposition First that Peter here speaks of the blotting out the Jews sins and those sins were refusing and crucifying Christ Act. 2. And these are blotted out when Christ appears and they repent at sight of him and owne him and this is before the last day of judgement Zach. 12.10 Rev. 1.7 as we have before demonstrated out of these places As for all those words Mr. Bayly heaps up of solemnly before men and Angels declare the absolution c. they cannot be inferred from this text As the word refreshing is but a low word to signifie the absolutest highest happinesse And the last day is a late time to blot out the sins of the Jews when they are not yet converted nor shall then bee but by the appearance of Christ unto them Zach. 11. Rev. 1. ¶ 3 The third and last proof of Mr. Baylies minor Proposition of his first Argument That Christ remaines in the heavens till the last judgement is in John 14.2 and 3. To which we answer Christ doth not in the least there intimate that he would not come againe till the last judgement as Mr. B. understands the last judgement And it is very plaine that Christ will first come againe and receive them to himselfe before he carry them into the mansion in the highest heavens if Mr. Bayly wil needs understand those mansions onely Howbeit there is no expression of Heaven And the Greek is prepare a place without any article of emphasis And the Fathers house is large Ephes 3.14 15. For this cause I bow my knees unto the Father of our Lord Jesus Christ of whom the whole